NOTICE - EXIM

NOTICEThis page appended to digital file by EXIM Bank.

The following document is an environmental assessment or supplemental environmental report (such as a remediation or mitigation plan or procedure, or related monitoring report) (“Assessment/Report”) that has been produced by a third-party and required to be submitted to the Export-Import Bank of the United States in conjunction with the referenced EXIM Bank transaction number . It is being provided here in furtherance of Section 11(a)(1) of the Export Import Bank Act of 1945, as amended (12 U.S.C. 635i-5).

Please note that the Assessment/Report is as of the date noted. Accordingly, the Bank makes no representation that it (i) is the most recent version of this document, (ii) is fully accurate and/or complete, or (iii) includes a full descrip-tion of appropriate action taken by responsible parties in response to infor-mation about environmental or social issues, if any, raised therein.

Requests for additional (including, in some cases, more current) environmen-tal or supplemental environmental Assessment/Reports regarding this project may be made using EXIM Bank’s online “Environmental and Social Project Information and Concerns” form at http://exim.gov/envsoc.

This page appended to digital file by EXIM Bank.

DUBA INTEGRATED SOLAR COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT Environmental and Social Impact Assessment 09/11/2014

Project number: 37446130 Dated: 09/11/2014 2 | 278 Revised:

Quality Management

Issue/revision Issue 1 Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 3

Remarks Draft Draft - Revision 1 Draft - Revision 2 Draft - Revision 3

Date 15/06/2014 21/07/2014 19/10/2014 09/11/2014

Prepared by Project Team Project Team Project Team Project Team

Signature

Checked by Simon Pickup Simon Pickup Edward Crowley Edward Crowley

Signature

Authorised by Simon Pickup Simon Pickup Edward Crowley Edward Crowley

Signature

Project number 37446130 37446130 37446130 37446130

Report number 002 002 002 002

File reference 140615-37446130-002

140721-37446130-002

141019-37446130-002

141109-37446130-002

3 | 278

DUBA INTEGRATED SOLAR COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT Environmental and Social Impact Assessment

09/11/2014

Client Saudi Electricity Company

Consultant WSP Middle East Ltd P.O. Box 7497 Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 4 350 5000 Fax: +971 4 350 5001 www.wspgroup.com


Table of Contents Executive Summary............................................................................................................... 12

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 19 Background ............................................................................................................... 19 1.1 Overview of the Project.............................................................................................. 20 1.2 Requirement for an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment .......................... 20 1.3 The Environmental and Social Impact Assessment ................................................... 21 1.4 The Project Team ...................................................................................................... 23 1.5

2 Project Location ............................................................................................................ 24 Project Site Location .................................................................................................. 24 2.1 Existing Site Conditions ............................................................................................. 25 2.2 Site Conditions .......................................................................................................... 28 2.3 Surrounding Areas ..................................................................................................... 29 2.4 Key Sensitive Receptors............................................................................................ 29 2.5

3 Project Description ........................................................................................................ 31 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 31 3.1 Project Justification .................................................................................................... 31 3.2 Project Layout ............................................................................................................ 31 3.3 Project Specification Summary .................................................................................. 33 3.4

4 Environmental Legislation and Standards ..................................................................... 41 Regulatory Environmental Framework in KSA ........................................................... 41 4.1 Environmental Impact Assessment ........................................................................... 45 4.2 Environmental Standards Applicable to the Project ................................................... 47 4.3

5 Impact Assessment Methodology ................................................................................. 58 Methodology for the Assessment of Impacts ............................................................. 58 5.1 Sensitivity (Importance) of Receptors ........................................................................ 58 5.2 Description of Effect................................................................................................... 58 5.3 Significance of Effects ............................................................................................... 59 5.4 Evaluation of Impacts ................................................................................................ 59 5.5 Cumulative Effects ..................................................................................................... 62 5.6

6 Marine Environment ...................................................................................................... 64 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 64 6.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation .......................................................................... 64 6.2 Methodology .............................................................................................................. 66 6.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ..................................................................................... 71 6.4 Assessment of Impacts.............................................................................................. 83 6.5 Mitigation Measures, Residual/Cumulative Effects .................................................... 88 6.6 Summary and Conclusions ........................................................................................ 91 6.7

7 Air Quality ..................................................................................................................... 93 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 93 7.1 Relevant Air Quality Emission Standards .................................................................. 94 7.2 Methodology .............................................................................................................. 97 7.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................... 106 7.4 Sensitive Receptors ................................................................................................. 108 7.5

5 | 278

Assessment of Construction phase Impacts ............................................................ 111 7.6 Assessment of Operational Phase Impacts ............................................................. 113 7.7 Mitigation Measures and Residual Impacts ............................................................. 135 7.8 Summary and Conclusions ...................................................................................... 137 7.9

8 Environmental Noise ................................................................................................... 141 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 141 8.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ........................................................................ 141 8.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................ 145 8.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................... 148 8.4 Assessment of Impacts............................................................................................ 151 8.5 Mitigation Measures, Residual/Cumulative Effects .................................................. 157 8.6 Summary and Conclusions ...................................................................................... 159 8.7

9 Soil, Groundwater and Contamination ........................................................................ 161 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 161 9.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ........................................................................ 161 9.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................ 162 9.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................... 163 9.4 Sensitive Receptors ................................................................................................. 165 9.5 Assessment of Construction and Operational Impacts ............................................ 165 9.6 Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects ........................................... 167 9.7 Summary & Conclusions ......................................................................................... 170 9.8

10 Waste Management .................................................................................................... 174 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 174 10.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ..................................................................... 174 10.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 176 10.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................ 177 10.4 Sensitive Receptors .............................................................................................. 178 10.5 Assessment of Construction and Operational Impacts ......................................... 179 10.6 Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects ........................................ 182 10.7 Summary & Conclusions ...................................................................................... 191 10.8

11 Water Resources and Wastewater.............................................................................. 194 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 194 11.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ..................................................................... 194 11.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 194 11.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................ 195 11.4 Sensitive Receptors .............................................................................................. 197 11.5 Assessment of Construction and Operational Impacts ......................................... 197 11.6 Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects ........................................ 199 11.7

12 Terrestrial Ecology ...................................................................................................... 206 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 206 12.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ..................................................................... 206 12.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 207 12.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................ 207 12.4 Key Sensitive Receptors....................................................................................... 209 12.5 Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects ........................................ 210 12.7


13 Socio Economic .......................................................................................................... 214 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 214 13.1 Relevant Standards and Legislation ..................................................................... 214 13.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 215 13.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................ 216 13.4 Key Sensitive Receptors....................................................................................... 220 13.5 Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects ........................................ 224 13.7 Summary and Conclusions ................................................................................... 228 13.8

14 Cultural, Heritage and Archaeology ............................................................................ 234 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 234 14.1

15 Landscape and Visual ................................................................................................. 235 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 235 15.1 Relevant Standards .............................................................................................. 235 15.2 Methodology ......................................................................................................... 235 15.3 Existing Baseline Conditions ................................................................................ 236 15.4 Assessment of Construction and Operational Phase Impacts .............................. 237 15.5 Summary and Conclusions ................................................................................... 238 15.6

16 Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan ....................................... 240 Purpose of the CEMP ........................................................................................... 240 16.1 ISO 14001 Model .................................................................................................. 241 16.2 CEMP Implementation .......................................................................................... 242 16.3 Environmental Aspects and Mitigation Measures ................................................. 244 16.4 Monitoring Programmes ....................................................................................... 269 16.5

17 Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan ......................................... 271 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 271 17.1 Aims and Objectives ............................................................................................. 271 17.2 Operational Environmental Management System ................................................ 272 17.3 Operational Environmental Management System Components ........................... 272 17.4 Framework Operational Environmental Control Plans .......................................... 279 17.5 Monitoring Programmes ....................................................................................... 286 17.6 Decommissioning Plan ......................................................................................... 288 17.7

7 | 278

Appendices Appendix A – Bibliography Appendix B – Project Layout Drawings Appendix C – Fuel Specifications Appendix D - Wind Roses for Sharm El Sheikh (2009 to 2013) Appendix E – Dispersion Model Input Parameters used in the Assessment Appendix F – Air Quality Monitoring Laboratory Analytical Reports Appendix G – Modelling Results – Stack Height Analysis Appendix H – Modelling Results – Combined Cycle Appendix H – Modelling Results – Simple Cycle Appendix I – Modelling Results – Operation on Back-up Fuel (ASL) Appendix J – Recirculation Study Report


List of Figures Figure 2-1 The location of the Project Site .......................................................................................................26 Figure 3-1: General layout of the Project site (SEC, 2014) ...............................................................................32 Figure 3-2: The project layout plan overlaid onto a satellite image ...................................................................33 Figure 6-1 Location of the marine survey baseline sites ..................................................................................67 Figure 6-2 Screen Shot of the Coral Point Count Software in Operation ..........................................................69 Figure 6-3 Existing bathymetry at the project site ............................................................................................72 Figure 6-4 Typical fringing coral reef zonation pattern (image: public domain) .................................................76 Figure 6-5 Coastal habitat map .......................................................................................................................77 Figure 6-6 Substrate cover at all sites .............................................................................................................80 Figure 6-7 Percentage cover at all sites and at all depths ................................................................................80 Figure 6-8 Percentage substrate cover at each survey site ..............................................................................81 Figure 6-9 Hard coral types as a percentage of total substrate cover at all sites and all depths ........................81 Figure 6-10 Representative image of marine habitats ......................................................................................82 Figure 6-11 Temperature difference at the surface (left) and a longitudinal cross section (right) .......................86 Figure 6-12 Surface temperature contours overlaid onto the marine habitat map .............................................87 Figure 7-1 Modelling Domain ........................................................................................................................104 Figure 7-2 Diffusion Tube Monitoring Locations .............................................................................................107 Figure 7-3 Sensitive Receptor Locations .......................................................................................................109 Figure 7-4 Scenario 1A1 – Option A, Combined Cycle (OP1) – Annual Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) ....116 Figure 7-5 Scenario 1A1 – Option A, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3).....117 Figure 7-6 Scenario 1B1 – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – Annual Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) ....118 Figure 7-7 Scenario 1B1 – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3).....119 Figure 7-8 Scenario 2A1 – Option A, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) ..........122 Figure 7-9 Scenario 2B1 – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) ..........123 Figure 7-10 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)127 Figure 7-11 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) 128 Figure 7-12 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 24-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) .....................................................................................................................................................................129 Figure 7-13 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) .....130 Figure 7-14 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) .....131 Figure 7-15 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 24-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3) ...132 Figure 8-1 Proposed location of Duba combined Cycle Power Plant (6 km north of Almuwaylih – P3)............141 Figure 8-2 Screen shot of the developed CadnaA 3D model .........................................................................146 Figure 8-3 Noise measurement locations ......................................................................................................149 Figure 8-4 Noise measurement location P1 – Future site location – 30 m from road ......................................150 Figure 8-5 Noise measurement location P2 – Fish farm ................................................................................150 Figure 8-6 Noise measurement location P3 (Almuwaylih sports field and mosque) ........................................150 Figure 8-7 Potential noise sensitive areas .....................................................................................................152 Figure 8-8 Operational Noise –Combined Cycle Noise Map ..........................................................................156 Figure 9-1 Plate Tectonics of Saudi Arabia....................................................................................................164 Figure 11-1 Site context map including wadi locations ...................................................................................196 Figure 12-1 Examples of terrestrial ecological features on the site .................................................................208 Figure 13-1 Al Muwaylih Village ....................................................................................................................220 Figure 13-2 Al Muwaylih Village ....................................................................................................................220 Figure 13-3 Tabuk Fisheries Company fish farm ...........................................................................................220 Figure 13-4 Decommissioned industrial facility ..............................................................................................220 Figure 15-1 Representative image of key site features ..................................................................................236

9 | 278

List of Tables Table 1-1 The Project Team............................................................................................................................23 Table 2-1 Key site features .............................................................................................................................27 Table 2-2 Site reference conditions .................................................................................................................28 Table 2-3 Key Sensitive Receptors .................................................................................................................29 Table 4-1 Relevant Content of the General Environmental Regulations ...........................................................43 Table 4-2 PME and IFC Ambient Air Quality Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10 ...............................................48 Table 4-3 PME/IFC Emission Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10 .....................................................................49 Table 4-4 PME & IFC EHS Noise Guidelines Limit Values ...............................................................................50 Table 4-5 PME General Construction – Maximum Permissible Façade Noise Limits ........................................50 Table 4-6 Examples of relevant ambient water quality and discharge limits from PME 2012 ............................52 Table 4-7 Wastewater re-use standards (MAW, 1989) ....................................................................................53 Table 4-8 Guidelines for Urban Water Reuse (US EPA Guidelines) .................................................................54 Table 5-1 Definition of Impact Type .................................................................................................................60 Table 5-2 Impact Assessment Terminology .....................................................................................................60 Table 5-3 Impact Severity Criteria ...................................................................................................................61 Table 5-4 Likelihood Categories ......................................................................................................................61 Table 5-5 Determining the Significance of Impacts ..........................................................................................62 Table 5-6 Definition of Impacts ........................................................................................................................62 Table 6-1 Examples of relevant ambient water quality and discharge limits from PME 2012 ............................65 Table 6-2 The survey scope at each of the marine survey baseline sites .........................................................68 Table 6-3 Water quality analysis results ..........................................................................................................74 Table 6-4 Percentage substrate cover .............................................................................................................79 Table 6-5 Hard coral types as a percentage of total substrate cover ................................................................79 Table 6-6 Marine ecological receptor criteria ...................................................................................................83 Table 6-7 Approximate surface area (in m2) of affected habitats ......................................................................87 Table 8-17 Impact and mitigation summary table for Marine Environment .......................................................92 Table 7-1 Air Quality Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10 ..................................................................................94 Table 7-2 Emission Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10 ....................................................................................95 Table 7-3 SO2, NOx and PM10 Emissions Concentrations for the Proposed Turbine at DCCPP ........................95 Table 7-4 Description of Operational Scenarios .............................................................................................100 Table 7-5 Criteria for Determination of Significance .......................................................................................105 Table 7-6 Diffusion Tube Monitoring Results .................................................................................................107 Table 7-7 Sensitive Receptors ......................................................................................................................110 Table 7-8 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Combined Cycle (Natural Gas) ......................115 Table 7-9 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Simple Cycle (Natural Gas) ............................121 Table 7-10 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Arabian Super Light (ASL) Fuel....................125 Table 7-11 Calculation of annual carbon dioxide emissions for the Additional Turbines .................................134 Table 7-12: Impact and mitigation summary table for Air Quality....................................................................140 Table 8-1 General Construction maximum permissible facade noise levels ...................................................142 Table 8-2 Permitted free-field external noise limits for community noise, measured at any noise sensitive property within the appropriate area designation ...........................................................................................143 Table 8-3 Maximum permissible free-field noise levels ..................................................................................143 Table 8-4 Noise level guidelines....................................................................................................................144 Table 8-5 SEC Noise Requirements ..............................................................................................................144 Table 8-6 Construction Noise Emission Data ................................................................................................145 Table 8-7 Sound Power Levels of the Gas Turbine Generator .......................................................................147 Table 8-8 Sound Power Levels for the Steam Turbine package .....................................................................147 Table 8-9 Sound Power Levels for the HRSG................................................................................................147 Table 8-10 Description of noise measurement locations ................................................................................149 Table 8-11 Measured baseline noise data .....................................................................................................151 Table 8-12 Noise Sensitive Receptor Locations ............................................................................................151 Table 8-13 Noise impact for construction phases ..........................................................................................152 Table 8-14 Construction Noise –Site preparation noise map..........................................................................153 Table 8-15 Construction Noise –Civil works noise map .................................................................................154 Table 8-16 Noise impact for operational phases ............................................................................................155 Table 8-17 Impact and mitigation summary table for Environmental Noise.....................................................160


Table 9-1 Contamination Risk Assessment ...................................................................................................163 Table 9-2 Impact and mitigation summary table for soil, groundwater and contamination ...............................172 Table 10-1 Typical Construction Phase Waste Origins ..................................................................................179 Table 10-2 Waste Hierarchy..........................................................................................................................183 Table 10-3 Measures to Reduce the Waste of on-site Materials ....................................................................184 Table 0-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for waste management ........................................................192 Table 0-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for water resources and wastewater ....................................204 Table 12-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for terrestrial ecology .........................................................212 Table 13-1 Key Sensitive Receptors .............................................................................................................221 Table 13-2 Impact and mitigation summary table for socio-economic ............................................................230 Table 15-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for landscape and visual ....................................................239 Table 16-1 ISO 14001 Structure....................................................................................................................241

11 | 278

Acronyms

Abbreviation Title/ Full Description

ASL - Arabian Super Light

BOP - Balance of Plant

CEMP - Construction Environmental Management Plan

dBA - A weighted Decibel

EIA - Environment Impact Assessment

GT - Gas Turbine

GTG - Gas Turbine Generator

HRSG - Heat Recover Steam Generator

ISCC - Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project

KSA - Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

LAeq - Equivalent Continuous A-Weighted Sound Level

NOx - Nitrogen Oxide and Nitrogen dioxide

OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer

OEMP - Operational Environmental Management Plan

PM - Particulate Matter

RO - Reverse Osmosis

RSC - Reference Site Conditions

SEC - Saudi Electricity company

STG - Steam Turbine Generator

SOx - Sulphur Oxides


Executive Summary

Background

WSP Middle East (WSP) has been commissioned by the Saudi Electricity Company (SEC, the project

proponent) to complete an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) for the proposed Duba

Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project (ISCC) located approximately 55km north of Duba on the Red Sea

coast of Saudi Arabia.

The Duba Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project will be located in the Tabuk Region, approximately 55km

north of Duba.

The scope of the project includes:

Construction and operation of the ISCC; and

Construction and operation of a 380 kV Substation and 380 kV high voltage cables between the substation

and the turbines.

This will be the first Integrated Solar Combined Cycle project that SEC have implemented. This is the

organisation’s first step to cutting down carbon emission, increasing fuel efficiency and initiating the solar

industry in Saudi Arabia.

Project and Project Site Overview

The Project will have a net output of 485- 550 MWe with natural gas & condensate as the main operating fuel

and Arabian Super Light (ASL) fuel oil as back up fuel. 50 MWe of steam generation will be from solar energy

concentrators and its associated equipment as Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Plant.

The Project site is located on an area of approximately 160 hectares of open coastal land. The site is bordered

on the east by a main highway, from Duba to the south to the Jordanian border area to the north, and to the

west by the Red Sea coast.

The terrestrial portion of the site is undeveloped and comprises of raised areas intersected by wadi channels.

The raised areas are barren and largely devoid of vegetation with a ground surface of sandy gravel and small

dark rocks. The wadi channels have more vegetation comprised of Acacia spp. and scattered vegetation

dominated by Zygopyllum sp. growing within sandy substrate. Given the presence of vegetation and

stormwater protection infrastructure on the highway, it is likely that these wadis flood during storm events.

The majority of the coastal portion of the site is comprised of a wide sandy beach transitioning to reef flat in the

subtidal area. The reef flat, which is a shallow area less than 1 metres depth, extends between 100 and 250

metres offshore prior to the reef edge.

Approximately 0.5km north of the site there is a disused industrial facility. Approximately 1.5km north of the site

there is a coastal fish farm facility. This includes the onshore component as well as two large areas of cages

13 | 278

some 0.5km offshore. A warehouse facility associated with the fish farm is located approximately 3km north of

the site.

The nearest residential communities are Sharmaa, located 32km north east; Al Sourah, located 15km to the

north west; and AlMuwaylih, located 8km to the south west. There are no permanent residential areas on the

site or in the immediate surrounding area.

Objectives of the Report

The overarching purpose of the ESIA is to provide sufficient information to assist the PME, as the national

environmental regulator, and any parties providing financing support, in the decision making process and to

ensure compliance with all relevant regulations, standards, policies and guidance through a comprehensive

description of the following:

The existing environmental baseline;

The likely environmental impacts and significance of such impacts;

Assessment of compliance with national and international standards and guidelines;

The requirement for mitigation and compensation measures; and

The requirements for subsequent environmental management and monitoring to be implemented.

Air Quality

The impact of the Project on local air quality has been assessed for both the construction and operational

phases. For the construction phase, a qualitative assessment was undertaken based on the likely construction

activities, location of sensitive receptors and local meteorological data to assess the potential air quality im-

pacts.

For the operation phase, a complex dispersion model (Breeze Aermod) was used to predict ground level con-

centrations of NO2, SO2 and PM10 at various receptor locations, including residential locations, in the local area

and surrounding region. Operating conditions representing the plant operating during both typical and worse

case ambient conditions were modelled for the assessment. Concentrations were predicted for the plant oper-

ating on both natural gas and ASL (the latter during emergency operation resulting from gas supply interrup-

tion), as well as in Simple Cycle mode.

GHG emissions from the proposed power plant have been estimated using emission factors for CO2 and me-

thane published by the IPCC for GHG emissions

The impact of dust and fine particle emissions from construction activities and emissions associated with con-

struction plant and traffic is likely to be of negligible due to the distances to off-site locations, absence of sensi-

tive receptors nearby in the surrounding area and the likely low level of traffic associated with construction

phase.


Operational Process Contribution

The results of the dispersion modelling show that under both representative and worse-case operating condi-

tions no exceedences of the PME AQSs for the pollutants considered in the assessment were predicted to oc-

cur as a result of emissions from the proposed power plant. This is the case at both the point of maximum im-

pact and at sensitive receptors considered in the assessment and for all relevant averaging periods, under both

operational modes (combined and simple cycle).

In addition to compliance with the PME AQSs for all scenarios considered, the contribution of emissions from

the power plant (for both plant configuration options) during gas-fired operation would not contribute more than

25% to the attainment of the relevant PME AQS, which is in compliance with the relevant criteria in the IFC

EHS Guidelines for ensuring a project allows for additional, future sustainable development in the same air

shed.

GHG Emissions

The operation the turbines at DCCPP would generate GHG emissions of approximately 1,579,150 tCO2 equiva-

lents per year, based on the emission data used and assuming continuous operation of the GTs at the plant at

maximum load (8322 hours per year per GT).

Marine Environment

Six transects were surveyed including 2 control sites and 4 impact zone sites. The survey was designed in

order to document the “baseline” condition of the marine habitat present and to provide a benchmark against

which future monitoring studies can be compared.

The results of the water quality testing indicate that the water quality at the site is of a high quality with no

indicators of industrial or municipal pollution present.

At all the survey sites a high percentage of live hard coral cover (average of 40%) was present in the reef

margin and the upper outer reef slope. Seagrass was also present along two of the transects. The presence of

fish, invertebrates and other marine life was also documented during the marine baseline survey.

The coastal area north of Duba to the Gulf of Aqaba, referred to as the Tiran Area, is recognized as being an

area of special conservation importance for the wide variety of different biotopes and reef types, forming unique

reef complexes with high zoogeographic significance .

The construction phase will directly impact upon 65,000 m2 of fringing reef habitat. Secondary effects

associated with water quality impacts (suspended sediments) are also expected on the surrounding reef.

The main operational impact identified is associated with the discharge of heated cooling water from the facility

during normal plant operation. The marine modelling results have been used to determine the extent of the

area of reef likely to be affected. Taking a conservative approach we have identified the 1-2°C contour as the

area within which the coral reefs will be adversely affected and the >2°C contour where mortality will occur.

15 | 278

The 1-2°C contour affects an area of approximately 100,000 m2. Within this area we can expect to see the

corals displaying signs of physical stress, such as reduced growth rates and fecundity as a result of the

increased temperature and process chemicals. The >2°C contour impinges upon approximately 24,000 m2 of

marine habitat. Within this area coral mortality will be likely to occur.

Various mitigation and management measures have been recommended. However, the construction and

operation of a power plant in this location will inevitably have impacts upon the adjacent sensitive coral reef

habitat. It is recommended that a detailed study is undertaken to fully quantify the ecological and biodiversity

impacts of the project when suitable design information is available and identify a practical compensation

strategy for habitat losses.

Noise and Vibration

This document studies some of the potential environmental impacts of a combined Cycle Power plant 50 km

north of Duba in Saudi Arabia.

In order to fully quantify the existing baseline noise levels, measurements were under-taken at three

measurement locations around the proposed location of the Duba Power Plant site.

The potential noise and vibration impacts associated with the construction and operation of the Duba combined

Cycle Power Plant are identified using baseline measurements.

The construction phase noise impacts have been predicted based upon noise data contained in BS5228. The

results of the assessment are within the recommended limits and recommendations for the on-going monitoring

of the noise levels associated with construction activity have been made.

The operational phase noise impacts have been predicted in accordance with ISO 9613-2 based upon

historical noise data for the intended equipment. The results of the assessment are within the recommended

limits for most sensitive areas; however, they exceed the night time criteria for the company housing

compound. Therefore it was recommended that n case construction activities are scheduled to be in the night

period and if Company housing is constructed and occupied then proper mitigation measures to be taken.

Given that the nearest town is 6 km to the south of the site (Almuwaylih), it is expected that the overall residual

operation noise will have a negligible significance.

Soil and Groundwater

It is recommended that an investigation of existing contamination associated with the existing decommissioned

industrial facility is undertaken prior to any major excavation works take place on site.

It is a requirement that any existing contaminated materials on site identified during site preparation works,

including soils, are considered as hazardous waste and disposed of in a licensed landfill site prior to site

preparation works by an appropriately licensed contractor. Notwithstanding the above, intrusive investigations

will need to be enacted if additional significant pollutant sources or contaminations are identified prior to or

during the site preparation works.


In addition, during the construction and operational phases of the project, there is a potential for workers and

visitors to come into contact with contaminated land and hazardous or semi-hazardous wastes, as well as the

potential for leaks and spills to adversely affect the wider environment. The CEMP and OEMP must be

implemented to manage these risks and to reduce the likelihood of any future negative environmental and

social impacts.

It is of utmost importance that the contractor undertakes a detailed investigation of the underlying aquifer prior

to establishing deep wells. This assessment should consider all current and future abstractions.

Waste Management

Overall, with the implementation of good environmental practices through the contractor EHS policies and

guidance, together with the development of a CEMP and OEMP, the Project should be able to limit pressures

on the existing waste management facilities in the surrounding region and reduce the potential for any localised

contamination to occur.

However, it is anticipated that the quantities of hazardous and non-hazardous waste streams generated by the

Project may be substantial and therefore it is essential that the approach to waste management at the site as

highlighted above is rigidly adopted.

Water Resources and Wastewater

The construction impacts that have been identified are those that, with good on-site and off-site environmental

management practices, can be relatively easily avoided or mitigated. The key issue relates to the appropriate

management of storm water during both construction and operation. Following their implementation the residual

impacts are considered to be of negligible negative significance and therefore are considered acceptable.

Finally, and as determined within this section, a comprehensive construction environmental management plan

(CEMP) and operational environmental management plan (OEMP) are required for the facility.

Terrestrial Ecology

This chapter assesses the status of the existing terrestrial ecology on the proposed site and presents the

applicable approaches to mitigate or minimise any potential negative impacts of this development.

The site has been categorized as being of moderate ecological value and sensitivity due to the presence of

wadi and sandy beach areas which provide habitat for reptiles, rodent and bird species.

The overall construction impacts on the terrestrial ecology are considered to be of medium adverse significance

while the operational impacts (e.g. landscaping) will be of minor positive, significance.

Socio-Economics

It is generally thought that the development of the Project will have a positive impact on the local economy,

particularly in terms of local job creation, and if the mitigation measures detailed above, and within the

framework OEMP delivered as part of this ESIA are followed. In addition, it will be the responsibility of the EPC

contractor to develop a Comprehensive CEMP and SEC-Operation & Maintenance to develop an OEMP.

17 | 278

Due to the provision of additional employment opportunities during both construction and operation, the

proposed facility is expected to represent a positive employment option which may draw prospective residents

back to the region.

Key economic benefits that are thought likely to be derived from the proposed facility include:

The creation of temporary and permanent jobs during the construction and operational phases of the pro-

posed development;

The potential for labour and procurement contracts to be let locally during the construction phase and the

capital cost of the redevelopment; and

The potential for indirect increased local spending from the incoming workforce.

The potential for adverse impacts upon the existing fish farming operations associated with marine discharges

during the operational phase of the project has been noted. The detailed design of the Project should consider

means to ensure adverse effects on the fish farm are minimised.

Landscape and Visual

The proposed project site is located in a remote and undisturbed coastal landscape with limited sensitive

receptors (view points). However, the presence of a power plant in this area will have an impact upon the

visual character of the landscape. There are limited opportunities for mitigating the permanent impact of this

kind of facility. However, it recommended planting a vegetated buffer along the inland side of the power plant to

improve the aesthetic appearance.

Framework Environmental Management Plans

Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan

A framework has been provided detailing the requirements for environmental management measures which will

be implemented by the EPC Contractor prior to commencement of construction. The framework identifies

pollution control and best practice measures that should be adopted within a Project specific EHS Plan during

the construction phase of the Project in order to avoid, minimise, or offset likely impacts in the areas on and

surrounding the Site that are attributable to the Project.

Framework Operation Environmental Management Plan

A framework has been provided detailing the requirements for an OEMP which will be developed by SEC-

Operation & Maintenance prior to operation. The OEMP is a management tool used to ensure that undue or

reasonably avoidable adverse risks of the operation of a project are prevented and that any positive effects are

enhanced. The primary aim of the OEMP is to provide clear direction on the requirements of the operational

management team in the conduct of the activities, where every requirement is measurable and enforceable,

whilst any deviation can be identified and addressed swiftly.


Further Study

Detailed design information was not available at the time of the preparation of this ESIA and therefore

reasonable assumptions have been made with respect to the type of equipment to be installed based upon the

RFP issued by SEC. It is important however that the following is undertaken in detail by the EPC Contractor as

part of their detailed design to confirm adherence to national and international standards where applicable:

Dispersion modelling to confirm that ambient air quality standards are met with the actual equipment

proposed;

Investigations to understand the existence of any contamination associate with the adjacent

decommissioned industrial facility;

Detailed studies to ensure the appropriate management of storm water during both construction and

operation given that existing wadis will be heavily impacted; and

Quantification of the affected marine habitat based on the final design of the marine structures and final

marine modelling results and development of an appropriate Habitat Loss Compensation Strategy

19 | 278

1 Introduction

Background 1.1

WSP Middle East (WSP) has been commissioned by the Saudi Electricity Company (SEC), the project

proponent, to complete an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) for the proposed Duba

Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project located approximately 55km north of Duba on the Red Sea coast of

Saudi Arabia.

The Duba Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project (henceforth referred to as the Project or ISCC) will be

located in the Tabuk Region, approximately 55km north of Duba.

The scope of the project includes:

Construction and operation of the ISCC; and

Construction and operation of a 380 kV Substation and 380 kV high voltage cables between the substation

and the turbines.

This ESIA has been prepared for the Project as part of the Presidency for Meteorology (PME) approval

process. As the first step in this process, a Preliminary Environmental Assessment (PEA) has been prepared

for issue to the PME. This document sets out a clear terms of reference (ToR) for the subsequent ESIA. At this

stage a response has not yet been received from PME. However, any comments they do provide on the PEA

will be integrated into this EIA prior to submission to the PME.

At this stage an Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contractor has not yet been appointed by

SEC. This ESIA has therefore been developed on the basis of the Request for Proposal developed by SEC.

This identifies the key characteristics of the power plant, which has been used as the basis for the assessment.

The EIA has also therefore been designed to provide information to SEC on any requirements for changes in

design to mitigate potentially significant environmental impacts and to determine the environmental

management requirements during the construction and operational phases of the project. In this regard the

ESIA has assessed compliance with the following:

The Presidency of Meteorology and the Environment’s ‘General Environmental Regulations’ (GER

2001/2006), the principal environmental legislation in Saudi Arabia, including any pertinent revised

standards released by the PME in 2012;

The Equator Principles;

The International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards (2012), General EHS Guidelines and

Sector Specific EHS Guidelines; and

The requirements of any relevant Export Credit Agencies, as set out within the OECD Common

Approaches (2012), should the project require international funding.


Therefore, this assessment and all associated modelling studies and subsequent impacts assigned should be

considered as indicative only to the expected level of impacts likely to be generated by the Project.

Whilst this ESIA provides a good indication of potential impacts, further detailed studies to include bespoke

modelling studies utilising project information relating to turbine specifications and air and noise emissions

should be undertaken once the EPC Contractor has been appointed and project technical specifications are

confirmed.

Overview of the Project 1.2

The Project will be located in the North Eastern region approximately 55 km north of Duba on the Red Sea

coast. The Project site is approximately 160 hectares.

The Project will have a net output of 485- 550 MWe with natural gas & condensate as the main operating fuel

and Arabian Super Light (ASL) fuel oil as back up fuel. 50 MWe of steam generation will be from solar energy

concentrators and its associated equipment as Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Plant.

This will be the first Integrated Solar Combined Cycle project that SEC have implemented. This is the

organisation’s first step to cutting down carbon emission, increasing fuel efficiency and initiating the solar

industry in Saudi Arabia.

Requirement for an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment 1.3

The Project is considered to be a major project with the potential for significant environmental impacts to occur

as a result of both construction and operation.

Therefore it is anticipated that PME will confirm that an EIA is required for the Project. As a result a Preliminary

Environmental Assessment and Terms of Reference (PEA and ToR) was completed by WSP in March 2014

(WSP, 2014), which has been submitted to PME for their approval.

It is also possible that the Project will attract international financial support. Therefore, the approach adopted for

compiling the scope of works for the ESIA has been designed to demonstrate if both KSA regulations and

standards and International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards and Environmental Health and

Safety Guidelines, in line with international best practice, are met.

21 | 278

The Environmental and Social Impact Assessment 1.4

Overview 1.4.1

Although this ESIA is referred to as such throughout, the contents, structure and level of assessment are also

consistent with the PME requirements for an EIA and is therefore be considered to be compliant with both

national and international requirements.

The ESIA is has been comprehensively developed to ensure compliance with the following:

Basis Law of 1992, commonly referred to as the ‘Constitution’ of Saudi Arabia;

The General Environmental Regulations, 2001;

The KSA Environmental Protection Standards, 2012;

The requirements of parties providing financing support including:

Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) Common Approaches;

International Finance Corporation Performance Standards, General Environmental Health and Safety

Guidelines and Sector Specific Guidelines (Thermal Power, 2008); and

The Equator Principles.

Purpose of the Environmental and Social Impact Assessment 1.4.2

The overarching purpose of the ESIA is to provide sufficient information to assist the PME, as the national

environmental regulator, and any parties providing financing support, in the decision making process and to

ensure compliance with all relevant regulations, standards, policies and guidance through a comprehensive

description of the following:

The existing environmental baseline;

The likely environmental impacts and significance of such impacts;

Assessment of compliance with national and international standards and guidelines;

The requirement for mitigation and compensation measures; and

The requirements for subsequent environmental management and monitoring to be implemented.

Report Structure 1.4.3

This section provides a summary of the contents of this ESIA document, on the basis of recommendations and

requirements of both national and international requirements, and also in line with the scope of works set out

within the PEA and ToR (WSP, 2014).


As noted above, the ESIA report has been prepared in accordance with the specific requirements of PME, and

also references IFC Performance Standards and other international best practice where appropriate. The ESIA

specifically addresses the issues determined within the PEA and ToR (WSP, 2014).

Full details of the scope of works undertaken for each technical assessment are provided within the relevant

technical chapters later in this document.

The ESIA Report is structured as follows:

Chapter 1 – Introduction

Chapter 2 – Project Location

Chapter 3 – Project Description

Chapter 4 – Environmental Legislation and Standards

Chapter 5 – Impact Assessment Methodology

Chapter 6 – Marine Environment

Chapter 7 – Air Quality

Chapter 8 – Environmental Noise

Chapter 9 – Soils, Groundwater and Contamination

Chapter 10 – Waste Management

Chapter 11 – Water Resources and Wastewater

Chapter 12 – Terrestrial Ecology

Chapter 13 – Socio-Economic

Chapter 14 – Cultural Heritage and Archaeology

Chapter 15 – Landscape and Visual

Chapter 16 – Framework Construction Environnemental Management Plan

Chapter 17 – Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan

Chapter 2 – Project Locality provide a description of Project site, details of the legislative and policy framework

and provide a detailed description of the Project, which has formed the basis for the assessment of

environmental impacts.

Chapter 3 provides the methodology for the assessment of impacts which has been undertaken in the following

technical chapters.

Chapter 6 - 15 then present the results of the impact assessment for each of the technical areas considered.

23 | 278

Chapter 16 provides a framework for the development of a Construction Environmental Management Plan

(CEMP) through the provision of appropriate environmental controls to be implemented during the construction

phase of the Project. Chapter 17 provides a framework for the development of an Environmental Management

System (EMS) once the Project becomes operational.

The Project Team 1.5

The Project team comprised the following key managers, environmental and social science experts from WSP

together with specialist sub-consultants. The key Project team members are shown in Table 1-1 below.

Table 1-1 The Project Team

Name Responsibility Company Area of Expertise

Adel Mosaad Mohamed Local EIA Manager Environmental Horizons

Company EIA Management and Regulatory

Coordination

Simon Pickup Project Director WSP Middle East EIA/ ESIA/CEMP/Terrestrial Ecology

Edward Crowley Project Manager WSP Middle East EIA

Nefertari Egara EIA Support WSP Middle East EIA

Apolline Boudier EIA Support WSP Middle East EIA

Mark Scaife Noise and Vibration WSP Middle East Acoustics, Vibration & Noise

Hassan Ktaech Waste WSP Middle East Waste Management

Paul Day Air Modelling PJD Consultants Air emissions and dispersion modelling


2 Project Location

Project Site Location 2.1

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 2.1.1

With a total land area of 2,149,690 km2, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) occupies about three-quarters of

the Arabian Peninsula. Seven countries border KSA; Jordan and Iraq to the north, Kuwait to the northeast,

Qatar, Bahrain and United Arab Emirates to the east, Oman to the southeast and Yemen to the south. The KSA

coastlines (Red Sea to the west and Arabian Gulf to the east) extend over 2,640 km.

The Peninsula is a tilted plateau that slopes from the south-west towards the Arabian Gulf (Vincent, P, 2008).

However, the country has a varied geography ranging from the south-western Asir region, which includes

mountains as high as 3,000 metres and is known for having the most moderate climate in the country, to the

harsh environment of the 647,500 km2 Rub Al-Khali or “Empty Quarter”; the world’s largest contiguous sand

desert. Much of the country’s land mass consists of deserts and semi-deserts which are largely uninhabited.

With the exception of the capital city Riyadh, population centres are predominantly on the eastern (e.g.

Dammam) and western coasts (e.g. Jeddah) and at densely populated interior oases. The country supported a

population of just under 27 million in 2012 and the majority of the people live in the capital city Riyadh, which

has an estimated population of 4.7 million (CIA, 2013).

KSA is an extremely hot and arid country with summer temperatures frequently exceeding 50°C. The average

winter temperatures range from 8°C to 20°C but can drop to as low as 2°C on the high interior plateau. The

climate of the region is dry with large seasonal and daily variations in temperature; rainfall is irregular with large

variations between years. The country has limited freshwater resources and frequent sand and dust storms

occur throughout the year.

Administratively Saudi Arabia is divided into 13 provinces, which are further divided into 118 governorates.

below illustrates Project site in the context of KSA.

The Project Site Context and Features 2.1.2

The Project will be located in North Western Region, The area allocated for the Project is located in the

Tabouk Province about 55 km to the north of the City Duba, on the shore of the Red Sea in Kingdom of Saudi

Arabia. The Project has nearest access to a domestic airport within the road distance of about 140 Km to

Tabouk and within the road distance of about 195 Km to Al Wadjh airport. Railway access to Power Plant site

is not available at or near the site. The nearest sea port is in Yanbu.

25 | 278

Existing Site Conditions 2.2

The Project site is located on an area of approximately 160 hectares of open coastal land. The site is bordered

on the east by a main highway, from Duba to the south to the Jordanian border area to the north, and to the

west by the Red Sea coast.

The terrestrial portion of the site is undeveloped and comprises of raised areas intersected by wadi channels.

The raised areas are barren and largely devoid of vegetation with a ground surface of sandy gravel and small

dark rocks. The wadi channels have more vegetation comprised of Acacia spp. and scattered vegetation

dominated by Zygopyllum sp. growing within sandy substrate. Given the presence of vegetation and

stormwater protection infrastructure on the highway, it is likely that these wadis flood during storm events.

The majority of the coastal portion of the site is comprised of a wide sandy beach transitioning to reef flat in the

subtidal area. The reef flat, which is a shallow area less than 1 metres depth, extends between 100 and 250

metres offshore prior to the reef edge.

Approximately 0.5km north of the site there is a decommissioned industrial facility. Approximately 1.5km north

of the site there is a coastal fish farm facility. This includes the onshore component as well as two large areas

of cages some 0.5km offshore. A warehouse facility associated with the fish farm is located approximately 3km

north of the site.


Figure 2-1 The location of the Project Site

27 | 278

Table 2-1 Key site features


Site Conditions 2.3

The site reference conditions have been defined by the scope of works document (SEC, 2014) as follows. Table 2-2 Site reference conditions

Description Unit Particulars

SITE AMBIENT DATA

Site elevation (above sea level) m 19 m

Design ambient conditions:

Design ambient pressure mbar 1020

Design ambient temperature °C 50

Design relative humidity % 90 (at maximum dry bulb temp)

Ambient temperature:

Highest maximum (recorded) °C 46

Maximum Hourly Temperature °C 46

Design maximum temperature °C 50

Annual Mean Temperature °C 35

Lowest minimum (recorded) very rare °C 9

Design minimum temperature °C 21

Relative humidity:

Maximum % 95

Minimum Average

% %

21 50

Precipitation: Mean annual rainfall Maximum recorded rainfall in one day

mm mm

60

250

Wind speed: Max recorded wind speed

m/s

150

Air quality: Air pollution

The region of installation is subject to sand and dust storms. Usual dust in air concentration may be as high as 1 mg/m3. During sandstorms concentrations of 100 – 500 times higher may be encountered. Sand typically consists of calcium, silicon, manganese, aluminium and sodium compounds and in the presence of high humidity it can conduct electricity and corrode metal. All enclosures shall be designed and adequately pro-tected to prevent ingress of dust.

29 | 278

Description Unit Particulars

Water Supply Data: Raw water source Maximum seawater temperature Minimum sea water temperature

°C

°C

Sea water

35 19

Surrounding Areas 2.4

The nearest residential communities are Sharmaa, located 32km north east; Al Sourah, located 15km to the

north west; and Al Muwaylih, located 8km to the south west. There are no permanent residential areas on the

site or in the immediate surrounding area.

Key Sensitive Receptors 2.5

As described above the Project site is currently undeveloped and there is very limited development within the

surrounding area. The closest existing human receptors would be staff of the fish farm facility located

approximately 1.5km north of the site. Al Muwaylih is a small residential community located approximately 8km

south west of the site.

Table 2-3 Key Sensitive Receptors

Receptor Potential Construction Impacts Potential Operational Impacts

Fish farm employees and

fish farm Dust and noise impacts

Water quality impacts from marine

construction activities

Exposure to air emissions from The

Project

Water quality effects from the

marine outfalls

Marine environment

(including fringing reef

environment)

Direct impacts associated with

construction of marine components

Indirect impacts associated with

impacts upon water quality

Effects associated with the intake

and discharge of cooling water

Effects associated with the

discharge of other treated

wastewaters from the plant

Al Muwaylih Town Disturbance from construction traffic

and staff

Increased revenue for local

businesses due to presence of

construction staff

Increased demand for local services

Exposure to air emissions from the

Project

Social effects associated with the

presence of SEC labour force

Construction workers Health and safety

Working conditions and welfare N/A



Operational staff N/A Health and safety

Working conditions

Exposure to air and noise emissions

from The Project

Terrestrial ecology Loss of native habitats

Loss of native species N/A

Soil & groundwater Potential for existing contamination

associated with decommissioned

industrial facility

Contamination events associated with

construction works

Contamination events associated

with operations

Socio-Economic Positive socio-economic impacts

through employment opportunities for

Saudi nationals and skills transfer

Positive socio-economic impacts

through employment opportunities

for Saudi nationals, skills transfer

and the supply of power

Waste management facilities Potentially significant waste arisings Potentially significant waste arisings

31 | 278

3 Project Description

Introduction 3.1All the Project design information presented below has been sourced from Construction of Duba Integrated

Solar Combined Cycle Project Project Schedule “B” Attachment III, Detailed Scope of Work (SEC, 2014). Only

the most pertinent elements of the plant are described.

Project Justification 3.2The demand for electricity in Saudi Arabia has increased dramatically over the past decade. Power

consumption is set to continue to increase with SEC forecasts indicating that power usage will increase to

75,155 MW by 2020. The power industry is a strategic industry in Saudi Arabia and has ensured the continued

economic development and industrial diversification in the Kingdom.

The total Project net output will be of 485- 550 MWe at reference site conditions (RSC). Therefore, the Duba

Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project is a project of national importance in terms of its contribution to the

continued economic development of the Kingdom. This is also the first Integrated Solar Combined Cycle project

that will be implemented by SEC representing a positive step towards sustainability.

Project Layout 3.3

The scope of the Project includes the main components identified in the drawing as the Power Plant and all

associated facilities, the SEC housing compound, and the access road. The other main component will be the

construction of the 380 kV substation which is shown on the drawing to the north west of the plant.

Figure 3-1 below shows the general layout of the Project site in relation to the International Highway and Figure

3-2 below shows the Project layout within its surrounding environment.


Figure 3-1: General layout of the Project site (SEC, 2014)

380 kV substation

Company housing compound

Solar Collector Assemblies (SCA)

HRSG and stacks

Steam turbine building

Gas Turbine (GT) building

Intake structures

Outfall structures

33 | 278

Figure 3-2: The project layout plan overlaid onto a satellite image

Project Specification Summary 3.4

Site Preparation Works 3.4.1

In order to inform the suitability of the site for development, the appointed EPC Contractor will undertake all

required site preparation surveys, including topographic surveys and intrusive geotechnical investigations.

Site clearance and site preparation works shall include removal of all obstacles, removal of all vegetation or

unwanted materials and plantation, removal and disposal of soil, rough and final grading, excavation and back

filling with selected structural fill under and around the foundations, floor slabs and other structures.

700m


Power Plant Description 3.4.2

A detailed layout drawing for the power plant showing the location of various components is provided within

Appendix B.

The Project shall be based on commercially proven F-class and E Class gas turbines (GTs) with a total Plant

net output of 485-550 MWe at RSC with specified main operating fuel, natural gas and condensate gas fuel and

Arabia Super Light (ASL) fuel oil as back up fuel and production of equivalent to 50 MWe steam generation

from solar energy concentrators and its associated equipment as Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Plant

(ISCC).

The nominal capacity of the GTs shall be chosen to suit and meet the net power output in MW of each block

and station. The GTs shall operate initially in the simple cycle mode until construction of the combined cycle

portion is completed. The GTs shall retain the ability to operate as simple cycle units in the event there are

disturbances in the combined cycle portion.

The Project shall comprise two power blocks consisting of new, unused F- Class and/or E-Class gas turbine

generators (GTG), heat recover steam generator (HRSG) and steam turbine generator (STG) packages as

procured by the Contractor from the GTG/HRSG/STG original equipment manufacturer (OEM) supplier

including all associated auxiliary and accessory equipment. The Project will also include all associated

auxiliaries as well as Solar system equipment and the necessary Balance of Plant (BOP) equipment.

Plant Design Criteria 3.4.3

The design of the plant shall be in accordance with internationally recognised engineering standards &

practices, to ensure efficient, high reliability, maintainability and availability of the complete plant.

The gas turbine generator units shall have a net output of 485- 550 MWe at RSC. The new combined cycle

plant shall be with two blocks (Block A & Block B). Two options for the plant configuration are being examined

and are presented as follows:

Option 1 – Block A (1+1+1) will include one GTG (#1) unit Class F, one HRSG (#1), and one STG with all

associated auxiliaries and corresponding BOP. Block B (2+2+1) will include the units two GTG units (#2 &

# 3) Class E, two HRSGs (#2 & # 3) and one STG with all associated auxiliaries and corresponding power

plant BOP; and

Option 2 – Block A (2+2+1) will include the units two GTG (#1 & #2) units Class E, two HRSG (#1 & #2)

and one STG with all associated auxiliaries and corresponding BOP. Block B (2+2+1) will include the units

two GTG units (#3 & #4) Class E, two HRSGs (#3 & #4) and one STG with all associated auxiliaries and

corresponding power plant BOP.

The steam turbine generator unit shall be operating within its entire load range on a continuous basis.

35 | 278

Simple Cycle Operation

Each gas turbine unit shall be able to operate as simple cycle as soon as installation and commissioning of

each gas turbine unit has been finalised successfully. Each gas turbine shall be able to operate in the entire

load range from minimum stable load to full load on a continuous basis and under the load change rates with

the specified fuels and ambient conditions as specified.

Combined Cycle Operation

Each block shall be capable of operating in combined cycle mode in the entire load range of the gas turbine

units in all modes (cold/warm/hot) with the specified fuels and ambient conditions as specified. The plant shall

be capable of operating with any number between one and all of HRSG units in the block feeding steam to the

steam turbine. The steam turbine unit shall be capable of operating within its entire load range on a continuous

basis.

The plant shall be designed to allow the GTGs to increase load at their maximum allowable ramp rate in

combined cycle operation and under the load change rates.

The Plant shall be capable of changing from simple cycle operation to combined cycle operation without shut-

down if the purge state of the flue gas path allows. Load reduction of the gas turbines during the change from

simple cycle to combined cycle shall only be permissible as far as required for temperature matching between

gas turbine exhaust and HRSG.

Fuel Specifications 3.4.4

The main fuel for the plant is natural gas and condensate gas fuel and both shall be supplied by pipeline. The

Project scope includes the construction of a fuel gas pipeline and a condensate gas fuel pipeline from the tie-in

point with Saudi Aramco pipeline.

The backup fuel for the plant will be to Arabian Super Light (ASL). Start-up fuel shall be natural gas and

condensate gas fuel. In case of interruption of natural gas supply or condensate gas fuel, automatic switching

to ASL shall be used for start-up. The plant will include facilities for the receiving of ASL fuel unloading station

from tanker truck and storage tanks including fuel oil treatment system for ASL fuel. Facilities will be also

included for the receiving of distillate fuel from unloading station by tanker truck and day tank for Black start /

Emergency diesel generators and diesel fire pumps

Precise fuel specifications for natural gas, ASL and distillate fuel are provided in Appendix C.

Solar Field Island Equipment and Associated Auxiliaries 3.4.5

The solar island system is sized to enable the production of steam for additional 50 MW minimum net power

output at RSC by delivering steam to combined cycle steam system.

The Solar Field Island and associated equipment and auxiliaries will be designed and operated for daily cycling

following the solar irradiation profile from sunrise to sunset at all site conditions. Whereas, the Solar Field Island

shall be operated in accordance to the highest possible load conditions limited by the solar irradiation only.


The Solar Field Island will operate in such a way to minimise start-up, shut-down and change-of-operation-

mode.

The solar steam will be integrated after the combined cycle steam system and be fully dispatchable within the

emission limits at any solar steam delivery flow.

Raw Water Supply 3.4.6

The technical specifications propose that raw water be sourced from the sea water intake auxiliary cooling

water pumps to be constructed as part of the contract scope. The raw water shall be further processed through

reverse osmosis to produce service water, potable water and demineralized water in a demineralized water

treatment plant.

Water and Wastewater Treatment 3.4.7

Reverse Osmosis Plant

The reverse osmosis (RO) plant will be designed to be capable of processing water from sea water. Two RO

trains will be installed with sufficient capacity to provide water to the fire protection system, service water

system, potable water, demineralized water and water & steam cycle, make up water, wash down cycle for fuel

treatment, closed cooling water system, and water requirements for SEC housing compound but not less than

available capacity of 1500 m3/day whichever is greater value.

The RO Plant shall be a two-pass permeate staged membrane process system, based on the level of sea

water quality. The increase in efficiency and the life of the RO membrane elements shall be maximized by the

correct and effective pre-treatment of the sea water feed to the plant.

A minimum of one week of water storage will be produced by the RO plant and will be stored in two equal

capacity tanks.

It is likely that brine from the desalination plant will be mixed with cooling water and discharged to the sea.

Demineralized Water Treatment Plant

This will comprise a demineralized water treatment plant using Continuous Electro-Deionization units (CEDI)

designed for water derived from the RO plant, demineralized water storage tanks, chemical storage tanks and

pumps, chemical neutralization tanks, pipe work, controls and auxiliary components etc.

The demineralization plant capacity shall be designed to supply the requirements of all demineralized water

consumers (such as closed cooling water system, compressed air, fuel oil treatment, laboratory etc.) plus

generating unit makeup water for all HRSGs units.

Potable Water System

The potable water system shall be designed based on the number of operational staff foreseen at the power

plant and for SEC housing. Potable water storage tank will be provided at a capacity of 500 m3 for the power

plant. The system shall comprise of, but not be limited to:

37 | 278

Potable water system feed pumps;

Ultrafiltration with remote pressure drop supervision;

Food grade Sodium Hypochlorite dosing system;

Remineralisation units;

Above ground Steel Potable water tank serving only lavatories, bathrooms, safety showers, wash down

locations etc. Head Tanks for Potable Water System shall also be provided at required location of the

power plant buildings to ensure positive supply of potable water to meet the requirement;

Elevated potable water storage tower tank in the Housing Compound for minimum two days’ requirement,

considering 300 litres per person for 700 peoples plus 10 % margin;

Supply and distribution system;

Interconnection of service water and potable water tank by isolation valve;

Continuous monitoring and analyser with automatic dosing control to be provided in remineralisation plant;

and

The Potable water for personal use shall be run through the facility and branched at convenient locations to

supply facilities such as offices, meal location and site offices, living accommodation and SEC housing

compound.

Make-Up Water System

Storage tanks for the make-up water system will be provided with stair case and all required attachments such

as gauge, level indicator and nozzles, instruments, etc. The system will also comprise:

Demineralised water storage tanks of capacity to satisfy the following criteria:

1,500m3 minimum capacity;

72-hour consumption for natural and condensate gas operation of the power plant;

4 hour consumption for ASL treatment; and

Two complete fills of the steam water cycle.

Demineralised water distribution pumps; and

Demineralised water piping.

Service Water System

The service water tanks will hold a capacity equivalent to the water consumption for 72 hours of average

service water consumption, for a minimum size of 2,000m3. The service water system shall comprise of, but not

be limited to:

Service water pumps;


Supply and distribution system;

Interconnection to potable water tank with isolation valve; and

Supply and utility stations in GTG/STG building, HRSGs and in BOP buildings.

Sanitary Wastewater Treatment Plant

The sanitary waste water from toilets, showers, kitchen etc. shall be collected and treated by a sewage

treatment plant. The hydraulic design basis for this treatment facility shall be for total 700 people (150

employees at power plant, and 550 personnel at housing compound) of capacity i.e. 210 m3/day based on 300

litres per person /day, BOD of 0.08 kg/person/day and TSS of 0.09 kg/person/day. The system shall use gravity

or lift stations as required to collect and forward the sanitary waste water to the sanitary waste water treatment

plant. Each lift station shall be provided with 2 x 100% submersible pumps, pipes, valves and instruments.

The sanitary waste treatment shall be aerobic type. It shall be designed not to allow septic conditions in any

part of the plant during the collection, treatment, and storage of input sanitary waste water or product water or

thickened sludge. The treatment shall be designed to accommodate the non-constant sanitary waste water flow

on hourly, daily or annual basis.

The treated sewage water shall be collected in a separate chamber for serving the plant irrigation.

Rainwater

The final grade level throughout the site shall be selected such that rain water flooding is avoided. A stormwater

drainage system shall be provided with pipes which will drain to manholes and discharge to the storm water

drainage system.

Rainwater that falls in areas with the potential for oily residues, such as the diked area for the fuel oil tanks, will

be collected separately and directed to the oil water separator along with other industrial wastewater from the

plant.

Hazardous Wastewater / Liquid Disposal

Wastewater from gas turbine washing (which will contain detergents and other contaminants) will be stored in

the drain tanks for removal off-site by truck. Various oily wastewaters (from false starts and plant equipment

drains) will also be disposed of off-site by trucks. The disposal of hazardous liquid wastes will be undertaken by

licensed contractors only.

Evaporation Pond

Residual effluents, which cannot be re-used, shall be discharged to sea after treatment or to the evaporation

pond. The pond, which is located on the Project site, will be equipped with a sealing bottom layer and sized to

ensure complete evaporation of the produced effluents during all seasons of the year. Consequently, operation

of the combined cycle plant will not lead to any discharge of effluents to the environment. Nevertheless all

effluents shall be treated by neutralization, oil separation and solids removal before final discharge to the sea or

evaporation pond.

39 | 278

Final discharges and performance of the evaporation pond shall at least meet environmental treatment

standards recognised by industrial plants of similar nature. Dsfd

Waste Management 3.4.8

Waste materials shall be properly disposed as the requirements of local concerned authorities. The contractor

shall be responsible for the sanitation of the waste disposal area including the elimination of rodents and

insects.

Staff 3.4.9

The current stage of the plant shall be designed for an organization of 150 working persons.

SEC Housing Compound 3.4.10

The project scope includes the provision of a housing compound for a minimum of 700 people. The housing

compound will be located in an area approximately 100m north from the power plant site boundary. The

compound will include:

Ten family villa units;

100 family apartments units;

40 bachelor accommodation units;

Healthcare facility;

Mosque;

Shops;

Indoor and outdoor recreational facilities;

Open spaces and playgrounds;

Main entrance gate with gate house and security system;

Security fencing;

Roads; and

Landscaping.

All requirements for electricity, lighting, HVAC, water, sewage, drainage, telephone, internet, firefighting, fire

hydrants, fire hose cabinets, portable fire extinguishers and fire detection systems for each of the villas,

apartments, recreational and other facilities within the housing compound will also be provided.


Roads 3.4.11

New Approach Road to Power Plant

The Project scope includes designing and constructing a new four lane road access (each lane 3.5 meters

width) to provide a connection between the highway and the power plant. A separate access from existing

highway shall be provided for housing compound with two lanes each of 3.5 meters width with paved

shoulders. The road shall be provided with street lights, road markings, road signs and drainage slopes towards

the hedging and trees.

The proposed access road shall be designed for heavy duty construction in order to allow safe transport of

heavy weight equipment such as turbines, generators and transformers.

Plant Roads

Roads within the power station will be of 10m wide for the main roads and 8m wide for secondary roads. The

road network system may be constructed in asphaltic concrete but concrete paving will be provided where

petrol/oil or other chemical spillage may occur as well as in front of the transformer compounds. The road shall

be provided with bollards and/or barriers, road markings, signs and road lights and footpaths. An appropriate

width of footpath shall be provided to facilitate the safe movement of pedestrians around the site.

Patrol Roads

The internal and external asphaltic concrete patrol road shall be provided all along the perimeter of security fence and around the tank farm area. The width of petrol road shall be 4.6m with hard shoulder and gravel sur-facing.

Plant Design Life 3.4.12

All equipment and components of the Plant shall have a design life time of 262,800 operating hours as a

minimum, but at least 30 years. The civil facilities, installations and building service systems shall satisfy the

design lifetime criteria of 50 years.

41 | 278

4 Environmental Legislation and Standards

Regulatory Environmental Framework in KSA 4.1

Basis Law of 1992 4.1.1

The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) has a suite of laws that aim to protect the environment, fauna and flora

from wilful damage or destruction. Several of these laws are embodied in the Basis Law of 1992, commonly

referred to as the ‘Constitution’ of Saudi Arabia.

Article 1 of the Basis Law defines “environment” as man’s surroundings including air, water, land and outer

space together with all matter, fauna and flora, different forms of energy, physical systems and operations and

human activities. ‘Environmental Protection’ is taken to mean the preservation of the environment and the

prevention and curbing of environmental pollution and degradation.

Article 2 defines the Law’s objectives as:

Preserve, protect and ameliorate the environment and prevent pollution;

Protect public hygiene against the dangers of activities deleterious to environment;

Conserve, develop and rationalize the use of natural resources;

Make environmental planning an integral part of comprehensive development planning in all industrial,

agricultural and urban fields, etc.; and

Enhance environmental awareness, instil a sense of individual and collective responsibility for

environmental protection and improve and encourage national voluntary efforts in this respect.

Article 2 also requires the Concerned Authority (PME) to undertake such tasks as may protect and prevent

degradation of the environment, and in particular to:

Review and assess the state of the environment, upgrade monitoring techniques and tools, collect

information and conduct environmental studies;

Document and publish environmental information;

Prepare, issue, review, develop and interpret environmental protection standards, draft environmental laws

relevant to its responsibilities;

Ensure compliance by Public Authorities and individuals with environmental laws, standards and criteria,

and take necessary measures to this end, in co-operation and co-ordination with the Competent and

Licensing Authorities;


Monitor new developments in the domain of environment and environmental management on regional and

international levels; and

Promote environmental awareness on all levels.

The General Environmental Regulations, 2001 4.1.2

Regulation and protection of the environment in Saudi Arabia is controlled and operated under the jurisdiction

of the PME. The regulatory requirements and enforcement regime for pollution control in the KSA has been

significantly strengthened in recent years by the introduction of the General Environmental Regulations (GER,

2001). These have placed specific requirements and duties on PME to apply environmental law across the

whole Kingdom and develop a system of regulation and enforcement. The GER is subdivided into the following

three sections:

General Environmental Law;

Rules for Implementation; and

Environmental Protection Standards.

Table 4-1 below provides a list of relevant environmental legislation in KSA. Further detail will be provided in

the following sections where required.

43 | 278

Table 4-1 Relevant Content of the General Environmental Regulations

Regulation Title Sub Title (if applicable) Regulator

General Environmental Regulation 2001

The ‘Act’ in 24 Articles PME

Rules for Implementation (General Environmental Regulation) 2001

The regulations in 22 Articles PME

Environmental Protection Standards (Rules for Implementation) 2001

Environmental standards for issue areas PME

GER Art 3, 4 & 10, 11, Duties and obligations

Regarding the implementation of these regulations

PME

GER Art 5 Requirement for EIA - PME

GER Art 6 Requirement for BAT -

GER Art 7 Education and communication

- PME

GER Art 8 Conservation of Natural Resources

- PME

GER Art 9 Environmental Disaster Planning

- PME

GER Art 12 Waste management and disposal

- PME/Municipalities

GER Art 13 Prevention of pollution - PME

GER Art 14 Hazardous waste management

- PME/Municipalities

GER Art 15 Implementation and timescales

- PME

GER Art 16 Project financing and development

- PME

GER Art 17, 18, 19, 20 Violations and penalties

Includes grievances and appeals. PME

Doc 1409-01 GER Air quality 1982 Ambient air and source standards PME

Doc 1409-01 GER Water quality 1982 Ambient and discharge standards to environment and wastewater treatment works.

PME

Doc 1409-01 GER Appendix 2 1982 EIA regulations PME

Doc 1423-01 GER Appendix 4 1992 Waste management regulations PME


Revised Environmental Protection Standards 4.1.3

In 2012, PME issued a revised set of Environmental Protection Standards to replace those previously referred

to within the GER (2001). These new standards are listed below and became effective as of 24th March 2012.

The results of this assessment have therefore been compared against the provisions set out within these

updated set of legislative requirements.

National Material Recovery and Recycling of Waste Guidance Document for KSA;

Standard for Control of Emissions from Mobile Sources;

General Environmental Standard for Noise;

Standards for the Control of Emissions to Air from Stationary Sources;

Protection of Major Accidents;

National Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities – Design and Operation Standard for KSA;

National Thermal Treatment and Incineration Design and Operation Standard for KSA;

Waste Acceptance Criteria Standard for KSA;

Waste Classification Standard for KSA;

Drinking Water Quality;

National Biological Treatment Design and Operations Standards for KSA;

Waste RCC Standard for KSA;

National Waste Storage Standard for KSA;

National Waste Training and Assessment of Technical Competence of Operators Standard for KSA;

National Waste Transport Standard for KSA;

National Landfill Design and Operations Standards for KSA;

Wastewater Discharge Standards for KSA;

National Best Practicable Environmental Option for Waste Disposal Guidance Note for KSA;

Ambient Air Quality Standard; and

National Ambient Water Quality Standard for KSA.

45 | 278

Environmental Impact Assessment 4.2

KSA Requirements 4.2.1

An EIA is required in KSA on the basis of the General Environmental Regulations (GER) 2001 for specific

projects.

In accordance with the industrial and development project classification guide, Appendix No. 2.1 of the GER

2001: “Guidelines for Classification of Industrial and Development Projects”, issued by PME, projects are

classified into three categories taking into consideration their environmental impacts. For projects within the first

and second categories, an initial environmental assessment report, in addition to the forms included within the

regulations themselves, is usually sufficient although an EIA may potentially be required by the PME.

Larger power plants, with capacities in excess of 30 MW, are classified as Category III projects. Projects falling

within this category, in the absence of full mitigation, could be expected to have negative effects on human

health and the environment and thus require a comprehensive EIA.

Guidelines for compiling the EIA are stated in Appendix 2.4 of the GER 2001. The regulations specify that the

EIA should include, but not be limited, to:

Justification and presentation of the project;

Description of the project and its objectives;

Baseline status of the surrounding environment including the following:

Air quality;

Soil and topography;

Oceanography;

Surface and ground water;

Land environment (fauna/flora);

Marine environment (fauna/flora);

Land use of selected site and its surroundings; and

Land ownership (original owner).

The GER 2001 further states that an EIA should include the following:

Identification of the general potential impacts of the project and suggested alternatives; and

Identification and analysis of key effects of the project on air quality, the marine and coastal

environment, surface-and-groundwater, flora and fauna, land use and urban development, residential

clusters and general scenic view.


Assessment of significant impacts, which should:

Quantify and rate the significant impacts on natural resources;

Estimate the relative damage to the area and the extent of potential damage;

Estimate the lifespan of the facilities;

Study the possible mitigation of anticipated impacts; and

Provide a summary of the significant (residual) impacts after mitigation.

International Finance Corporation Performance Standards 4.2.2

Given that the project is likely to attract private sector finance, it is assumed that an EIA would need to assess

the environmental impacts in accordance with the International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance

Standards. For projects located in non-OECD countries (as is the case for KSA), the EIA should refer to the IFC

Performance Standards and IFC Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines, which provide general and

sector specific guidance.

All IFC projects or projects where IFC Performance Standards (updated 2012) are adhered to must meet with

the following Performance Standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability:

Performance Standard 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and Impacts;

Performance Standard 2: Labour and Working Conditions;

Performance Standard 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention;

Performance Standard 4: Community Health, Safety and Security;

Performance Standard 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement;

Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living Natural

Resources;

Performance Standard 7: Indigenous Peoples; and

Performance Standard 8: Cultural Heritage.

In addition to meeting the requirements under the Performance Standards, projects must also comply with

applicable national laws, including those laws implementing host country obligations under international law.

The IFC has prepared a series of Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines, which provide general and

sector specific guidance. These documents provide details of the required levels and considerations when

undertaking an EIA for a project. The following would specifically be referred to as part of the preparation of an

EIA for the project:

IFC General EHS Guidelines (2007);

IFC EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation (2007); and

47 | 278

IFC EHS Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants (2008).

Equator Principles 4.2.3

In October 2002, the IFC convened a meeting of banks in London to discuss environmental and social issues in

project finance. It was decided to try to develop a banking industry framework for addressing environmental

and social risks in project financing. This led to the drafting of the Equator Principles. On June 4th, 2003, 10

banks from seven countries signed up to the Equator Principles, a voluntary set of guidelines for assessing and

managing environmental and social risks in project financing. To date, in excess of 60 financial institutions

operating in more than 100 countries worldwide have adopted the Equator Principles. As a result, the Equator

Principles have become the industry standard for addressing environmental and social issues. During March to

May 2006, the Equator Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs) engaged in a substantive review of the Equator

Principles. The revised principles became effective from July 6th, 2006, although have recently been

superseded by a third revision on 4th June 2013. This revision is referred to as ‘Equator Principles III’ (EP III).

EP III ensures a strengthened framework for both social and environmental aspects and will result in benefits

for Equator Principles Financial Institutions e.g. improved transparency in reporting, and focus on emerging

social and environmental concerns. The key changes to these revised principles relate to project related

corporate loans and bridge loans. The revised EP III will not be mandatory for application to Projects until

January 2014.

The key points to note are as follows:

The Equator Principles apply to all new project financing that has a total capital cost of $10 million or more

across all industry sectors (the previous threshold was $50 million);

For projects with potentially significant social and environmental impacts (Category A and B), the borrower

must complete and disclose a Social and Environmental Assessment (EIA) (previously called an

Environmental and Social Impact Assessment). The EIA must now comprise a detailed assessment of

social and environmental impacts including labour, health and safety; and

In the context of the project, the EIA report must address the relevant potential impacts and risks.

Environmental Standards Applicable to the Project 4.3

This section details applicable environmental standards which have been specified within the technical

specification (SEC, 2014). In the absence of any specific information and/or requirements set by SEC, the

relevant IFC/PME environmental requirements that must be adhered to during the design, construction and

operational phases of the facility are presented.

Ambient Air Quality 4.3.1

Table 4-2 below provides the relevant values for each important air quality parameter for PME (and the IFC).


The PME ambient air quality standards are straightforward and apply to all circumstances. However, the IFC

standards require a certain level of interpretation due to various ‘interim’ and ‘guideline’ values being specified

rather than fixed limits. The WHO guidelines provide interim targets for countries that still have very high levels

of air pollution to encourage the gradual cutting down of emissions.

Guidelines values have the objective of minimising the health effects associated with each pollutant.

The PME and IFC air quality standards (AQSs) and emission limits for the pollutants considered are also

shown in Table 4-2 and Table 4-3, respectively.

Table 4-2 PME and IFC Ambient Air Quality Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10

Pollutant Averaging period PME (µg/m3) IFC EHS Guidelines (µg/m3)

NO2 1-hour

Annual

660(a)

100

200

40

SO2 10-min

1-hour

24-hour

Annual

--(b)

730(a)

365(c)

80

500

--

125 (interim target 1)


20

--

Inhalable suspended particles (PME) or PM10 (IFC)

24-hour

Annual

340(c)

80



75 (interim target 3

50




20

a) Not to be exceeded more than twice per month (30 day period).

b) No 10-min standard has been set by PME.

c) Not to be exceeded more once during any 12 month period.

Stack Emissions Limits 4.3.2

SEC has not explicitly prescribed stack emission limits for the proposed facility. From an engineering point of

view, SEC does however note the following:

Stack height shall be a minimum of 60 meters above the finished floor level of the HRSG;

Bypass stacks shall be a minimum of 40 metres above the finished floor levels of the HRSG; and

49 | 278

The stack height shall conform to KSA-PME regulations and shall disperse emissions such that ground level

impacts are within regulations.

In the absence of such information, we have determined the requirements in line with international best practice

in the form of the IFC EHS Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants together with additional information in respect

to PME’s requirements with regards air pollution source standards as shown in Table 4-3 below.

Table 4-3 PME/IFC Emission Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10

Pollutant PME (2014) IFC EHS Guidelines (Combustion Turbines >50MWth)

Non-degraded Air shed/Degraded Air shed

NOx 500 mg/Nm3(a)(b) (NDA)

350 mg/Nm3 (NDA) 74 ppm (152 mg/Nm3)(b) - Fuels other than Natural Gas

SO2 600 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

400 mg/Nm3 (DA)

Use of 1% Sulphur content or less in fuel (NDA)

Use of 0.5% Sulphur content or less in fuel (DA)

PM10 150 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

100 mg/Nm3 (DA)

50 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

30 mg/Nm3 (DA)

(a) It is assumed that mg/Nm3 is the correct unit, as stated in Article II(1)(b) of the KSA National Environmental Standards – Control of Emissions to Air from Stationary Sources (PME 2014)

(b) Nm3 – Normalised cubic metre, reference conditions 273K, 101.3 kPa, dry gas, 15% oxygen.

It should be noted that there is some confusion with the revised PME emissions standards as the units

presented within Appendix A of Control of Emissions to Air from Stationary Sources are g/Nm3, whereas

within the standard itself (Article II – General Provisions, 1 Units of Measurement) state that “Milligrams per

normal metre cubed (mg/Nm3) shall be used to indicate the concentration of gaseous, particulate and toxic

pollutants”. It is therefore assumed that mg/Nm3 is the correct unit.

Environmental Noise Standards 4.3.3

SEC (2014) stipulates a number of requirements in terms of noise emissions that, unless otherwise stated in

the Specifications, the absolute limit of any A-weighted sound pressure level measured in accordance with ISO

3746 from any equipment or plant supplied under this Contract shall not exceed 85 dB(A) at a distance of one

(1) meter from the source during normal plant or unit operation and 1.2 m above ground level or personnel

platforms.

Emissions from the Project will also need to comply with the operational noise criteria as laid out within the

PME General Environmental Standard for Noise, together with the IFC General EHS Guidelines (2007) as

illustrated in Table 4-4 below. For reference purposes, it is worth noting the IFC Guidelines criteria for noise

emissions from industrial premises stipulate that:

‘Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in… [Table 4-4]…or result in a maximum increase in

background levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site’.


Table 4-4 PME & IFC EHS Noise Guidelines Limit Values

PME IFC

Receptor LAeq,T (dB) Leq,1hr (dBA)

Day-time Evening Night-time

Daytime

07:00 – 22:00

Night-time

22:00 – 07:00

Residential; Institutional; Educational. 55 50 45 55 45

Industrial;

Commercial 75 65 55 70 70

Article V – Noise from industrial units in areas set aside primarily for industrial facilities sets out a range of

permitted noise limits, classifying land uses types for which different noise limits apply. On the basis of the

descriptions provided for each category, it can be concluded that the Project can be classified as A4 – Medium

density industrial and is therefore required to adhere to the standards provided within Table 4-5 below.

The General Environmental Standard for Noise issued by PME, provide maximum permissible façade noise

limits for general construction within Article VI – Noise from Construction Activities, in addition to ambient noise

standards during operation; these are detailed below in Table 4-5 and will be applicable during the construction

phase of the project.

Table 4-5 PME General Construction – Maximum Permissible Façade Noise Limits

Water Quality Standards 4.3.4

The Government of Saudi Arabia has taken several steps and decisions to control and protect the coastal

environment. The most salient of these are listed below.

Environment Protection Standards: these are contained in Document No.1401-01, (2006), PME.

National Oil Spill and Hazardous Substances Contingency Plan: This plan is set in Decision No. 157 dated

20/11/1411 H, (June 1991) by the Council of Ministers. This decision called for the formation of a

Daytime

LAeq,12h (dB)

Evening

LAeq,12h (dB)

Night-time

LAeq,12h (dB)

5m 5m 5m

80 80 80

51 | 278

committee from five governmental bodies, to be involved in the implementation of this plan. Members of

this committee are:

1. Ministry of Defense and Aviation PME

2. Ministry of Interior Coastal Guards and Defence

3. Ministry of Petroleum and Minerals

4. Port Authority

5. Ministry of Municipalities and Rural Areas

Environmental Impact Assessment: A draft for the implementation of Environmental Protection Standards,

and Principles and Procedures for Environmental Impact Assessment (PME).

Wildlife Protection: Establishment of the National Commission for Wildlife Conservation and Development

(NCWCD) in May 1986. The main goal of this commission is to preserve, protect and develop Wildlife

within the Kingdom. Several protected areas were already established and supervised by NCWCD – Assir

National Park established in the Southern part of the Kingdom and supervised by the Ministry of

Agriculture. Wildlife protected Areas regulation. Issued under Ministerial Resolution No. 124 (26-10-1415

H), March 1995, administered by the NCWCD.

International Obligations: Saudi Arabia has also accepted its role in the international arena of

environmental protection and management by acceding to and ratifying a number of international

conventions and other agreements.

The KSA National Environmental Standard for Ambient Water Quality (2012) provides the recommended

thresholds for pollutants within marine water bodies. A sub-set of relevant limit values are shown in Table 6-1

below.

A number of additional requirements are also presented within these standards, the most relevant of which are:

Mixing zone requirements – this defines the area adjacent to an outfall where exceedances of ambient

standards are permitted. Mixing zones should not exceed 100m radius and should not impinge upon

sensitive habitats, such as coral reef. If the mixing zone requirements are determined to be unachievable

then a detailed study must be undertaken to demonstrate that the best achievable mixing zone dimensions

have been achieved using best available technology (BAT) and that environmental impacts have been

minimised.

Maintenance of background conditions – if background conditions are known to be better quality than the

ambient standards than those conditions must be maintained as a minimum requirement.

The KSA National Standards for Industrial Wastewater and Municipal Wastewater Discharges (2012) provide

limit values for discharge of pollutants into the Red Sea. A sub-set of relevant limit values are shown in Table

6-1 below.


Table 4-6 Examples of relevant ambient water quality and discharge limits from PME 2012

Parameter Unit Red Sea Ambient Criteria* Red Sea Discharge Criteria*

Temperature °C 3 7

pH pH units 0.2 6-9.5

Salinity % 0

Turbidity NTU 2 50

TSS mg/l 5 15

BOD mg/l 10 25

Ammonia mg/l 0.1 1

Aluminium mg/l 0.2 10

Lead mg/l 0.05 0.1

Zinc mg/l 0.8 3

Oil and grease mg/l 2 5

Notes:

* It has been assumed that the site would be classified as ‘Red Sea’ and ‘Marine’ or C1

International Guidelines

The IFC Guidelines for Thermal Power (IFC, 2008) specifies the following requirements in relation to the

temperature increase due to discharge from cooling systems:

Site specific requirement to be established by the local environmental regulator; and

Elevated temperature areas due to discharge of once-through cooling water (e.g., 1°C above, 2°C above,

3°C above ambient water temperature) should be minimized by adjusting intake and outfall design through

the project specific EA depending on the sensitive aquatic ecosystems around the discharge point.

Wastewater Reuse Standards 4.3.5

It is specified by the SEC (2014) that treated effluent generated by the sanitary wastewater treatment plant on

site will be reused for irrigation purposes.

The IFC Performance Standards for wastewater reuse are dependent upon the intended reuse application and

vice-versa.

53 | 278

Table 4-7 Wastewater re-use standards (MAW, 1989)

Parameter Unit Unrestricted Irrigation Restricted Irrigation Biochemical Oxygen Demand Monthly average Weekly average

mg/l mg/l

10.00 15.00

20.00 30.00

Total suspended solids (TSS) Monthly average

mg/l

10.00

20.00

Aluminium (Al) mg/l 5.00 5.00 Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.10 0.10 Beryllium (Be) mg/l 0.10 0.10 Boron (B) mg/l 0.50 0.50 Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.01 0.01 Chromium (Cr) mg/l 0.01 0.01 Cobalt (Co) mg/l 0.05 0.05 Copper (Cu) mg/l 0.40 0.40 Cyanide mg/l 0.05 0.05 Fluoride (F) mg/l 2.00 2.00 Iron (Fe) mg/l 5.00 5.00 Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.10 0.10 Lithium (Li) for citrus fruits mg/l 2.50 2.50 Manganese (Mn) mg/l 0.20 0.20 Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.001 0.001 Molybdenum (Mo) mg/l 0.01 0.01 Nitrate as N mg/l 10.00 10.00 Nickel (Ni) mg/l 0.02 0.02 Selenium (Se) mg/l 0.02 0.02 Vanadium (V) mg/l 0.01 0.01 Zinc (Zn) mg/l 4.00 4.00 Phenol mg/l 0.002 0.002 Oil and grease mg/l absent Absent pH 6.0-8.4 6.0-8.4 Faecal coliforms per 100 ml Average of last seven samples Maximum of any one sample

MPN MPN

2.20 23.00

100 200

Intestinal nematodes per litre 1.0 1.0 Turbidity NTU 1.0 1.0

Table 4-7 above shows the required effluent quality for restricted and unrestricted irrigation established by the

Ministry of Agriculture and Water (MAW, 1989). The updated PME Standards (2012) for Industrial and

Wastewater Discharges’ states that wastewater destined for regulated or unregulated reuse must adhere to the

criteria specified by the relevant designated agency, which is therefore, the MAW. It should however, be noted

that WSP have concerns with these prescribed standards as they may not reflect current best practices,

particularly in regard to bacteria and viruses. In addition, as these standards are intended for agricultural reuse

they may not necessarily be applicable to landscaping.

An alternative approach could be to reference the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta

and Greywater or recognised standards such as the US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) Guidelines

for Water Reuse (2004).


As described earlier, the MAW standards are specifically for agricultural irrigation and it may therefore be more

suitable to apply more recognised international standards, such as the US EPA guidelines for urban water

reuse outlined in Table 4-8.

Table 4-8 Guidelines for Urban Water Reuse (US EPA Guidelines)

Type of reuse Treatment Reclaimed

Water Quality

Reclaimed Water

Monitoring Setback

Distances Comments

Urban Reuse

All types of landscape irrigation, (e.g., golf courses, parks etc) – also vehicle washing, toilet flushing, use in fire protection systems and commercial air conditioners, and other uses with similar access or exposure to the water

Secondary

Filtration

Disinfection

pH = 6-9

< 10 mg/l BOD

< 2 NTU

No detectable faecal coli/100ml

1 mg/l Cl2 residual (minimum)

pH – weekly

BOD – weekly

Turbidity – continuous

Coliforms – daily

Cl2 residual - continuous

50 ft (15 m) to potable water supply wells

At controlled-access irrigation sites where design and operational measures significantly reduce the potential of public contact with reclaimed water, a lower level of treatment, e.g., secondary treatment and disinfection to achieve < 14 faecal coli/100 ml, may be appropriate.

Chemical (coagulant and/or polymer) addition prior to filtration may be necessary to meet water quality recommendations.

The reclaimed water should be clear and odourless.

A higher chlorine residual and/or a longer contact time may be necessary to assure that viruses and parasites are inactivated or destroyed.

A chlorine residual of 0.5 mg/l or greater in the distribution system is recommended to reduce odours, slime, and bacterial growth.

55 | 278

Solid and Hazardous Waste 4.3.6

KSA Requirements

The GER (2001), updated in 2012, provides a suite of Environmental Standards relating to waste which may be

relevant to the Project. These are as follows:

Waste Acceptance Criteria Standards for KSA;

Waste Classification Standard for KSA;

Waste RCC Standards for KSA;

National Waste Storage Standard for KSA;

National Waste Transport Standard for KSA; and

National Best Practicable Environmental Option for Waste Disposal Guidance Note for KSA.

In particular, the Waste RCC Standards for KSA makes specific reference to the control of solid waste

materials and in particular waste materials which are classified as hazardous in terms of their impacts on the

environment:

Article 4 (Purpose) identifies that PME is charged with protecting the natural environment and is

therefore obliged to issue controls over waste activities in KSA’.

The Waste Classification Standard for KSA provides the following:

“A national classification system that may be employed within KSA by all waste generators, transporters, facility

operators and the relevant competent agencies and other interested parties. The standard provides

classification, coding and defining of all waste types so they can be handled treated or disposed of

accordingly".

IFC Guidelines

Section 1.6 of the IFC General Environmental, Health, Safety (EHS) Guidelines is entitled Waste Management

and is applicable to all projects that generate, store or handle any quantity of waste; whilst Section 1.5 of the

IFC EHS Guidelines covers Hazardous Materials Management.

The waste management guidelines state that facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the

following:

Establish waste management priorities at the outset of activities based on an understanding of potential

requirements;

Identify Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and impacts and consider waste generation and its

consequences;

Establish a waste management hierarchy that considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery, recycling,

removal and finally disposal of wastes;


Avoid or minimize the generation waste materials, as far as practicable;

Identify where waste generation cannot be avoided but can be minimized or where opportunities exist for,

recovering and reusing waste; and

Where waste is not able to be recovered or reused, identify means of treating, destroying, and disposing of

it in an environmentally sound manner.

This section also provides guidelines for the segregation of waste into hazardous and non-hazardous and how

to manage these waste streams. The project should seek to demonstrate compliance with these principles and

the guidelines set out within this document.

International Conventions

The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia signed and ratified ‘The Basel Convention on the Control of Trans-boundary

Movement of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal’ in 1989 and confirmed it in 1990.

This convention aims to introduce a system for controlling the export, import and disposal of hazardous wastes,

and to reduce the volume of such exchanges so as to protect human health and the environment.

The convention defines a trans-boundary movement as ‘any movement of hazardous wastes or other wastes

from an area under the national jurisdiction of one State to or through an area under the national jurisdiction of

another State, or to or through an area not under the national jurisdiction of any State, provided at least two

States are involved in the movement’.

General obligations include the following:

It is prohibited to export or import hazardous wastes or other wastes to or from a non-party State;

No wastes may be exported if the State of import has not given its consent in writing to the specific import;

Information about proposed trans-boundary movements must be communicated to the States concerned,

by means of a notification form, so that they may evaluate the effects of the proposed movements on

human health and the environment;

Trans-boundary movements of wastes must only be authorised where there is no danger attaching to their

movement and disposal;

Wastes which are to be the subject of a trans-boundary movement must be packaged, labelled and

transported in conformity with international rules, and must be accompanied by a movement document

from the point at which a movement commences to the point of disposal; and

Any party may impose additional requirements that are consistent with the provisions of the Convention.

57 | 278

Requirements for Best Available Technologies 4.3.7

Article 6 of the General Environmental Regulations (GER, 2001) outlines the requirement for the party

implementing a new project or making major modifications to existing projects to utilise the best and most

suitable technologies available for the local environment and use materials that cause the least contamination

to the environment. In order to apply further clarity to this requirement reference shall be made to international

best practice, such as the approach of the US EPA in the Clean Air Act which requires the use of the Best

Available Technology which is economically achievable or the European approach of requiring best available

techniques not entailing excessive costs (BATNEEC).


5 Impact Assessment Methodology

Methodology for the Assessment of Impacts 5.1

The assessment of the potential impacts of both the construction and operational phases associated with the

project is based on a number of criteria, which are used to determine whether or not such effects are

‘significant’. These significant criteria comprise:

Local, national and international legislation, regulations and standards;

Relationship with national planning policy;

The sensitivity of the local environment;

The reversibility/irreversibility and duration of effects;

The inter-relationship, if any, between the effects – i.e. an assessment of cumulative impacts; and

The results of consultations with the environmental regulator.

The significance of effects reflects judgements as to the importance or sensitivity of the affected receptor(s) and

the nature, magnitude and duration of the predicted changes. For example, a large adverse impact on a feature

or site of low importance will be of less significance than the same impact on a feature or site of high

importance.

Sensitivity (Importance) of Receptors 5.2

Receptors are defined as the physical resource or user group that would be affected by a proposed

development. The baseline studies identify potential environmental receptors for each topic. Certain receptors

may be more sensitive to environmental effects than others, whilst the importance of a receptor may depend,

for example, on its frequency or extent of occurrence at a local, national, regional or international scale.

Description of Effect 5.3

Effects (otherwise referred to as ‘impacts’) are defined as the physical changes to the environment as attributed

to a project. For each topic, the likely environmental effects are identified and taken into consideration,

including their magnitude, comparing the effects with and without the project in place.

Effects are defined as either ‘adverse’ or ‘beneficial’ and, depending on the discipline, either ‘direct’ (effects

directly attributable to a project action/activity), or ‘indirect’ (effects that are not directly attributed to a project

action/activity).

59 | 278

Effects are also divided into those occurring during the construction phase of a project, and those that occur

during the operational phase. Again, dependent on the discipline, this SEA may refer to such effects as

‘temporary’ (generally during the construction phase), and ‘permanent’ (generally during the operational phase).

Significance of Effects 5.4

Prediction of impacts is essentially an objective exercise to determine what could potentially happen to the

environment as a consequence of the project and its associated activities. Impacts have been categorised

according to their various characteristics (e.g. are they detrimental or beneficial, direct or indirect, etc.). The

various types of impacts that arise, and the terms used in this assessment are shown and discussed in the

following tables and associated text.

Evaluation of Impacts 5.5

In evaluating the significance (i.e. importance) of impacts, the following factors were taken into consideration:

Impact severity: The severity of an impact is a function of a range of considerations including impact

magnitude, impact duration, impact extent, and legal and guideline compliance; and

Nature and sensitivity of the receiving environment: The characteristics of the receptor / resource will be

taken into consideration with respect to its vulnerability / sensitivity to an impact / change.

In evaluation the severity of the impacts, the following factors were taken into consideration:

Impact Magnitude: The magnitude of the change that is induced (i.e. the percentage of a resource that is

lost)

Impact Duration: The time period over which the impact is intended to last;

Impact Extent: The geographical extent of the induced change; and

Regulations, Standards and Guidelines: The status of the impact in relation to regulations (e.g. discharge

limits), standards (e.g. environmental quality criteria) and guidelines.

The tables below outlines the impact criteria used within the assessment of the project.


Table 5-1 Definition of Impact Type

Impact Type Definition

Direct Impact Impacts that result from a direct interaction between a planned project activity and the receiving environment (e.g. between occupation of a plot of land and the habitats which are lost).

Secondary Impact Impacts that follow on from the primary interactions between the project and its environment as a result of subsequent interactions within the environment. (e.g. loss of part of a habitat affects the viability of a species population over a wider area).

Indirect Impacts Impacts that result from other activities that are encouraged to happen as a consequence of the project (e.g. presence of project promotes service industries in the region).

Cumulative impact

Impacts that act together with other impacts to affect the same environmental resource or receptor.

Residual Impact Impacts that remain after mitigation measures have been designed into the intended activity.

Table 5-2 Impact Assessment Terminology

Term Definition

Impact magnitude

Magnitude Estimate the size of the impact (e.g. the size of the area damaged or impacted, the % of a resource that is lost or affected etc.)

Impact Nature

Negative impact An impact that is considered to represent an adverse change from the baseline, or introduces a new undesirable factor.

Positive impact An impact that is considered to represent an improvement on the baseline, or introduces a new desirable factor.

Neutral impact An impact that is considered to represent neither an improvement nor deterioration in baseline conditions.

Impact Duration

Temporary Impacts are predicted to be of a short duration and intermittent / occasional in nature.

Short-term Impacts that are predicted to last only for a limited period but will cease on completion of the activity, or as a result of mitigation / reinstatement measures and natural recovery.

Long-term Impacts that will continue over an extended period but cease when the project stops operating. These will include impacts that may be intermittent or repeated rather than continuous of they occur over an extended period of time.

Permanent Impacts that occur once on development of the project and cause a permanent change in

61 | 278

Term Definition

the affected receptor or resources that endures substantially beyond the project lifetime.

Impact Extent

Local Impacts are on a local scale (e.g. restricted to the vicinity of the facility etc).

Regional Impacts are on a national scale (effects well beyond the immediate vicinity of the project and affect an entire region).

Global Impacts are on a global scale (e.g. global warming, depletion of the ozone layer).

Table 5-3 Impact Severity Criteria

Impact Severity Definition

Slight Effects are very small and difficult to distinguish from the baseline / within natural fluctuations.

Low Affects a specific group of localised individuals within a population over a short time period (one generation or less), but does not affect other trophic levels or the population itself.

Medium Affects a portion of a population and may bring about a change in abundance and/ or distribution over one or more generations, but does not threaten the integrity of that population or any population dependant on it.

High Affects an entire population or species in sufficient magnitude to cause a decline in abundance and / or change in distribution beyond which natural recruitment (reproduction, immigration from unaffected areas) would not return that population or species, or any population or species dependent upon it, to its former level within several generations.

The likelihood (probability) of an event occurring has been ascribed using a qualitative scale of probability

shown in the table, below:

Table 5-4 Likelihood Categories

Likelihood Definition

Extremely unlikely

The event is very unlikely to occur under normal conditions but may occur in exceptional circumstances, e.g. emergency conditions.

Unlikely The event is unlikely but may occur under normal conditions.

Low likelihood The event is likely to occur during normal conditions.

Medium likelihood The event is very likely to occur during normal conditions.

High likelihood / inevitable The event will occur during normal conditions.


The significance of each impact is determined by comparing the impact severity against the sensitivity of the

receptor in the impact significance matrix provided in Table 5-5 below:

Table 5-5 Determining the Significance of Impacts

Sensitivity of Receptor

Low (L) Low-medium (LM) Medium (M) Medium High

(MH) High (H)

Impa

ct S

ever

ity Slight (1) Negligible Negligible Negligible Minor Minor

Low (2) Negligible Negligible Minor Minor Moderate

Medium (3) Negligible Minor Minor Moderate Major

High (4) Minor Moderate Moderate Major Major

Lastly, impacts are defined according to the following criteria:

Table 5-6 Definition of Impacts

Significance Definition

Positive Impact An Impact that is considered to represent an improvement on the baseline or introduces a new desirable factor.

Negligible Impact Magnitude of change comparable to natural variation.

Minor Impact Detectable but not significant.

Moderate Impact Significant; amenable to mitigation; should be mitigated where practicable.

Major Impact Significant; amenable to mitigation; must be mitigated.

Critical Impact Intolerable; not amenable to mitigation; alternatives must be identified – Project Stopper.

Cumulative Effects 5.6

Where possible the cumulative effects of the Project are considered within the ESIA. Two types of cumulative

effects have been considered:

Type 1 Cumulative Impact: the combined effects of different environmental factors from a single

development on a particular receptor, e.g. one residential property may experience a degradation in local

air quality and an increase in noise levels as a result of construction activities; and

Type 2 Cumulative Impact: the combined effects of all developments within the area, e.g. impacts on air

quality from one development may not be significant when considered alone, but may be significant in

combination with other proposed developments.

63 | 278

The ESIA has considered Type 1 cumulative effects largely in relation to construction; whereby there is the

potential for noise impacts together with dust emissions upon sensitive residential receptors to the north and

south of the Project Site.


6 Marine Environment

Introduction 6.1

This chapter considers the marine baseline conditions on site and identifies any potential soil and groundwater

impacts associated with the development of the Project.

The assessment considers marine issues associated with both the construction and operational phases of the

development and provides appropriate pollution control best practice measures.

Relevant Standards and Legislation 6.2

Relevant Environmental Legislation 6.2.1

National Standards

The Government of Saudi Arabia has taken several steps and decisions to control and protect the coastal

environment. The most salient of these are listed below.

Environment Protection Standards: these are contained in Document No.1401-01, (2006), PME.

National Oil Spill and Hazardous Substances Contingency Plan: This plan is set in Decision No. 157 dated

20/11/1411 H, (June 1991) by the Council of Ministers. This decision called for the formation of a

committee from five governmental bodies, to be involved in the implementation of this plan. Members of

this committee are:

1. Ministry of Defence and Aviation PME

2. Ministry of Interior Coastal Guards and Defence

3. Ministry of Petroleum and Minerals

4. Port Authority

5. Ministry of Municipalities and Rural Areas

Environmental Impact Assessment: A draft for the implementation of Environmental Protection Standards,

and Principles and Procedures for Environmental Impact Assessment (PME).

Wildlife Protection: Establishment of the National Commission for Wildlife Conservation and Development

(NCWCD) in May 1986. The main goal of this commission is to preserve, protect and develop Wildlife

within the Kingdom. Several protected areas were already established and supervised by NCWCD – Assir

National Park established in the Southern part of the Kingdom and supervised by the Ministry of

65 | 278

Agriculture. Wildlife protected Areas regulation. Issued under Ministerial Resolution No. 124 (26-10-1415

H), March 1995, administered by the NCWCD.

International Obligations: Saudi Arabia has also accepted its role in the international arena of

environmental protection and management by acceding to and ratifying a number of international

conventions and other agreements.

The KSA National Environmental Standard for Ambient Water Quality (2012) provides the recommended

thresholds for pollutants within marine water bodies. A sub-set of relevant limit values are shown in Table 6-1

below.

A number of additional requirements are also presented within these standards, the most relevant of which are:

Mixing zone requirements – this defines the area adjacent to an outfall where exceedances of ambient

standards are permitted. Mixing zones should not exceed 100m radius and should not impinge upon

sensitive habitats, such as coral reef. If the mixing zone requirements are determined to be unachievable

then a detailed study must be undertaken to demonstrate that the best achievable mixing zone dimensions

have been achieved using best available technology (BAT) and that environmental impacts have been

minimised.

Maintenance of background conditions – if background conditions are known to be better quality than the

ambient standards than those conditions must be maintained as a minimum requirement.

The KSA National Standards for Industrial Wastewater and Municipal Wastewater Discharges (2012) provide

limit values for discharge of pollutants into the Red Sea. A sub-set of relevant limit values are shown in Table

6-1 below.

Table 6-1 Examples of relevant ambient water quality and discharge limits from PME 2012

Parameter Unit Red Sea Industrial Criteria*

Red Sea Ambient Criteria*

Red Sea Discharge Criteria

Temperature °C 4 3 7

pH pH units 0.3 0.2 6-9.5

Salinity % 2 0

Turbidity NTU 2 2 50

TSS mg/l 5 5 15

BOD mg/l 15 10 25

Ammonia mg/l 0.2 0.1 1

Aluminium mg/l 1 0.2 10

Lead mg/l 0.2 0.05 0.1

Zinc mg/l 2 0.8 3

Oil and grease mg/l 3 2 5

Notes:

* Ambient standards for both Red Sea ‘Industrial’ and Red Sea ‘Marine’ are provided


International Guidelines

The IFC Guidelines for Thermal Power (IFC, 2008) specifies the following requirements in relation to the

temperature increase due to discharge from cooling systems:

Site specific requirement to be established by the local environmental regulator; and

Elevated temperature areas due to discharge of once-through cooling water (e.g., 1°C above, 2°C above,

3°C above ambient water temperature) should be minimized by adjusting intake and outfall design through

the project specific EA depending on the sensitive aquatic ecosystems around the discharge point.

The IFC General EHS Guidelines states that:

Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result in an increase greater than 3°C of ambient

temperature at the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which takes into account ambient water

quality, receiving water use and assimilative capacity among other considerations.

The IFC’s Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living Natural

Resources (January 1st 2012) should be applied to projects:

1. located in modified, natural, and critical habitats;

2. that potentially impact on or are dependent on ecosystem services over which the client has direct

management control or significant influence; or

3. that include the production of living natural resources (e.g., agriculture, animal husbandry, fisheries,

forestry).

Performance Standard 6 requires the following:

“The risks and impacts identification process…should consider direct and indirect project-related impacts on

biodiversity and ecosystem services and identify any significant residual impacts. This process will consider

relevant threats to biodiversity and ecosystem services, especially focusing on habitat loss, degradation and

fragmentation, invasive alien species, overexploitation, hydrological changes, nutrient loading, and pollution.

As a matter of priority, the client should seek to avoid impacts on biodiversity and ecosystem services. When

avoidance of impacts is not possible, measures to minimize impacts and restore biodiversity and ecosystem

services should be implemented’.

Methodology 6.3

Baseline Survey 6.3.1

Desktop Study

A desktop study has been made of available information in order to characterise the environmental setting in

regards to marine water quality and ecology.

67 | 278

The desktop study has also included a review of the oceanographic conditions from the marine modelling /

recirculation report.

Marine Baseline Survey

The following section describes the Marine Ecological Resources and Water Quality Baseline Study

methodology. An experienced team undertook the baseline study using recognised survey methodologies. The

survey was designed to provide an assessment of the ecology and water quality present in order to provide a

baseline for the assessment of impacts and against which further continuous monitoring surveys can be

compared.

The survey sites were selected using an overlay of the project plan onto a satellite image. The shallow sub tidal

habitat is clearly visible and identifiable as fringing reef within the satellite image.

Six survey sites were selected near to the Project site. The location of each of these sites is illustrated in Figure

6-1 and Table 6-2 below.

Figure 6-1 Location of the marine survey baseline sites


Table 6-2 The survey scope at each of the marine survey baseline sites

Site Code Survey Type

Water Quality Ecology

C1

C2

T1

T2

T3

T4

Water samples have been collected from the sea surface in duplicate at 5 locations. The collection

methodology was standardised across the site.

Once the samples had been collected, they were stored and shipped under temperature controlled conditions

until the laboratory analysis had been completed.

Samples were analysed for the following important water quality parameters:

Phenolic compounds (USEPA 625 / 8270C); Total Kjedhad Nitrogen (APHA 4500 Norg B);

Chlorinated hydrocarbons (USEPA 8270C / 3510C /

3620);

Cyanide (free) (HACH 8027);

Microbiological Analysis (APHA 9222 B); Phosphate (CHEM 1006-DXB);

Residual Chlorine (HACH 8167); Ammonia (APHA 4500 NH3-N);

Total suspended solids (APHA 2540 D); pH value @ 20°C (APHA 4500 H+B);

Oil and grease (APHA 5520B); Turbidity (NTU) (Turbidity Meter);

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (APHA 5210B); Floating particles (Visual); and

Chemical Oxygen Demand (APHA 5220B); Metals (ICP CHEM 1006-DXB / AAS-MHS).

Dissolved Oxygen (APHA 4500 O2);

Each of the survey sites were assessed by a team of experienced SCUBA divers using a combination of

Roving Diver Survey, Photographic Survey and Fixed Position Photographs.

The divers swam freely throughout each survey site and recorded every observed fish and invertebrate species

that could be positively identified. At each dive site the approximate area covered and duration of the dive was

standardised. Any sea turtle species seen during the dives were also recorded.

69 | 278

Digital underwater photographs were taken at each survey site in order to document the species and habitats

and the condition of the benthic environment (coral reef) present. Representative photographs have been

selected and presented within the Marine Ecology Survey Datasheets in Appendix 3.

In addition to a simple photographic record, each image was analysed using the software Coral Point Count

(Kohler, 2006). Coral Point Count randomly distributes a number of points onto an underwater photograph and

then the operator visually identifies the features (e.g. coral, algae, rubble, etc.) lying under each point. The

percentage of points overlying each benthic category is calculated, and statistics can be compiled to estimate

the population of biota such as stony coral, sponges, macroalgae, etc. over a region of interest. A screen shot

of Coral Point Count is presented in Figure 7-3 below.

Figure 6-2 Screen Shot of the Coral Point Count Software in Operation

For the Coral Point Count analysis, wide angle photographs were taken at each of the six transects. Six

photographs were taken at each transect arranged perpendicular to the shoreline at the following points on the

reef structure:

D – At depth (between approximately 8 to 10 metres) between the transition from the outer reef slope to the

submarine terrace;

M – Mid-depth on the outer reef slope (approximately 3-5 metres); and

S – Shallow depth of the reef crest / reef edge (approximately 2 metres depth).

The design of the survey allows data to be presented for each transect individually or for each of the five

positions on the reef structure.


Each of the 25 top down photographs was input into Coral Point Count and the total area within the field of view

calculated using a marker as a scale guide. A border was then overlaid with an internal area of 10,000 cm2.

Where the photograph or orientation of the reef allowed, the border was a 100 x 100 cm square. However, in

certain images the shape of the border was adjusted to fit the reef but the internal area was kept standard

throughout.

Within each of these borders, Coral Point Count was used to plot 25 randomly distributed points marked A to Y

(see Figure 6-2). The operator then manually designated the feature lying under each point for which a code

had been pre-assigned. Benthic organisms present within each of these photographs were identified to the

family level.

Hard and soft coral and other sessile benthic organisms present within each top down photograph serve as an

indicator of the baseline condition of the reef at each of the sites. During follow up ecological monitoring studies

throughout the construction and operational phase of the Project it will be possible to revisit each of these

transects and obtain current photographs for side-by-side comparison with these “baseline” images and

quantitative data.

Assessment of Construction Phase Impacts 6.3.2

The assessment of construction phase impacts is based on establishing the directly impacted area of marine

habitat within the footprint of the construction works. The impact of indirect aspects, such as impacts upon

water quality has been assessed based on technical judgement and experience of similar projects in similar

environments.

Assessment of Operational Phase impacts 6.3.3

The primary operational phase impact relates to the operation of the cooling water intake and outfall.

Preliminary marine modelling has been undertaken by Artelia (2014) to establish the potential for recirculation

as well as the impact of the heated water upon the marine environment. The full recirculation modelling report

can be viewed Appendix J.

A TELEMAC-3D flow model was developed to simulate the transport of thermal effluent by tide-, wind- and

density-driven currents in areas surrounding the proposed Duba Power Plant site.

The recirculation study was carried out in two stages:

Stage 1 – Regional Hydrodynamic Model. A large scale 3-D hydrodynamic model of the Red Sea was used

to establish general regional circulation patterns and provide boundary conditions for the Local Thermal

Plume Model.

Stage 2 – Local Thermal Plume Model. A local scale 3-D model of the Duba Power Plant site and surround-

ing areas was used to evaluate thermal effluent transport (advection and diffusion) and recirculation, using

hydrodynamic boundary condition input supplied by the Regional Model.

71 | 278

A total of four scenarios for the operational phase were modelled. The impact analysis focuses only on Option

1A which is the base case option under the worst mixing conditions (south easterly winds). The base case is a

300m long Intake lagoon / enclosure with submerged pipes at the natural seabed level of -14mMSL. An outfall

channel guided by breakwaters. The results of the alternative scenarios can be viewed within Appendix J.

Existing Baseline Conditions 6.4

1.1.1 Location The Red Sea is a salt water inlet of the Indian Ocean between Africa and Asia. The connection to the ocean is

in the south through Bab el Mandel and the Gulf of Aden. In the north are the Sinai Peninsula, the Gulf of

Aqaba and the Gulf of Suez (leading to the Suez Canal). Occupying a part of the Great Rift Valley, the Red Sea

has a surface area of about 438,000 km2, is approximately 2,250km long, 355 km wide at its widest point and

on average 490 m deep (with a maximum depth of 2,210m in the central median trench). The Project site is

located on the western coast of Saudi Arabia approximately 110 km south of Jeddah and 600 km north-west of

the Saudi-Yemeni border.



reef complexes with high zoogeographic significance1.

Approximately 1.5km north of the site is a fish farm which has two batteries of cages fixed about 500m from the

shoreline. The coral reef and the existing fish farms are both sensitive receptors with a high sensitivity to the

impacts associated with the construction and operation of the Project.

Bathymetry 6.4.1

The existing bathymetry at the project site is shown in Figure 6-3. The bathymetry is based on admiralty charts

and the results of a bathymetric survey. The reef flat can be observed as the shallow nearshore area with a

depth of 0 to -1 metres extending approximately 250 m from the shoreline. Following this the reef slopes down

to depths exceeding -15 m over a distance of generally 100 to 150 m.

1 DeVantier L. & Pilcher, N (2000) The Status of Coral Reefs in Saudi Arabia – 2000. National Commission for Wildlife Conservation and Development, Saudi Arabia


Figure 6-3 Existing bathymetry at the project site

Currents 6.4.2

Based on the available information current speeds are believed to be typically low (between 0.05 and 0.1 m/s)

in the coastal area offshore from the project site. The predominant current direction in the nearshore area is to

the south.

Water Quality 6.4.3

Water quality samples were collected in duplicate from five locations along the shoreline in front of the project

site. The results of water quality testing undertaken at the project site are shown below.

Physical Parameters

The results of pH indicate the presence of alkaline medium, where the results of the samples ranged between

8.15 to 8.52. It shows the presence of very low concentrations of each of the suspended solids (ranging from

0.17 to 0.8 Mg / l) and turbidity (ranging from 0.45 and 0.08 Nephelometric units) as evidence of the lack of high

turbidity suspended matter discharge sources in the area.

73 | 278

Chemical indicators

Analyzed chemical parameters show lack of organic pollution concentrations as well Biological Oxygen

Demand (BOD) and Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) which are used as indicators of the presence of organic

pollution less than the sensitivity limit of methods that were used in the estimation of organic pollution.

This emphasis on the fact of the lack of pollution sources and the presence of low concentrations of ammonia -

nitrogen (0.01 – 0.25 Mg / l) and phosphate - phosphorus (0.03 – 0.09 Mg / l). In addition, low concentrations of

ammonia and phosphate will not help the phenomenon of eutrophication. Also, it was found that the

concentrations of cyanide phenol, oils, grease and chlorinated hydrocarbons in the collected samples less than

the sensitivity limit of applied methods.

These results emphasis on the absence of discharge sources could contain toxic compounds or oil pollution. It

turned out the presence of low concentrations of residual chlorine (0.07 and 0.01 Mg / l). Therefore, the results

are generally ensuring the lack of contamination sources of the collected samples.

Metals

The results of elements concentrations that have been estimated, that the concentrations of most of the

elements that have been estimated, especially hazardous elements less than the sensitivity limit of the device,

which means the area not exposed to any hazardous discharge contains harmful elements, especially of

industrial activities.

Bacteriological Indicators

The results of the probabilistic count of total coliform group - as evidence of sewage pollution - were less than

the sensitivity limit of the applied method. This means that all monitored sites is not contaminated with sewage

discharge or any discharge that contains a bacterial contamination.


Table 6-3 Water quality analysis results

Parameter Unit PME Limit*

Samples T1-A T1-B T3-A T3-B T4-A T4-B C1-A C1-B C2-A C2-B

pH pH Unit 0.2 8.47 8.4 8.52 8.5 8.5 8.45 8.15 8.3 8.4 8.4 TSS mg/l 5 0.55 0.35 0.3 0.17 0.31 0.23 0.18 0.22 0.8 0.19 Turbidity NTU 2 0.35 0.19 0.2 0.08 0.25 0.11 0.1 0.1 0.45 0.1 Total BOD5 mg/l 10 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 >2 COD mg/l 25 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 Total Chlorin-ated Hydro-carbons

µg/l 0.01 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5 >5

TKN mg/l 3 0.63 0.66 0.7 0.71 0.69 0.71 0.62 0.61 0.63 0.64 O & G mg/l 2 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 >1 Phenols µg/l 0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 >0.05 Ammonia as N mg/l - 0.12 0.09 0.03 0.06 0.11 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.01 0.06 Chlorine mg/l 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.06 0.07 Phosphate as P mg/l - 0.09 0.06 0.06 0.03 0.05 0.04 0.07 0.09 0.03 0.08

Total Cyanide mg/l - <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Aluminium (Al) mg/l 0.2 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 >0.003 Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.05 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 >0.02 Boron (B) mg/l - >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 Barium (Ba) mg/l 0.5 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.005 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 Chromium (Cr) mg/l 0.05 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 Cobalt (Co) mg/l 0.05 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 Copper (Cu) mg/l 0.05 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 Iron (Fe) mg/l 0.5 0.011 0.013 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 >0.01 Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.0004 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 >0.0001 Manganese (Mn) mg/l 0.01 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001 >0.001

Nickel (Ni) mg/l 0.05 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 >0.005 Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.05 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 Zinc (Zn) mg/l 0.8 <0.005 0.011 <0.005 0.011 0.005 >0.005 0.005 0.006 >0.005 >0.005 Total Coliform MPN/100ml - Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative * PME ambient standards for ‘marine’ waters

75 | 278

Marine Ecology 6.4.4

The Red Sea is characterized by its rich and diverse marine life, supported by coral reefs along its coastline.

Other marine habitats include sea grass beds, salt pans, mangroves and salt marshes.

The World Wildlife Fund (WWF) lists the Red Sea as a Global 200 ecoregion. WWF has identified 867

terrestrial, freshwater and marine ecoregions with the main purpose of this classification system to ensure that

the full range of ecosystems will be represented in regional and development strategies.

The Coral Reef Environment

The physical conditions characterising the Red Sea provide an ideal environment for coral growth. The warm

water and absence of fresh water runoff provide suitable conditions for coral reef formation adjacent to the

coastline. About 74 genera and 194 species of scleractinian coral have been identified and of these, 8.5% are

endemic representing the highest diversity in any section of the Indian Ocean.

Coral reefs can be classified into four broad types: fringing reefs; barrier reefs; atolls; and platform reefs

(sometimes referred to as shelf reefs).

The reef at the Project site is a fringing reef meaning it is a reef that lies immediately adjacent and parallel to

land. In the northern Red Sea the coast is fringed by an almost continuous band of coral reef, which physically

protects the shoreline. Further south the shelf becomes much broader and shallower and the fringing reefs

gradually disappear and are replaced with shallow, muddy shorelines.

Fringing coral reefs have a typical pattern of zonation from the shore to the reef edge as shown in Figure 6-4. In

more protected areas the zonation may begin with a sandy beach. However, more typically a rocky shore

separates land from sea. Mangroves may often be associated with this transitional area, however they are

absent from the Project site.

The next zone is referred to the inner reef flat which is a shallow area typically comprised of a mosaic of sand

and rock. This shallow area is visible next to the inner reef flat and is periodically exposed to air during low tide,

but pools in the reef provide areas of permanent water. Where the inner reef flat has been heavily eroded,

lagoons provide larger and deeper areas of permanent water. A large example of such as lagoon is present to

the south of the Project Site.

The outer reef flat is the section of reef flat closest to the sea and therefore can experience considerable wave

action during storms but it is exposed to air less frequently than the inner reef flat. For these reasons the

ecology of this area of the reef can be very different compared to the inner reef flats. The area is dominated by

hard substrate with sporadic coral heads, clams and algal turfs.

The reef crest or reef margin is the next zone. It is upon this area that waves break during storms making it a

challenging environment supporting specialised coral species. Beyond the reef crest is the reef slope or reef

face. The reef slope is permanently submerged and typically supports the greatest diversity of animal life.


Figure 6-4 Typical fringing coral reef zonation pattern (image: public domain)

Figure 6-5 shows the coastal habitats present in the area surrounding the project site. The mapping has been

developed via synthesis and analysis of the baseline survey findings, satellite imagery and bathymetric maps.

Five types of habitat or “reef zones” have been identified. These are lagoon, reef flat, reef crest and reef edge,

reef slope and seagrass.

77 | 278

Figure 6-5 Coastal habitat map


Seagrass

Seagrass can be found on the reef flats or in lagoons. The lagoons provide a sheltered area with soft

sediments and a permanent source of water during low tide. Eleven species of seagrass have been recorded

from the Red Sea (Barratt et al. 1987). Seagrasses are considered to be a valuable habitat for the following key

reasons:

They are primary producers that contribute to the large quantities of fixed carbons, the basis of all food

chains to coastal ecosystems;

They play an important role in stabilising bottom sediment, supply shelter and refuge for both adult and

juvenile animals; are essential food for vulnerable and critically endangered species known to occur in

KSA, such as dugongs (vulnerable), hawksbill turtles (critically endangered) green turtles (critically

endangered), and loggerhead turtles (critically endangered); and

They play a valuable role in the life cycle of a number of commercially important fish species.

Fish and Invertebrates

More than 1,100 species of fish species have been recorded in the Red Sea, of which 10% are endemic to this

ecosystem.

Marine Mammals and Reptiles

In the Red Sea, 10 species of cetaceans have been recorded (Frazier, 1987) and these include dugong and

several other species such as dolphins, whales and porpoises. However, very little information is available on

the biology and ecology of Red Sea cetaceans. Within Saudi Arabian territorial waters, five sites have been

identified as supporting moderate populations of dugong which is the only herbivorous marine mammal. These

are: 1) TiranIsland 2) Wajh bank 3) Sharm al Khaur 4) Al-Lith and 5) Gizan. The largest Cetacean population is

centered on the Wajh Bank area. No marine mammals were seen during the marine baseline survey.

Of the five species of marine turtle that have been recorded in Saudi Arabia waters, two species dominate the

turtle population in the coastal area. These are the Green turtle Chelonia mydas and the Hawksbill turtle

Eretmochelys imbricate. Nesting areas have been mapped by PME & IUCN. Islands scattered off shore along

the whole Red Sea coast provide suitable nesting sites for sea turtles, and only a few similar sites are found on

the mainland.

Hawksbill turtles nest at scattered locations along the beaches, usually around March-April especially in the

region between Cape Baridi and Abu Madd (north of Yanbu). Green turtles nest on Cape Baridi beaches (Vine,

1987). Hawksbill turtles were sighted during the marine baseline survey at two locations.

Baseline Survey Results – Marine Ecology

Figure 6-6 to Figure 6-9 below show a summary of the quantitative data obtained via the photographic Coral

Point Count analysis. The data is presented here in terms of the percentage cover of the major groups present.

The full Coral Point Count summary data is provided in Table 6-4 and Table 6-5 for reference and comparison

with future environmental monitoring studies.

79 | 278

Figure 6-6 shows the overall composition of the reef environment which is an average of the 36 photographs

analysed across the study site. The average hard coral cover across all sites and depths was approximately

40% and ranged from 31% at site T4 to 49% at site T1. Soft coral cover was approximately 3% across all study

sites. Other groups present included macroalgae (0.6%), coraline algae (1.6%), dead coral with algae (1.05%),

other live (0.66%) and dead coral with algae (1.05%).

The non-living component of the reef, including dead coral, sand, rubble, etc. (‘sand, pavement, rubble’) totals

approximately 53%.

The summary results are also presented for each transect surveyed (Figure 6-8) and for each position on the

reef (Figure 6-7). This provides cross sections of the reef perpendicular to the shoreline at 11 locations as well

as a cross section of the reef parallel to the shoreline at the shallow, mid and deep depths. The most notable

aspect is the decrease in hard coral cover and the appearance of soft corals in deeper sections of the reef.

Table 6-4 Percentage substrate cover

% of total substrate cover

Substrate Type All Shallow Mid depth Deep C1 T1 T2 T3 T4 C2

Hard Coral 39.68 52.22 35.17 29.35 40.74 48.84 39.85 36.84 30.72 43.08

Soft Coral 2.63 0.00 0.00 9.95 2.78 0.78 9.02 0.00 0.00 3.08

Macroalgae 0.66 0.00 1.38 0.50 3.70 0.00 0.00 1.05 0.00 0.00

Coralline Algae 1.31 3.33 0.34 0.00 0.00 2.33 1.50 0.00 0.00 3.85

Sand, pavement, rubble 53.22 40.00 61.38 59.20 51.85 48.06 48.12 54.74 65.66 47.69

Other live 0.66 0.74 1.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.16 0.60 0.77

Dead coral with algae 1.05 2.22 0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.50 0.00 3.01 0.77

Unknowns 0.79 1.48 0.00 1.00 0.93 0.00 0.00 4.21 0.00 0.77 Table 6-5 Hard coral types as a percentage of total substrate cover

% of total substrate cover

Hard Coral Types All Shallow Mid depth Deep C1 T1 T2 T3 T4 C2

Massive / Encrusting 19.58 22.22 20.34 14.93 16.67 27.91 13.53 15.79 15.66 27.69

Branching / Pillar 15.24 21.85 12.41 10.45 17.59 12.40 17.29 20.00 13.86 12.31

Leaf / Plate / Sheet 0.13 0.00 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.77

Meandroid / Brain 0.13 0.00 0.00 0.50 0.00 0.00 0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00

Flowering / Fleshy 0.39 0.00 0.69 0.50 0.00 0.78 0.00 0.00 1.20 0.00

Hydrozoan / Fire Corals 4.20 8.15 1.38 2.99 6.48 7.75 8.27 1.05 0.00 2.31


Figure 6-6 Substrate cover at all sites

Figure 6-7 Percentage cover at all sites and at all depths

81 | 278

Figure 6-8 Percentage substrate cover at each survey site

Figure 6-9 Hard coral types as a percentage of total substrate cover at all sites and all depths


The inner reef flat

Typical reef crest environment with algal turf

Seagrass

The reef edge (shallow)

The reef edge (mid depth)

The reef slope (deep)

Figure 6-10 Representative image of marine habitats

83 | 278

Assessment of Impacts 6.5

Sensitive Receptors 6.5.1

The key receptor present has been identified as being the benthic marine ecology – the fringing coral reef and

seagrass. Coral reef and seagrass are sensitive habitats of ecological importance and their protection should

be a priority. Based on an assessment of abundance, state, adaptability and value, the benthic reef habitat

within the study area has been assigned an overall level of sensitivity of Medium-High. A High score was not

assigned only because this is a well-represented habitat within the wider area. However, it should be noted that

coral reefs are under threat at a local and global level from climate change and other human induced

pressures. A summary of the assessment of sensitivity is provided in Table 6-6 below.

Table 6-6 Marine ecological receptor criteria

While a coral reef is comprised of a combination of a large number of or organisms, it is the hard corals that are

the principle “reef building” component around which all the other life flourishes. They are also the group that is

typically most vulnerable to the impacts associated with physical disturbance and water quality. The following

assessment will therefore focus on potential effects upon the reef environment with a particular emphasis upon

hard corals.

Construction Phase Impacts 6.5.2

The construction of the seawater intake and outfall structures will have resulted in impacts upon the coastal

water quality and the associated coral reef habitat. The following impacts will have occurred during the

construction phase:

Abundance State Adaptability Value

Resilient Common / abundant same everywhere

Good and robust - already experienced similar change and

fully embraced

Readily able to adapt and absorb with no

difficulty

Valued but not as unique Low

Moderately resilient

Reasonably common in surrounding area

Experienced similar change and laregly adapted / absorbed

without much difficulty

Able to absorb / adapt with only small

effort

Valued by few individuals in its

present stateLow Medium

Partially Resiliant

Range / abundance restricted to a few

locations in surrounding area

Experiencing some pressure and

responding slowly with some difficulty

May adapt / absorb change but with some difficulty

Valued locally in its present state Medium

Sensitive Rare with some unique elements

Under pressure and showing signs of

stress

Fragile to change will not adapt readily

High valued locally and regionally Medium High

Highly Vulnerable Very rare and unique

Under significant pressure and likely to

fail

Intolerable to further pressure - will

change irreparably

Significant intrinsic and extrinsic value, local, nationally and

internationally

High

Sensitivity of Receptor

Overal Level of Sensitivity

Definition


Direct loss of fringing reef habitat within the footprint of the intake structure (estimated to be 30,000 m2 of

coral reef); and

Direct loss of fringing reef habitat within the footprint of the outfall structure (estimated to be 35,000 m2 of

coral reef).

In addition to the direct impacts, impacts upon the surrounding environment are also expected. These include:

Smothering of adjacent reef habitat due to silt being generated by the construction activities;

Adverse effect on fish communities due to noise and vibration from the marine engineering activities;

Accidental spillage or release of lubricating oils or fuels during marine engineering activities;

Land-water interface impacts relating to the shoreline habitats;

Disposal sites for the deposition of rubble and dredge material;

Disturbance and/or water quality impacts on important marine and coastal species; and

Cumulative impacts associated with the construction of both intake and outfall simultaneously.

The potential construction impacts are considered to be of major negative significance in the absence of

appropriate mitigation measures. Approximately 65,000 m2 of fringing coral reef habitat will be lost within the

footprint of the works with impacts also likely to the surrounding area. Mitigation measures for habitat loss are

considered in Section 6.6.

Operational Phase Impacts 6.5.3

Entrainment and Impingement

The cooling water intake system of the plant has the potential to draw in large quantities of pelagic organisms.

Small juvenile fish, fish eggs and larvae can be drawn into the cooling water system (entrainment) and adult

fish and jellyfish can be trapped and killed by the screens protecting the intake (impingement). The pelagic

species affected are of both commercial and ecological importance including juvenile commercial fish species

as well as coral larvae. The actual severity of this impact is difficult to estimate. However, it is adequate to state

that since the project is located in an ecologically sensitive area, the impact will be adverse and therefore,

where possible, practical steps should be taken minimise it (see mitigation).

Thermal Discharges

Thermal discharges into marine waters have the potential to adversely impact ecological and fisheries

resources of receiving waters. During operation of the facility, the potential impacts of this discharge are

principally related to the ecological effects in a zone of increased temperature within and surrounding the

opening of the outfall canal. Marine organisms inhabiting tropical waters are considered to be potentially

sensitive to impacts from elevated temperatures since they live close to their upper thermal tolerance limits

(FAO 1984).

85 | 278

The thermal discharges have been modelled by Artelia (2014). The modelling assumed the following

parameters for the intake and outfall:

Outfall velocities

Depth average ranging from 0.25–0.35m/s, depending on tidal stage

Intake velocities

1.2 m/s at pipe header

Temperature of effluent at outfall

5°C above temperature of intake (ambient)

Salinity of effluent at outfall

Identical to salinity of ambient seawater at intake (i.e. negligible brine content)

15-day averaged temperature plots were presented for both pre and post development for the Surface and

Intake (-14 m) layer. The results of this preliminary modelling are presented in full within Appendix J. Figure

6-11 below shows the temperature difference at the surface and as a longitudinal cross section due to the

operation of the outfall. Discharges of warmer water tend to be buoyant spread out at the surface at illustrated

in the longitudinal plot where the plume is largely restricted to depths less than 5 m.

The PME mixing zone can be classified as a T of 4°C outside of a 60m area for zones classified and

Industrial. As this area is zoned for power generation it could be argued that the industrial classification applies.

However, given the area is currently Greenfield it could also be argued that the ‘marine’ classification applies in

which case the mixing zone would be a T of 3°C outside of a 60m area. The modelling currently

demonstrates that the plume achieves the industrial mixing zone criteria (as shown in Figure 6-11) but would

not achieve the marine criteria.

The discharge of cooling water in this location will have impacts upon the existing coral reef. The potential

impacts on the marine biota may be more pronounced in the benthic environment than the water column. This

is due to the ability of the fish, reptiles and mammals that inhabit the water column (pelagic organisms) to avoid

or escape from areas of unfavourable water quality while most of the benthic organisms (e.g., seagrass, clams,

coral, etc.) have limited or no ability to avoid such conditions. The key project “impact zone” is therefore the

shallow reef flat and the area of shelving seafloor at the edge of the reef.

Most organisms can adapt to minor deviations from optimal temperature (or other water quality factors), and

might even tolerate extreme situations temporarily, but not a continuous exposure to unfavourable conditions.


Figure 6-11 Temperature difference at the surface (left) and a longitudinal cross section (right)

The constant discharge of cooling water with higher relative temperature levels can cause a lasting change in

species composition and abundance at the discharge site (Lattemann and Hopner, 2008).

Corals are widely documented as sensitive to seawater temperature changes. Prolonged exposure to seawater

temperatures of only 1 to 3°C higher than mean averages at the warmest time of year has been linked to

bleaching events (Hoegh-Guldberg,1999). Coral bleaching results from the loss of symbiotic algae, known as

zooxanthellae, from coral tissues during times of stress. The biology of reef-building corals breaks down when

summer temperatures exceed the corals’ physiological thresholds for an extended period of time (weeks to

months).

Sea temperature increases of 1-2ºC above the long term average maximum are all that are required to trigger

mass bleaching (P.A. & Schuttenberg, 2006) and maximum summer sea temperatures that are 2-3 ºC above

normal values can kill corals.

Taking a conservative approach we can therefore consider the limit of the 1-2°C contour as the area within

which the coral reefs will be affected (i.e. reduced growth rates, decreased reproductive capacity, and

increased susceptibility to diseases) and the limit of the >2°C contour where coral mortality will be likely to

occur.

PME ‘Industrial’ Mixing Zone Area (60m)

87 | 278

Figure 6-12 shows the temperature contours from the model overlaid onto the marine habitat map. This has

been used to extrapolate the approximate areas of habitat that will be affected by the operation of the outfall.

The total area of affected habitat is estimated to be approximately 124,000 m2 (an area of approximately 25

football fields). The habitat will be adversely affected in 100,000 m2 with coral mortality expected to occur in

the remaining 24,000 m2.

Figure 6-12 Surface temperature contours overlaid onto the marine habitat map

Table 6-7 Approximate surface area (in m2) of affected habitats

Thermal impact zone (Degrees C)

Metres Squared (m2) Total plume surface area Reef flat* Reef crest

and reef edge Reef slope Seagrass Total

Habitat >4 3,597 0 2,678 919 0 3,597

3 to 4 5,792 0 1,177 4,615 0 5,792

2 to 3 15,449 5,319 1,179 8,951 0 15,449

1 to 2 111,537 45,850 3,873 38,127 11,203 99,053

Total 136,375 51,169 8,907 52,612 11,203 123,891 * Excluding area already impacted by construction of the outfall


Given the pristine nature of the existing coral reef in this area and the international value of this type of habitat

the sensitivity of this receptor is considered to be high. The impact severity is considered to be medium due to it

being localised but long-term. The significance of the impact upon the marine habitat in this area is therefore

considered to be major adverse prior to the application of any mitigation.

Other Water Quality Impacts

Chlorine will be used to treat the incoming seawater in order to minimise the negative effects of bio-fouling

within the facility. Chlorine is a broad effect anti-fouling agent and will exhibit broad effects on the environment

depending on its concentration.

The residual chlorine will need to be discharged at less than 0.2 mg/L. Assuming that this limit value is

achievable, the impact will be of negligible significance. It is assumed that all other parameters of the discharge

will meet with the PME discharge standards.

Other water quality impacts may occur as a result of wastewater and storm-water treatment and disposal.

Collection and reuse of storm-water and treated wastewater should be maximised. Sea disposal of any

effluents must only occur if they meet with the PME standards for disposal to the marine environment prior to

dilution with cooling water. Provided this requirement is satisfied, the impact is predicted to be of negligible

significance.

Impacts upon the Existing Fish Farm

Based on the results of the preliminary modelling study, the discharged cooling water from the facility is

generally expected to move in a southerly direction due to the prevailing currents in the area. The fish farm

cages are located over 3 km north of the northern extent of the thermal plume. The impact upon the fish farm is

therefore expected to be negligible and does not warrant further consideration or mitigation.

Mitigation Measures, Residual/Cumulative Effects 6.6

Construction Phase Mitigation Measures 6.6.1

The detailed design must consider opportunities to minimise the footprint of the intake and outfall structures to

avoid direct loss of habitat.

Measures for mitigating, managing and monitoring construction phase impacts are outlined in the framework

CEMP.

Regular marine monitoring should take place during the construction phase to assess the effectiveness of the

environmental management being implemented. This should include water quality monitoring, sedimentation

monitoring and an assessment of the ‘health’ of the coral reef in proximity to the construction areas and at

suitable control sites.

89 | 278

Construction Phase Residual Effects 6.6.2

The main impacts associated with the construction phase will be direct loss of coral reef habitat within the

footprint of the works and damage to surrounding reef due to water quality impacts. While the latter can be

minimised through effective management, impacts upon this sensitive habitat will be unavoidable. The residual

impact will be related to the effectiveness of the habitat loss compensation strategy (see below for further

details).

Construction Phase Cumulative Effects 6.6.3

Given the remoteness of the area and absence of other construction projects there are not expected to be

significant cumulative impacts associated with the project.

Operational Phase Mitigation Measures 6.6.4

Entrainment and Impingement

Typical measures to reduce entrainment and impingement include locating the intake in an ecologically

insensitive area, away from the littoral zone and in deeper waters. The intake for the plant is proposed to be

located at a depth of -14 metres and 300 metres away from the shoreline which will reduce the impact. Other

design measures should also be considered, such as lowering the intake velocity and the use of other low

impact intake technologies.

Thermal Discharges

The options for reducing the impact of cooling water upon the marine environment are limited. However, the

final design of the plant should be able to demonstrate that all possible measures for reducing the extent of the

area of coral habitat affected by the discharge have been considered.

Habitat Loss

The are of damaged or lost habitat associated with the construction and operation of the project is predicted to

be close to 20 hectares.

Based upon the final intake and outfall design, construction footprints and modelling results the area of affected

habitats should be fully quantified and a Habitat Compensation Strategy must be developed and implemented

by the contractor. This strategy should effectively compensate for the habitat that is lost or damaged as a

consequence of the construction and operation of the facility. The main measures available for such schemes

typically involve the acquisition of land or marine areas as reserves and/or habitat construction. These schemes

must always involve adequate management, monitoring and reporting to ensure and demonstrate their long-

term effectiveness.

Operational Environmental Management

It is recommended that an OEMP is developed by the operating company, which will include mitigation

measures to reduce the significance of impacts upon the marine environment. The key mitigation measures

during operations to prevent acute or chronic impacts on the marine environment are as follows:


Provision of on-line process monitoring for the cooling water system and associated auxiliary processes,

particularly those requiring application of chlorine or chemical additives;

Chemical monitoring of individual effluent lines prior to mixing with the cooling water and a continuous

flow/quality monitor on the final effluent channel;

The provision of balancing/evaporation ponds to receive storm water drainage or flows associated with

abnormal or emergency conditions;

Prevent planned or accidental discharge of chlorinated product water with effluent due to potential impact

on the benthic communities (i.e. coral reef) – discharge to an evaporation pond if not required;

Chemical stores to be within an enclosed structure on hard standing and with an impermeable bund

equivalent to 110% of the largest tank;

All oil storage tanks to have an impermeable bund capable of holding 110% of the largest tank;

Slow, phased, start-up of facility and discharge of effluent to facilitate a gradual acclimation of local biota

(i.e. minimise ‘shock effect’); and

Ensure that site staff are aware of the environmental management system and that there is an

Environmental Co-ordinator for the site to record training, incidents etc.

Continuous Ecological Monitoring

The key impact during the operational phase will be the potential for degradation or loss of the fringing coral

reef habitat that exists within the zone of impact of the outfall. In order to establish the actual impacts, an

operational marine ecology monitoring programme shall be implemented. If any impacts are identified these

shall be quantified in terms of their scale and severity and this information will be used to determine the

requirements for additional mitigation or compensation measures.

Operational Phase Residual Effects 6.6.5

The residual impact significance associated with entrainment and impingement are dependent on the final

design of the plant and the design measures taken to mitigate for this issue.

The residual thermal impact of the project is considered to be of minor negative significance. This is assuming

that the necessary Habitat Compensation Strategy is design and implemented.

The residual impacts associated with the residual chlorine discharges are considered to be on negligible

significance.

Operational Phase Cumulative Effects 6.6.6

Given the remote nature of the site and absence of additional facilities in the area there are not expected to be

significant cumulative impacts associated with the operation of the facility.

91 | 278

Summary and Conclusions 6.7

This section has presented an overview of the baseline environmental conditions at the site in regards to the

hydrology, water quality and marine ecology.

Six transects were surveyed including 2 control sites and 4 impact zone sites. The survey has been designed in

order to document the “baseline” condition of the marine habitat present and to provide a benchmark against

which future monitoring studies can be compared.

The results of the water quality testing indicate that the water quality at the site is of a high quality with no

indicators of industrial or municipal pollution present.

At all the survey sites a high percentage of live hard coral cover (average of 40%) was present in the reef

margin and the upper outer reef slope. Seagrass was also present along two of the transects. The presence of

fish, invertebrates and other marine life was also documented during the marine baseline survey.



reef complexes with high zoogeographic significance .

Top down photographs and subsequent analysis using Coral Point Count software were incorporated into the

survey design in order to provide a robust and quantitative means of establishing any negative changes to the

reef environment as a consequence of the construction or operation of the facility.

The construction phase will directly impact upon 65,000 m2 of fringing reef habitat. Secondary effects

associated with water quality impacts (suspended sediments) are also expected on the surrounding reef.

The main operational impact identified is associated with the discharge of heated cooling water from the facility

during normal plant operation. The marine modelling results have been used to determine the extent of the

area of reef likely to be affected. Taking a conservative approach we have identified the 1-2°C contour as the

area within which the coral reefs will be adversely affected and the >2°C contour where mortality will occur.

The 1-2°C contour affects an area of approximately 100,000 m2. Within this area we can expect to see the

corals displaying signs of physical stress, such as reduced growth rates and fecundity as a result of the

increased temperature and process chemicals. The >2°C contour impinges upon approximately 24,000 m2 of

marine habitat. Within this area coral mortality will be likely to occur.

Various mitigation and management measures have been recommended. However, the construction and

operation of a power plant in this location will inevitably have impacts upon the adjacent sensitive coral reef

habitat. It is recommended that a detailed study is undertaken to fully quantify the ecological and biodiversity

impacts of the project when suitable design information is available and identify a practical compensation

strategy for habitat losses.


Table 6-8 Impact and mitigation summary table for Marine Environment

Impact Overview Receptor Sensitivity

Impact Significance Key Mitigation Residual

impact

Construction Phase

Loss of habitat within the construction footprint High sensitivity Major Adverse

Consideration given to minimizing the footprint area of marine structures (intake and outfall) when preparing the final design for the plant; and

Habitat loss compensation strategy to be developed.

Moderate Adverse

Indirect impacts associated with water quality (sedimentation) High sensitivity Major Adverse

Application of stringent environment management measures during construction (refer to the Framework CEMP); and

Regular marine monitoring.

Moderate Adverse

Operational Phase

Entrainment and impingement at the intake

Moderate to high sensitivity

Moderate adverse

Incorporation of design measures to minimize Entrainment and impingement at the intake Minor Adverse

Cooling water discharge (thermal impacts) High sensitivty Major Adverse

Final design to be optimized with regards to minimizing the plume extent and interaction with sensitive marine habitats (i.e. the fringing reef);

Habitat loss compensation strategy to be developed.

Moderate Adverse

Other water quality impacts High sensitivty Negligible Adherence to PME standards and regular monitoring of cooling

water and other wastewater streams (as specified in the Framework OEMP).

Negligible

Impacts upon existing fish farm High sensitivity Negligible Preliminary marine modelling results demonstrate that there will

not be impacts upon the fish farm as a consequence of the operation of the plant.

Negligible

93 | 278

7 Air Quality

Introduction 7.1WSP carried out an assessment of the potential air quality impacts arising from the construction and operation

of the Project. The impact of the emissions from the turbines has been considered under a both typical

operating conditions and worst case conditions.

The Project site is located in the Tabouk Province, approximately 55 km to the north of the City Duba, on the

Red Sea coast in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The Project will be based F-Class and/or E-Class gas turbine

(GT) technology with a total plant net output of 485-550 MWe at reference site conditions (RSC). The plant will

be designed for operation on natural gas and condensate gas fuel as the primary fuel and Arabian Super Light

(ASL) fuel oil as back-up fuel. The Project will comprise two power blocks, which will either be a combination of

one F-Class GT and two E-Class GTs (Option A) or two sets of two E-Class GTs (Option A).

The GTs will operate initially in the simple cycle mode until construction of the combined cycle portion is

completed. Once the combined cycle component of the power plant is operational, the GTs will remain capable

of operating in simple cycle mode in the event there are problems in the combined cycle component.

Sulphur dioxide (SO2), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and fine particle (PM10) emissions from the proposed power

plant (operating at two sets of ambient conditions representative of summer or typical and winter or worse case)

have been assessed using dispersion modelling. The modelling of the power plant has been undertaken

assuming the plant operating in both Simple and Combined Cycle modes.

The following key issues are considered in this chapter:

Ambient air quality conditions at the existing the site and at sensitive receptor locations;

Emission characteristics and concentrations for key pollutants from the proposed turbines;

Dispersion modelling of the estimated emissions to establish the contribution from the Project. The data

used in the dispersion modelling (e.g. exhaust flows conditions and pollutant emission rates) have been

based emissions data held by WSP for F-Class and E-Class operating at other SEC sites and data sheets

available from the manufacturers of the these classes of turbine; and

Consideration of the discharge configurations for the proposed turbines, including number and class of GT,

stack heights and internal diameter to ensure optimal efflux velocities and adequate dispersion of exhaust

emissions.


Relevant Air Quality Emission Standards 7.2

International Standards 7.2.1

International guidelines for air emissions and ambient air quality are provided by the International Finance

Corporation (IFC) of the World Bank Group (WB) for use in environmental assessments (IFC, 2007). However,

it is stipulated in the IFC document that these guidelines are only for use in the absence of local (national)

ambient air quality standards; therefore, they have been included in their entirety, but have only been used

where national standards do not exist. The IFC ambient air quality guidelines for SO2, nitrogen dioxide (NO2)

and PM10 are shown in Table 7-1. Guidelines have also been developed by the IFC for thermal power plants

(IFC, 2008). The IFC guidelines include emissions limits for NOx, SO2, and PM10, which are shown in Table

7-2.

National Standards 7.2.2National air quality standards for Saudi Arabia are provided by PME in the General Environmental Regulations

(GER, 2006 and 2012) and emissions limits have also been produced. The superseded PME emissions

standards were based in mass of pollutant discharged per thermal input to the plant, rather than the emissions

concentration format of the 2012 emission limits and the IFC guidelines. The PME air quality standards (AQSs)

and emission limits for the pollutants considered are also shown in Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.

Table 7-1 Air Quality Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10

Pollutant Averaging period PME (µg/m3) IFC EHS Guidelines (µg/m3) NO2 1-hour

Annual 660(a) 100

200 40

SO2 10-min 1-hour

24-hour

Annual

--(b) 730(c) 365(d)

80

500 --

125 (interim target 1) 50 (interim target 2)

20 --

Inhalable suspended particles (PME) or PM10 (IFC)

24-hour

Annual

340(e)

80

150 (interim target 1) 100 (interim target 2) 75 (interim target 3

50 70 (interim target 1) 50 (interim target 2) 30 (interim target 3)

20 (a) Not to be exceeded more than twice per month (30 day period). (b) No 10-min standard has been set by PME. (c) Not to be exceeded more than twice during any 12 month period. (d) Not to be exceeded more than once during any 12 month period. (e) Not to be exceeded more than 24 times (equivalent to the 90th percentile) during any 12 month period.

95 | 278

Table 7-2 Emission Standards for SO2, NO2 and PM10

Pollutant PME (2014) IFC EHS Guidelines (Combustion Turbines >50MWth)

Non-degraded Air shed/Degraded Air shed

NOx 500 mg/Nm3(a)(b) (NDA)

350 mg/Nm3 (NDA) 74 ppm (152 mg/Nm3)(b) - Fuels other than Natural Gas

SO2 600 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

400 mg/Nm3 (DA)

Use of 1% Sulphur content or less in fuel (NDA)

Use of 0.5% Sulphur content or less in fuel (DA)

PM10 150 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

100 mg/Nm3 (DA)

50 mg/Nm3 (NDA)

30 mg/Nm3 (DA)

(a) It is assumed that mg/Nm3 is the correct unit, as stated in Article II(1)(b) of the KSA National Environmental Standards – Con-trol of Emissions to Air from Stationary Sources (PME 2014)

(b) Nm3 – Normalised cubic metre, reference conditions 273K, 101.3 kPa, dry gas, 15% oxygen.

Turbine exhaust characteristics and pollutant emissions data for the proposed E-Class turbines have been

based on data obtained from Siemens for SGT6 2000E turbines for simple cycle and combined cycle operation

using gas and ASL as fuel and data obtained from Siemens data sheets. Emissions data for the 7F.04 (F-

Class) turbine have been based on data obtained from GE and GE data sheets. The ASL that will be utilised as

back-up fuel for the proposed turbines is assumed to have a sulphur content of up to 0.1% and the SO2 emis-

sions rates have calculated on this basis and estimated fuel usage rates for SGT6 2000E and turbines.

The concentrations of NOx, SO2 and PM10 in the emissions from the proposed turbine are shown in Table 7-3

for comparison with the emission limits presented in Table 7-2. The concentrations have been based on ex-

haust flow data obtained from Siemens and GE for the units referred to above. The emission rates for the GTs

have been based on emissions limits contained in Siemens data sheets and emissions data for Riyadh PP-11

(GE turbines). Two sets of data are shown corresponding to different ambient conditions. The emissions

shown are for the turbine at 100% load at 40ºC (ambient temperature) are typical summer conditions and are

representative of operating conditions for the majority year. The emissions shown for 0 to 10ºC are for the win-

ter period and represent worst case operating conditions.

Table 7-3 SO2, NOx and PM10 Emissions Concentrations for the Proposed Turbine at DCCPP

Pollutant

Concentration (mg/Nm3)(a)

Natural Gas ASL

Ambient tempera-ture: 40ºC

Ambient tempera-ture: 0 - 10ºC

Ambient tempera-ture: 40ºC

Ambient tempera-ture: 0 - 10ºC

SO2 -- -- 48.4/74.7 44.2/77.3

NOx 21.3/51.4 21.3/51.4 86.3/214.9 75.0/215.9

PM10 3.5/10 4.6/10 50/50 54.2/50

(a) The two values are presented for each pollutant show the emission rate for F-Class GT first and the E-Class GT second (F-Class/E-Class).


A comparison of the emissions limits and the calculated emission concentrations for the proposed turbines

show that emissions of NOx, SO2 and PM10 comply with PME emission standards for both the primary fuel and

back-up fuel, under both sets of ambient conditions.

The IFC emission guidelines that would apply to the proposed turbine operating on ASL are as follows:

Nitrogen Oxides (NOx): 152 mg/Nm3 (Degraded/Non-degraded Air shed)

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2): use of 1.0% S content or less in fuel (Non-degraded Air shed)

Total Particulate Matter: 50 mg/Nm3 (Non-degraded Air shed)

The emissions data used indicate that NOx emissions may exceed the IFC emission guideline of 152 mg/Nm3

for ASL firing; however, the NOx concentration for the E-Class GT when firing on ASL has been estimated from

the Natural gas/ASL NOx emission ratio for the F-Class GT. With respect to SO2 emissions, the sulphur content

of the ASL will be generally 0.1%, which complies with the IFC specifications. For Total Particulate Matter (as-

suming this is all PM10), emissions for the F-Class GT for 0- 10ºC ambient conditions may slightly exceed the

IFC emission limit based on emission data used. Review of compliance with PME emissions standards and IFC

emission guidelines will be required when the make and model of combustion units has been finalised and unit

specific data can be obtained from the EPC.

Projects Located in Degraded Air Sheds 7.2.3Where facilities or projects are located within an air shed of poor quality, the IFC General EHS Guidelines for air

emissions and ambient air quality require an operator to minimise incremental impacts by achieving the emis-

sions limits shown in Table 7-2 and where these emissions nevertheless result in excessive ambient impacts

relative to local regulatory standards, the project should identify and implement site-specific offsets that result in

no net increase in the total emissions of those pollutants that are responsible for the degradation of the air shed.

The IFC General EHS Guidelines (IFC, 2007) state that an air shed should be considered as having poor air

quality if nationally legislated AQSs (in this case PME standards) or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded

significantly; however, no criteria are included to determine a significant exceedence. The dispersion modelling

for this assessment has considered the baseline air quality and the influence of the existing emissions sources

at the site on the air shed.

The Project site of is essentially a Greenfield site, with no existing significant sources of combustion emissions.

It is likely that the air quality in the area of the site and surrounding areas is good and the potential for ex-

ceedences of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) ambient air quality standards (AQSs) for SO2, NO2 to occur is

negligible. For PM10, exceedences of the AQSs are likely to occur on occasion due to the arid nature of the ar-

ea and wind entrainment of fine particles and dust from natural sources. As such, the air shed is not considered

as degraded for any of the pollutants considered in this assessment.

97 | 278

Methodology 7.3 Scope 7.3.1

The scope of this assessment has included the following:

Review of the limited emissions data for F-Class and E-Class GTs;

Review of fuel specifications for the natural gas and ASL;

Review of the exhaust flow data and operating characteristics obtained from Siemens for SGT6 2000E and

GE 7F.04 turbine and used in previous modelling studies undertaken by WSP for the same turbine models

using natural gas and ASL;

Review of data, information and site plans and preliminary design supplied by SEC;

A desk study to confirm the locations that may be sensitive to changes in local air quality; and

Review of relevant international and national air quality regulations, standards and guidelines for emissions

to air from thermal plants and ambient air quality.

Prediction of Construction Phase Impacts 7.3.2During the construction phase, activities undertaken within the site may cause dust and particulate matter to be

emitted to the atmosphere.

Dust comprises particles typically in the size range 1-75 micrometres (µm) in aerodynamic diameter and is cre-

ated through the action of crushing and abrasive forces on materials. The larger dust particles fall out of the

atmosphere quickly after initial release and therefore tend to be deposited in close proximity (10 to 20 metres)

to the source of emission. Dust therefore, is unlikely to cause long-term or widespread changes to local air

quality. The site is in an area where there is a significant natural source of particulate material that will be readi-

ly entrained by the wind, therefore, the potential dust impacts during the construction period must be considered

within this context.

The smaller particles of dust (typically less than 10 µm in aerodynamic diameter) are known as PM10 and PM2.5

(referred to as fine particles) and represent only a small proportion of total dust released. As these particles are

at the smaller end of the size range of dust particles, they remain suspended in the atmosphere for a longer

period of time than the larger dust particles, and can therefore be transported by wind over a wider area (alt-

hough the majority are generally deposited within 100m of the source). PM10 and PM2.5 are small enough to be

drawn into the lungs during breathing, which for sensitive members of the public could cause an adverse reac-

tion. As a result of this potential impact on health, standards and objectives for PM10 and PM2.5 are defined by

PME.

A qualitative assessment of the potential impacts due to the generation and dispersion of dust and fine particles

during the construction phase has been undertaken. As there are no formal assessment criteria for dust and

fine particle generation and dispersion during construction, the significance of impacts associated with this

phase of the project has been determined qualitatively by:


Identifying the construction activities associated with the project which could generate dust and PM10/PM2.5

and their likely duration;

Identifying sensitive receptors close to the site, particularly those within 200m of the construction site bound-

ary; and

The prevailing wind direction.

Exhaust emissions from construction vehicles will have an impact on local air quality both on-site and adjacent

to the routes used by these vehicles to access the site. Information on exact numbers of vehicles associated

with the construction phase is not available; however, it is considered that vehicle movements associated with

the construction phase are not likely to be significant. Therefore, a qualitative assessment of their impact on

local air quality has also been undertaken.

Prediction of Operational Phase Impacts 7.3.3Dispersion Model Used

The operational phase of proposed turbine has been assessed using detailed dispersion modelling. The atmos-

pheric dispersion model Breeze Aermod (version 7.8.0.21) was used for quantifying the impact of emissions

from the plant at sensitive receptors in the area. Aermod is an advanced dispersion model for calculating con-

centrations of pollutants emitted continuously from point, volume and area sources and is approved by the Unit-

ed States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) and the Environment Agency (EA) in the UK for regulato-

ry applications. This dispersion model is also specified as appropriate for assessments of this nature in the IFC

General EHS guidelines2.

The model includes algorithms which are also able to take into account the following (where suitable input data

is available):

Effects of building downwash;

Complex terrain;

Time varying emission rates;

Chemical reactions;

Plume rise as a function of distance; and

Averaging times ranging from short-term (e.g. 10-minute or 1-hour) to annual.

Buildings and Topography

Both nearby buildings and complex topography can have a significant effect on the dispersion characteristics of

the plumes from the stacks being assessed. Buildings can cause the plume to come to ground much closer to

the stack than otherwise expected, causing higher pollutant concentrations. Plumes can also impact on

hillsides under certain weather conditions, or within a basin or hollow which may result in emissions being

trapped for low level emissions.

2 General EHS Guidelines: Environmental, Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality, IFC (April 2007)

99 | 278

Buildings that are likely to be constructed as part of the power plant (e.g. new turbine hall and steam turbine

building), which may have an impact on the dispersion of emissions from the stacks of the proposed plant have

been identified and included in the model. The dimensions of these buildings have been estimated based on

the drawing included in the tender information supplied by SEC.

The topography of the surrounding area is essentially flat and at the same elevation across the entire study ar-

ea. Therefore, digital terrain data has not been included in the model.

Meteorological Data

Meteorological records of wind speed, direction and atmospheric stability parameters are required to predict the

pollutant concentrations which could occur under different weather conditions.

With respect to the dispersion of pollutants, the atmosphere is commonly referred to in terms of its ‘stability’.

When the atmosphere is said to be ‘stable’, there is little turbulence and vertical movement of air. These condi-

tions are almost exclusively confined to the hours between sunset and sunrise, and require light winds. Such

conditions in conjunction with wind speeds of less than 1 m/s often give rise to the highest pollutant concentra-

tions from a stack release.

‘Unstable’ atmospheric conditions are confined to the daytime when, primarily due to surface heating, there is

considerable turbulence and rapid vertical movement, thus dissipating the pollutant fairly rapidly. Hence pollu-

tant concentrations will decrease rapidly away from the source. Unstable conditions also favour light winds and

strong to moderate levels of sunshine.

‘Neutral’ stability occurs under cloudier weather conditions and is biased towards higher wind speeds. A neutral

atmosphere can persist during the day or night.

Five years (2009-2013) of sequential hourly readings of wind speed, direction and atmospheric boundary layer

conditions from the observing station at Sharm El Sheikh Airport were used in the model. This observing station

is located approximately 100km to the west northwest of the power plant site. This is the closest observing sta-

tion to the power plant site and is also in a coastal location; therefore, this observing station was considered to

be representative of meteorological conditions at the site, as far as practicable.

Review of the available data (up to 2013) indicated that the meteorological data sets for the above years were

most complete, i.e. had the fewest missing observations. Wind roses for each of the five years are shown in

Appendix D, which identifies that the predominant wind direction is from north, with winds from the north north-

east also occurring relatively frequently. Winds from all other directions occur with a very low frequency.

Concentrations of each pollutant have been predicted over the relevant averaging period of the standard (i.e. 1-

hour, 24-hour and annual mean) within the context of the individual operating conditions.

Modelling Scenarios

Scenarios have been modelled for the Project take into account the new combustion turbines operating primari-

ly in Combined Cycle operation, but Simple Cycle operation has also been considered. The tender information

issued by SEC presents two options for the number and size of the turbines on which the power plant should be


based to achieve the required power output of 485 – 550 MW. Both of the options are based on a two power

block configuration and are as follows:

Option A

Block 1: 1 x F-Class Turbine, 1 x Heat Recovery Steam Generator (HRSG) and 1 x Steam Turbine (ST)

Block 2: 2 x E-Class Turbines, 2 x HRSG and 1 x ST

Option B:



Scenarios were modelled for both potential plant configurations to provide a comparison of the impact of the two

options on local air quality. Within each of the scenarios, consideration of the turbines operating at two different

ambient temperatures has been made, reflecting the variation in emissions at different ambient conditions for

the same turbine load (this reflects operations at different times during the year). Emissions for an ambient

temperature of 40ºC (summer conditions – Operating Point 1) and a temperature of 0 to 10ºC (winter conditions

– Operating Point 2). The Operating Point 1 conditions would be indicative of the majority of the year, whereas

the Operating Point 2 conditions can be considered worse case. The twelve scenarios that have been consid-

ered in this assessment are described in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 Description of Operational Scenarios

Scenario Description Operating Condition Details

1A1

Option A: Maximum operating

conditions (OP1) – Combined

Cycle

1 x gas-fired F-Class GT, 2 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature of 40ºC (Operating Point 1)

Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks

Assumed to be operating at maximum load continuously for a full year

1A2



Cycle

1 x gas-fired F-Class GT, 2 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature of 0 to 10ºC (Operating Point 2) (Jan to Mar, Nov & Dec only)

Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks

Assumed to be operating at maximum load continuously for winter period

1B1

Option B: Maximum operating


Cycle

4 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature of 40ºC (Operating Point 1)

Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks


1B2 Option B: Maximum operating


4 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature of 0 to 10ºC (Operating Point 2) (Jan to Mar, Nov & Dec on-ly)

101 | 278


Cycle Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks


2A1


conditions (OP1) – Simple Cycle

1 x gas-fired F-Class GT, 2 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature of 40ºC (Operating Point 1)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks


2A2



1 x gas-fired F-Class GT, 2 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature of 0 to 10ºC (Operating Point 2) (Jan to Mar, Nov & Dec only)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks


2B1



4 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature of 40ºC (Operating Point 1)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks


2B2



4 x gas-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature of 0 to 10ºC (Operating Point 2) (Jan to Mar, Nov & Dec on-ly)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks


3ACC



Cycle (ASL)

1 x ASL-fired F-Class GT, 2 x ASL-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature for 45ºC (Operating Point 1)

Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks


ASL assumed to have 0.1% sulphur content

3ASC



(ASL)

1 x ASL-fired F-Class GT, 2 x ASL-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient temperature for 45ºC (Operating Point 1)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks





3BCC



Cycle (ASL)

4 x ASL-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature for 45ºC (Operating Point 1)

Combined Cycle mode

60m Main stacks



3BSC



(ASL)

4 x ASL-fired E-Class GTs operating at 100% load at ambient tem-perature for 45ºC (Operating Point 1)

Simple Cycle mode

40m By-pass stacks



Modelling Assumptions

The make and supply of the major plant (e.g. GT/HRSGs and STs) has not yet been finalised and therefore

emissions from the turbines have been based on exhaust composition and flow data held by WSP and supplied

by Siemens and GE for previous studies involving F-Class and E-Class turbines. Pollutant emission and ex-

haust flow data for the F-Class turbine were based on data supplied by GE for Riyadh PP-11 and obtained from

data sheets available on the GE website. Exhaust flow data for the E-Class turbines were based on data sup-

plied by Siemens for DCCPP and obtained from data sheets available on the Siemens website.

The summer operating conditions were modelled for a full year of meteorological data as these conditions are

more representative of the majority of the year. The winter operating or worse case conditions were modelled

for the months of January to March, November and December because it is during these months that ambient

temperatures can drop to between 10 and 0ºC. All combustion units (GTs) were assumed to be operating 24

hours per day, seven days a week, at the maximum operating conditions in either combined cycle mode or sim-

ple cycle mode. These maximum load conditions are only likely to occur during the months of July and August

(1400 to 1640 hours per year) each year when demand on the plant would be greatest; however, the scenario

was assessed using a full year of meteorological data to allow the worse-case conditions to be identified and

when they would occur.

Emission temperatures for Combined Cycle operation for the two sets of ambient conditions were estimated

from data held by WSP for similar sized combined cycle units operating under the same ambient temperatures.

The sulphur content of the ASL has been assumed to be 0.1% based on the fuel specification issued by SEC 3.

SO2 emission rates for ASL-fired operation have been based on fuel consumption rates for the turbines. The

natural gas fuel specification supplied by SEC stated that there was no hydrogen sulphide (H2S) in the natural

gas, therefore SO2 emissions for gas-fired operation have been assumed to be negligible and not modelled.

3 Construction of Duba No.1 Combined Cycle Power Plant Project, Schedule B, Attachment III, Detailed Scope of Works; SEC

103 | 278

No minimum design stack height for the main stacks was specified in the SEC Scope of works3; therefore, a

main stack height of 60m and a bypass stack height of 40m were assumed.

Stack Parameters

The atmospheric dispersion of pollutants is affected by the efflux velocity at the stack exit point (which deter-

mines the momentum of the plume) and the temperature of the gases (which determines the thermal buoyancy

of the plume). Both momentum and buoyancy contribute to plume rise. The atmospheric conditions then gov-

ern the degree of turbulent mixing of the plume.

Engineering data (stack heights and diameters etc.), exhaust flow data, pollutant concentrations and mass

emissions rates for the proposed emission sources were based on data obtained from Siemens and GE for oth-

er SEC sites and also obtained from data sheets for Siemens and GE units. The internal stack diameter for the

proposed F-Class turbine modelled was assumed to be 5.8m for the by-bass stack (Simple Cycle) and 5.5m for

the main stack (Combined Cycle). The internal stack diameter of the E-Class turbines for the by-pass stack

was assumed to be 4.5m and 4m for the main stack. The model input parameters used for this study are sum-

marised in Appendix E. The E-Class turbines were assumed to have a NOx emission concentration of 25ppm

based on GE data sheets. The F-Class turbine was assumed to have a NOx emission concentration of 10ppm

based on data supplied by Siemens for Riyadh PP-11 Power Plant.

Modelling Domain

Pollutant concentrations have been predicted over the wider area using a regular Cartesian grid of receptor lo-

cations. The grid covers an area of 9km by 7.5km, extending out to a distance of approximately 3.5km north of

the Project site, 4km to the south, 6.5km to the east and 3.5km to the west of the site. A grid spacing of 300m

was selected for the modelling grid, which gave 806 (gridded) receptor locations in the model. In addition, 5

boundary receptors and 4161 discrete receptor points were also included in the model to ensure adequate reso-

lution of the maximum predicted concentrations in the areas of greatest impact and over areas of sensitive de-

velopment. A further 11 discrete receptors were also selected to specifically represent existing receptor loca-

tions identified as potentially sensitive to changes in air quality. The extent of the (gridded) modelling domain is

shown in Figure 7-1. It should also be noted that discrete receptor locations outside the gridded domain were

included to represent the small towns located 10 – 15km to the north (Alsourah) and south (Almuwaylih) of the

Project site.


Figure 7-1 Modelling Domain

NOx to NO2 Conversion

NOx emitted to the atmosphere as a result of combustion will consist largely of nitric oxide (NO), a relatively in-

nocuous substance. Once released into the atmosphere, nitric oxide is oxidised to NO2, which is of concern

with respect to health and other impacts. The proportion of nitric oxide converted to NO2 depends on a number

of factors including wind speed, distance from the source, solar irradiation and the availability of oxidants, such

as ozone (O3).

A study published by Janssen et al (1988) made extensive measurements of the percentage oxidation of NOx to

NO2 in power station plumes, and derived empirical relationships based on downwind distance, ozone concen-

tration, wind speed and season of the year. The findings indicated that the occurrence of NOx in the form of

NO2 within 2km of a stack will vary between 20% and 50%. An assumption that there will be 100% conversion

of NOx to NO2 for annual mean concentrations would therefore be an overestimation, thereby providing worst

case results.

In the absence of specific national guidance on detailed dispersion modelling, guidance provided by the Air

Quality and Modelling Unit (AQMAU) of the Environmental Agency in the UK on conversion ratios for NOx and

NO2 for large combustion sources has been used. The guidance sets out a phased approach to determining

the magnitude of predicted NOx concentrations. The initial phase of this approach is screening, where a worse-

case assumption of 50% and 100% oxidation is made for short-term and long-term averaging periods (respec-

tively). Where this conservative assumption leads to high predicted concentrations, the guidance advises mak-

ing a revised assumption of 35% and 70% oxidation for short-term and long-term averaging periods (respective-

ly).

105 | 278

For the purposes of this assessment, and to ensure a worst-case assessment, it has been assumed that there

will be a 50% and 100% conversion of NOx to NO2, for short (1-hour) and long -term (annual) predicted concen-

trations, respectively.

Predicted 10-Minute Mean Sulphur Dioxide Concentrations

It is not possible to predict 10-min mean pollutant concentrations directly with the EPA-approved modelling

software that has been used, namely AERMOD. To address this, a methodology for conversion of 1-hour mean

predicted concentrations to 10-minute averages published in Canada by the Ontario Ministry of the Environ-

ment4 has been used. This methodology provides a factor of 1.65 for converting a 1-hour mean predicted con-

centration to a 10-minute mean, based on the following equation:

[SO2](10-min mean) = (60min/10min)0.28 x [SO2](1-hr mean)

The factor was applied to the predicted maximum 1-hour mean SO2 concentrations. This provides an indicative

concentration for this averaging period.

Significance Criteria

The significance of the predicted concentrations for the operation of the Project has been based on the magni-

tude of the maximum predicted off-site concentration, as well as the maximum predicted at a receptor location

relative to the AQS for the pollutant and averaging period. The residual impact is based on the actual predicted

concentration, with the significance being based on the impact of the Project without any further mitigation

measures beyond those already incorporated in the design of the plant.

For the predicted pollutant concentrations, the assessment was based on the levels presented in Table 7-5

(which have been developed in the absence of any published national guidance taking into account the IFC

guidelines).

Table 7-5 Criteria for Determination of Significance

Process Contribution as Percentage of Relevant AQS Significance

0 – 5% Negligible

>5 – 25% Minor

>25 – 70% Moderate

>70 – 100% Major

>100% Critical

Impacts on pollutant concentrations will be either positive (concentrations predicted to decrease) of negative

(pollutant concentrations are predicted to increase).

Calculation of Annual Greenhouse Gas Emissions

4 Methodology For Modelling Assessments Of Contaminants With 10-Minute Average Standards And Guidelines under O. Reg. 419/05,

Ontario Ministry for the Environment (April 2008)


Data on the fuel consumption and emissions factors published by the International Panel on Climate Change

(IPCC) have been used to calculate the additional annual greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions once the proposed

power plant is operational is operational.

Existing Baseline Conditions 7.4 Local Emissions Sources 7.4.1

The Project site is located approximately 55km to the north of Duba. The site is a Greenfield site and therefore,

there are currently no other industrial point sources or sources of combustion emissions of any other type. Traf-

fic emissions from the urban area of Duba or the other nearest small settlements are unlikely to influence of pol-

lutant concentrations at the SEC site and sensitive receptors closest to the power plant to any measurable ex-

tent due to the separation distance.

Traffic using the nearby highway (Route 5), which runs roughly north-south, approximately 100m east of the

Project site will have exhaust emissions associated with it; however, emissions from the traffic is unlikely to sig-

nificantly influence background air quality in the area. The land surrounding the site is largely characterised by

sabkha, which is generally devoid of vegetation and sandy in nature. These areas and those to the north, east

and south represent a significant natural source of particulate matter, which will influence ambient particle levels

in the region of the site. Emissions from this natural source are likely to result in exceedences of the AQSs for

PM10 and PM2.5 on occasion due to wind entrainment.

The Aermod dispersion model only calculates the pollutant contribution from the stacks under consideration. It

has the capacity to allow for the contribution of background concentrations to total pollutant concentrations in

addition to those arising from the existing and the proposed sources at the facility. However, no long term air

quality monitoring data is available for the area for inclusion in the modelling. There are no significant sources

of the pollutants considered in the area; therefore, the existing air quality at the site and the surrounding area is

likely to be good.

Air Quality Monitoring Data 7.4.2A short-term air quality monitoring programme for NOx, SO2 O3

and PM10 was undertaken in the area around

the Project site in May 2014. PM10 was measured using a continuous monitoring system (laser light scattering

device) for a period of 17 hours (5th and 6th of May 2014). The average PM10 concentration for the monitoring

period was 40.2µg/m3, which is well below the PME AQS for both annual and 24-hour mean PM10 concentra-

tions SO2, NOx, and O3 (ozone) monitoring was performed using diffusion tubes at three locations. The diffu-

sion tubes were installed on 5th May and were exposed for approximately a two-week period (collected on 23rd

May). The average results for each site are shown in Table 7-6, with the locations of the diffusion tubes shown

in Figure 7-2 overleaf. Copies of the analytical results for the two diffusion tube sampling periods are presented

in Appendix F.

The monitoring results indicate low levels of NOx and (particularly) SO2, which might be expected given the lack

of major and existing sources of these primary pollutants in the area. The average concentrations of NOx and

SO2 are well below the respective PME AQS for annual mean concentrations, peaking at 20% of the NOx annu-

107 | 278

al standard and 6.5% of the SO2 annual Standard. The AQS for 1-hour mean ozone concentrations is 235

µg/m3; however, it is not possible to directly compare the monitoring results (which are time weighted averages)

with this 1-hour mean standard. Nevertheless, the highest concentration of O3 measured is below 50% of the

standard, which indicates that overall concentrations of this secondary pollutant are likely to be relatively low in

the area.

Table 7-6 Diffusion Tube Monitoring Results

Location ID Location Description

UTM Coordinates Concentration (µg/m3)(a)

Easting Northing O3 NOx SO2

AQ1 Southwest of power plant site near the coastline 740469.56 m 3071919.79 m 116.69 16.34 <1.98(b)

AQ2 Southwest of power plant site further inland. 740842.17 m 3071981.79 m 124.92 17.89 <1.98(b)

AQ3 Immediately east of the site entrance, near Route 5

741798.00 m 3073079.17 m 109.66 17.41 3.62

(a) Concentrations shown are the average of the duplicate samples deployed at each monitoring location.

(b) Concentrations are below the reporting limit (<0.03 µg S)

Figure 7-2 Diffusion Tube Monitoring Locations


Local Meteorological Data 7.4.3Site specific meteorological data is also not available for the study area. For the purposes of the modelling, five

years of hourly sequential meteorological data (wind speed and direction, ambient temperature and relative

humidity) has been obtained for Sharm El Sheikh Airport, which is the nearest monitoring station to the Project

site (closer than Tabouk) where meteorological data suitable for dispersion model input is collected and is in a

coastal location.

Inter-annual Variation in Predicted Concentrations due to Meteorological Conditions

Screening modelling for NO2 (as the pollutant with the highest mass emission rate with the primary fuel) was

undertaken, which considered both the typical ambient conditions (OP1) and worse case ambient conditions

(OP2) for each year of meteorological data (2009 to 2013), as well as both combined and simple cycle mode, to

determine the inter-annual variation in predicted concentrations (location of maximum impact) due to the effects

of meteorological conditions alone. The results of the meteorological data screening showed that 2010 general-

ly produces higher predicted ground level concentrations (in particular, annual mean concentrations); therefore,

the subsequent modelling was undertaken using 2010 meteorological data.

Sensitive Receptors 7.5The Project site is located relatively remotely from any urban development and only has a small number of po-

tentially sensitive land uses within 10km.

There are a number of future receptors, which will be introduced to the site as part of the Project including offic-

es and a company housing compound at, or adjacent to, the Project site. The power plant receptors (offices

and work areas) are effectively on-site receptors and will be located inside the boundary of the Project site, near

the south eastern corner. The company housing compound will be located immediately outside the boundary of

the site, adjacent to the northeast corner of the boundary.

These locations have been included in the model as discrete receptors due to the potential for sensitive recep-

tors to be in these locations over short and long-term periods. The locations that have been represented in the

model by a number of discrete receptors (in addition to the receptor grid and non-specific discrete receptor ar-

rays) are shown Figure 7-3. Further details of the receptor locations are in presented in Table 7-7.

109 | 278

Figure 7-3 Sensitive Receptor Locations


Table 7-7 Sensitive Receptors

Receptor Location Receptor Type

X Coordinate Y Coordinate

Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 Industrial(a)

Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 Commercial(b)

Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 Worker Welfare(c)

Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 Worker Welfare

Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 Residential)

Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 Residential

Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 Residential

Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 Residential

Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 Commercial

Alsourah 732009 3083693 Residential (Town)

Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 Residential (Town)

(a) Industrial refers to areas where workers involved directly involved in the running of the power plant may be present for a shift period; therefore, PME AQSs for annual and 24-hour mean concentrations would not apply in these locations. These receptors would gener-ally be considered lower in sensitivity.

(b) Commercial refers to locations where administration staff may be present for a shift; again, standards for annual and 24-hour mean concentrations would not apply in these locations.

(c) Worker welfare refers to places that members of the workforce are likely to be only for short periods of time; therefore only PME AQSs for averaging period of an hour or less are relevant to exposure in these locations.

(d) Residential receptors are considered of highest sensitivity due to the potential for people to be present for long periods of time. The PME AQSs for all averaging periods apply in these locations.

111 | 278

Assessment of Construction phase Impacts 7.6 Construction Sources of Dust and PM10 7.6.1

The main sources of dust and PM10 during construction activities include:

Haulage routes, vehicles and construction traffic;

Materials handling, storage, stockpiling, spillage and disposal;

Exhaust emissions from site plant, especially when used at the extremes of their capacity and during me-

chanical breakdown;

Site preparation and restoration after completion; and

Construction and fabrication processes.

The construction phase has been estimated at approximately 18 months in total duration. During this time, the

majority of the releases are likely to occur during the ‘working week’. However, for some potential release

sources, e.g. exposed soil produced from significant earthwork activities, in the absence of dust control

mitigation measures, dust generation has the potential to occur 24 hours per day over the period during which

such activities are to take place.

Distance from the Point of Generation to the Sensitive Receptor

Depending on wind speed and turbulence (notwithstanding natural events such as dust storms), it is likely that

the majority of dust will be deposited in the area immediately surrounding the source (up to 200m away). The

site of the power plant is located over 200m from the inside of the boundary of the Project site at its closest

point. Within the site itself, there are no receptor locations that are highly sensitive to dust impacts in close

proximity.

The area surrounding the Project site is essentially barren and of low sensitivity to emissions from the

construction phase. Beyond the boundary of the Project site, the closest sensitive receptor location is the

company housing compound to the immediate north of the power plant site, adjacent to Route 5; however, this

area will be under construction as part of the power plant development and therefore is effectively not a

receptor location with respect to the construction phase.

A fish farm is located some 1.7km to the north northwest of the site. Therefore, because of this very large

separation distance, the likelihood of these locations being affected by a dust nuisance during the construction

of the power plant is negligible. All other sensitive receptor locations are at least 3km from the construction site

and would, therefore, not be affected by dust emissions from the construction activities, even in the absence of

specific dust mitigation measures.

Prevailing Weather Conditions

Based on the meteorological data used in the assessment (Sharm El Sheikh) shown in Appendix D, the

strongly prevailing wind direction at the site is from the north (together with north northeast for around half the

frequency). Winds blowing from all other directions occur with a very low frequency. When applying this data

to the Project site, caution must be exercised as the climate observing station is around 100km from the site;

nevertheless, the observing station is the closest and the two sites are located a similar distance from the Red


Sea Coast and, as such, it is reasonable to assume that the prevailing winds at the Project site will have a

significant northerly component.

With the prevailing northerly winds, receptors located to the south of the construction site are most likely to be

affected by dust emissions from the site should they occur; however, there are no sensitive receptor locations

within 200m (or indeed several kilometres) of the boundary of the power plant site in this direction.

With respect to dust emissions, moderate to strong wind speeds (e.g. above 5 m/s) tend to generate dust

emissions through entrainment. On the basis of the five consecutive years of meteorological data from Sharm

El Sheikh Airport (2009 – 2013), wind speeds of this magnitude occur for only around 32% of the time for all

wind directions. Moderate to strong winds from the north occur most frequently at approximately 18% of this

time, which represents approximately 65 days per year. For the majority of wind directions however, moderate

to strong winds occur for less than 1% of the time (approximately 3.5 days per year).

The lack of sensitive receptors leads to the conclusion that the potential to be affected by dust emissions from

the construction activities is negligible.

Despite the negligible potential for giving rise to off-site dust nuisance, it will be important to ensure that any

releases of dust and other emissions to the atmosphere are controlled during the construction period. This

would not be difficult to achieve with standard mitigation measures and good working practices. Dust control

measures are presented below and in Chapter 16: Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan.

By consideration of the factors described above, the overall impact of dust nuisance would therefore be

temporary, short-term and local in effect and of negligible significance in the absence of any mitigation

measures. During construction, concentrations of PM10 in the locality will be elevated. As the magnitude of

these releases is relatively small compared to total dust, any effects resulting from them are likely to be local,

temporary, short-term and of negligible significance.

Release of Emissions to Air from Construction Traffic 7.6.2

Construction traffic associated with the construction of the Project will increase traffic levels on the Route 5.

The greatest potential for impacts on air quality from traffic associated with the construction phase of the project

will be in the areas immediately adjacent to the principal means of site access for construction traffic. However,

there are few receptor locations in close proximity to the route affected by construction traffic, and the level of

construction traffic is unlikely to be significant. Therefore, the impacts on local air quality of emissions

associated with construction traffic would to be localised, temporary, and of negligible significance.

113 | 278

Assessment of Operational Phase Impacts 7.7

Introduction 7.7.1The IFC General EHS guidelines for air emissions2 state that for projects with significant sources of air

emissions, and potential for significant impacts to ambient air quality (which is relevant to DCCPP), impacts

should be prevented or minimized by ensuring:

emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines

and standards by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence, the current WHO Air Quality

Guidelines; and

emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines

or standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25% of the applicable air quality standards to allow

additional, future sustainable development in the same air shed.

The PME has published Environmental Standards for stationary sources5 which include emission limits (see

Table 7-2) that have been set to:

i) contribute to the maintenance of ambient air quality.

ii) control the wider spatial and trans-boundary effects of air pollution; and

iii) recognise the importance of international air quality agreements.

The assessment of the impacts of the Project has been undertaken within the context of the above

requirements, using the significance criteria presented in Table 7-5.

Stack Heights 7.7.2

The PME Environmental Standards for stationary sources states that stack heights should be equal to or greater than:

H + 1.5L

Where:

H is the height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the stack (e.g. turbine hall);

L is the lesser of dimension, height or width, of the nearby structure; and

where a nearby structure is classed as anything within 5L (but less than 800m).

The turbine hall is likely to be the largest structure near the main stacks and by-pass stacks. Currently, the

height of the turbine hall has not been finalised; however, if the turbine hall was assumed to be 20m (as in the

modelling), then the appropriate minimum stack height would be 50m (although this calculation would apply to

both main stacks and by-pass stacks, the main stacks would be the emphasis, as emissions would be from

these stack under normal operation). The SEC minimum main stack height specification of 60m would clearly

meet with PME requirement for a 20m tall turbine building and would continue to meet the requirement for a

5 Kingdom of Saudi Arabia National Environmental Standard, Control of Air Emissions from Stationary Sources (March 2012)


turbine building of up to 25m in height. This issue may require further review and assessment once the power

plant building and structure dimensions have been finalised by the EPC and SEC; however, the PME

Environmental Standards also state that stack height should ultimately be determined using dispersion

modelling.

It must also be remembered that the dispersion modelling undertaken for this assessment is based on general

plant descriptions and typical emissions for F-Class and E-Class turbines and, as such, several assumptions

were required regarding turbine exhaust flows, discharge temperatures and pollutant emission rates to

complete the assessment. Although, the assumptions are aimed, as far as practicable, at producing

conservative results, the results of the assessment would need to be reviewed once an EPC has been selected

and the exact combustion units that will be installed (and the associated emissions under the ambient

conditions considered herein) are known. This would determine whether further dispersion modelling may be

needed to characterise the impacts of the power plant on local air quality and confirm proposed stack heights.

Combined Cycle Operation Scenarios – Natural Gas 7.7.3A full set of results for the combined cycle operation scenarios is provided in Appendix G, with a summary

provided in Table 7-8. Dispersion modelling results for Option A and Option B plant configurations have been

presented for emissions from natural gas-firing and under both sets of ambient conditions (OP1 and OP2).

The results show that when considering both the typical and worse case operating conditions for gas-fired

combined cycle operation, the highest predicted process contributions (concentrations due to emissions from

the Project only) at the maximum point of impact (which occurs on-site) and at sensitive receptor locations are

well below the respective PME AQSs for NO2 and PM10. The results also show that the minimum assumed

design stack height of 40m for the main (HRSG) stacks is likely to ensure the exhaust plume under gas-fired

operation will be adequately dispersed prior to coming to ground. Figure 7-4 to Figure 7-7 are contour plots of

annual and 1-hour mean NO2 concentrations for the OP1 scenarios for each plant configuration option.

115 | 278

Table 7-8 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Combined Cycle (Natural Gas)

Scenario Pollutant Concentration (µg/m3) Maximum NO2

Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean 1-hr Mean

Air Quality Standard 100

No 24-hour Standard or Guideline Applicable

660

Scenario 1A1 (OP1) 3.7 (4%)(a) 12.8 (2%)

Scenario 1A2 (OP2) NA(b) 12.6 (2%)

Scenario 1B1 (OP1) 6.5 (6%) 20.9 (3%)

Scenario 1B2 (OP2) NA 22.0 (3%)

Maximum PM10 Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean 1-hr Mean

Air Quality Standard 80 340(c)


Scenario 1A1 (OP1) 0.7 (<1%) 1.1 (<1%)

Scenario 1A2 (OP2) NA 1.2 (<1%%)

Scenario 1B1 (OP1) 1.3 (2%) 2.0 (1%)


(a) The value shown in the parentheses is the percentage of the PME AQS or IFC guideline the concentration represents. (b) NA means not applicable. The annual averaging period is not relevant to these scenarios because these operating conditions would

not prevail for an entire year. OP2 represents worse-case conditions which would occur during the winter months. (c) As the 90th percentile of 24-hour means.

The results show that Option B plant configuration gives rise to a greater impact than the Option A

configuration. This is mainly due to the additional turbine in the design of the Option B configuration, but also

relates to the lower NOx emission concentration assumed for the F-Class turbine compared to the E-Class

turbines. The ground level concentrations resulting from the plant are proportional to the NOx emission rate

(e.g. kg/hr) and the additional turbine (Option B) result in a greater mass emission rate from the plant and

higher predicted pollutant concentrations. The higher concentrations and geographical extent of impact for

Option B can be clearly seen in the figures above; as can the influence of the prevailing northerly wind

(particularly for the annual mean concentrations).

When considering the ambient conditions, the impacts for the winter or worse case operating conditions (OP2)

are very similar to those predicted for the operating conditions which are more representative of the emissions

associated with the summer or typical operating conditions (OP1).

The highest predicted annual mean NO2 concentration at the point of maximum impact is 6.5µg/m3 (6% of the

PME AQS), which is well below the standard. The concentration occurs for the Option B power plant

configuration at an on-site location, to the south of the turbine building (740450, 3072250).


Figure 7-4 Scenario 1A1 – Option A, Combined Cycle (OP1) – Annual Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

117 | 278

Figure 7-5 Scenario 1A1 – Option A, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


Figure 7-6 Scenario 1B1 – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – Annual Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

119 | 278

Figure 7-7 Scenario 1B1 – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


The highest predicted 1-hour mean NO2 concentration is 20.9µg/m3 (3% of the PME AQS) and also occurs on-

site, in a similar location to the maximum annual mean (740600, 3072400). This concentration is also well

below the PME AQS. The location of the highest concentrations can be seen in the contour plots and that the

NO2 concentrations reduce rapidly with distance from the maximum point of impact.

The highest predicted annual mean NO2 concentration at a sensitive receptor location is 0.2µg/m3 (<1% of the

AQS), which occurs at the company housing compound for OP2 (plant configuration Option B). For 1-hour

mean NO2 concentrations, the highest predicted concentration at a sensitive receptor location is 11.9µg/m3 (2%

of the PME AQS), which occurs at the Central Control Building (CCB) under OP1 conditions for Option B and is

again well below the AQS.

For PM10 concentrations, the predicted concentrations are all well below those predicted for NO2. The highest

predicted concentrations at the point of maximum impact are a maximum of 2% of the PME AQS for all

averaging periods, plant configurations and ambient conditions (i.e. OP1 and OP2). At the sensitive receptor

locations, the highest predicted annual and 24-hour mean PM10 concentrations are considerably lower than the

concentration predicted at the maximum point of impact for both plant configurations

Summary of Results and Significance of Impact

For natural gas-fired, combined cycle operation, the results of the modelling presented in Table 7-8 and

Appendix G for the two plant configuration options and sets of operating conditions show that:

the highest predicted pollutant concentrations for either plant configuration or set of operating conditions oc-

cur on-site and are all well below the relevant PME AQS for NO2 and PM10;

the Option B plant configuration gives rise to higher predicted ground level concentrations at the point of

maximum impact and sensitive receptor locations than Option A for all averaging periods;

the highest predicted pollutant concentrations for the two sets of operating conditions (OP1 and OP2) are

very similar in magnitude and location at both the point of maximum impact and sensitive receptor locations

for both plant configuration options; generally slightly higher concentrations are predicted for OP1;

at the point of maximum impact, the significance of the impact of the emissions from the plant during com-

bined cycle operation is minor negative to negligible for NO2 concentrations and negligible for PM10 con-

centrations according to the significance criteria used in the assessment; and

at sensitive receptor locations, the significance of the impact of the emissions is considered to be negligible

for both NO2 and PM10 concentrations for both plant configurations and operating conditions.

Simple Cycle Operation Scenarios – Natural Gas 7.7.4A full set of results for the simple cycle operation scenarios is provided in Appendix H, with a summary

provided in Table 7-9. Dispersion modelling results for Option A and Option B plant configurations have been

presented for emissions from natural gas-firing and under both sets of ambient conditions (OP1 and OP2).

Similar to the results seen for combined cycle operation, the modelling results show that when considering both

the typical and worse case operating conditions for gas-fired simple cycle operation, the highest predicted

121 | 278

concentrations due to emissions from the Project remain below the respective PME AQSs for NO2 and PM10 at

both the maximum point of impact and sensitive receptor locations. This is despite the concentrations being

much greater (relatively speaking) for all averaging periods and locations than the respective concentrations

predicted for combined cycle operation.

It can be seen from Table 7-9 that the minimum assumed design stack height of 30m for the by-pass stacks is

likely to ensure the exhaust plume from the Project during gas-fired simple cycle operation will be adequately

dispersed prior to coming to ground.

Table 7-9 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Simple Cycle (Natural Gas)

Scenario Pollutant Concentration (µg/m3)

Maximum NO2 Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean 1-hr Mean



660

Scenario 2A1 (OP1) 25.8 (26%)(a)(b) 97.3 (15%)

Scenario 2A2 (OP2) NA(c) 94.3 (14%)

Scenario 2B1 (OP1) 27.0 (27%) 105.0 (16%)

Scenario 2B2 (OP2) NA 101.1 (15%)

Maximum PM10 Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean 1-hr Mean

Air Quality Standard 80 340(d)


Scenario 1A1 (OP1) 5.0 (6%) 11.8 (3%)

Scenario 1A2 (OP2) NA 10.8 (8%)

Scenario 1B1 (OP1) 5.3 (7%) 12.5 (4%)


(a) The value shown in the parentheses is the percentage of the PME AQS or IFC guideline the concentration represents. (b) The annual mean averaging period is not relevant to simple cycle operation because these operating conditions would

not occur for long periods of time; however, the annual mean concentration for OP1 has been presented for compari-son against the results for OP1 for combined cycle operation.

(c) NA means not applicable. The annual averaging period is not relevant to this scenario because these operating condi-tions would not prevail for an entire year. OP2 represents worse-case conditions which would occur during the winter months.

(d) As the 90th percentile of 24-hour means.

The annual mean concentrations are just over 25% of the relevant PME AQS for NO2; however, operation of the

Project in simple cycle mode would not occur for an entire year, therefore the AQS does not apply and the

figures are included in the table for comparative purposes only. The short-term concentrations are all less than

25% of the relevant AQS.

Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9 are contour plots of 1-hour mean NO2 concentrations for the OP1 scenarios for each

plant configuration option.


Figure 7-8 Scenario 2A1 – Option A, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

123 | 278

Figure 7-9 Scenario 2B1 – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


The results in Table 7-9 and the contour plots show that the impact of the emissions arising from simple cycle

operations are (relatively speaking) much greater than predicted for combined cycle operation in the area of

maximum impact. However, the concentrations reduce more quickly with distance from this point than for

combined cycle operation, such that emissions during combined cycle operation affect a wider area (albeit at

very low levels relative to the AQSs). This will be primarily due to the lower stacks, but the different discharge

characteristics are also likely to influence this outcome to some extent.

Again, the results show that the Option B plant configuration gives rise to higher pollutant concentrations at the

point of maximum impact and at sensitive receptor locations compared with Option A. This is likely to be due to

the same reasons as presented for combined cycle operation (i.e. higher pollutant mass emissions rates for

Option B), despite the differing discharge conditions (e.g. temperature and flow rate). Once again, there is little

difference between the highest pollutant concentrations predicted for OP1 and OP2 for each of the plant

configuration options.

The highest predicted 1-hour mean NO2 concentration is 105.0µg/m3 (15% of the PME AQS), which occurs on-

site, to the immediate north of the turbine building (740600, 3072850). This concentration is also well below the

PME AQS.

The highest predicted 1-hour mean NO2 concentrations at a sensitive receptor location is 57.0µg/m3 (9% of the

PME AQS), which occurs at the CCB (Receptor 1) under OP1 conditions for Option B and is again well below

the AQS.

For PM10 concentrations, the predicted concentrations are again all well below those predicted for NO2,

although slightly higher than those predicted for combined cycle operation. The highest predicted

concentrations at the point of maximum impact are a maximum of 7% of the relevant PME AQS for both plant

configurations and sets of ambient conditions (i.e. OP1 and OP2). At the sensitive receptor locations, the

highest predicted 24-hour mean PM10 concentrations are less than 1% of the PME AQS for both configuration

Option A and Option B.

Summary of Results and Significance of Impact

For natural gas-fired, simple cycle operation, the results of the modelling presented in Table 7-9 and Appendix H for the two plant configuration options and operating conditions show that:

the highest predicted pollutant concentrations for either plant configuration or set of operating conditions are

all below the relevant PME AQS for NO2 and PM10;



the highest predicted pollutant concentrations for the two sets of operating conditions (OP1 and OP2) are

very similar in magnitude and location at both the point of maximum impact and sensitive receptor locations,

with generally slightly higher concentrations predicted for OP1;

at the point of maximum impact, the significance of the impact of the emissions from the plant during simple

cycle operation is minor negative for NO2 concentrations and negligible for PM10 concentrations (annual

125 | 278

mean concentrations are not relevant to this scenario) according to the significance criteria used in the as-

sessment; and

at sensitive receptor locations, the significance of the impact of the emissions is minor negative at one loca-

tion (Receptor 1 – CCB) for 1-hour mean NO2 concentrations for Option B. For all other sensitive receptor

locations, the impact is considered to be negligible for both NO2 and PM10 concentrations for both plant

configurations and operating conditions.

Abnormal Operation Scenarios – Operation on Back-up Fuel (ASL) 7.7.5The full set of results for the modelling of NO2, SO2 and PM10 concentrations at the selected receptors for

operation of the plant on ASL are shown in Appendix I with a summary given in Table 7-10 below. Dispersion

modelling results for Option A and Option B plant configurations have been presented for emissions from ASL-

firing under typical ambient conditions (OP1).

The proposed GT/HRSGs have been assumed to be continuously operating at maximum load conditions across

the entire year (worse-case) utilising ASL as fuel in combined cycle mode and simple cycle mode. OP2

conditions have not been modelled for this scenario because the earlier modelling had showed that predicted

concentrations were generally slightly lower for OP2 operating conditions compared to OP1 conditions. SO2

concentrations have been predicted due to the 0.1% sulphur content of the ASL compared with the negligible

content in the natural gas and condensate.

Table 7-10 Maximum Ground Level Pollutant Concentrations – Arabian Super Light (ASL) Fuel

Scenario Pollutant Concentration (µg/m3) Maximum SO2

Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean 1-hr Mean 10-minute Mean

Air Quality Standard 80 365 730 500 3ACC 5.0 (6%) 11.7 (3%) 38.4 (5%) 65.8 (13%) 3ASC NA 25.3 (7%) 76.0 (10%) 184.3 (37%) 3BCC 6.5 (8%) 15.0 (4%) 41.9 (6%) 74.9 (15%) 3BSC NA 25.5 (7%) 130.0 (18%) 350.0 (70%)

Maximum NO2 Concentrations Annual Mean 1-hr Mean



660

No 10-min Standard or Guideline Applicable

3ACC 12.3 (12%) 43.7 (7%) 3ASC NA 109.2 (17%) 3BCC 18.6 (19%) 60.3 (9%) 3BSC NA 186.9 (28%)

Maximum PM10 Concentrations Annual Mean 24-hr Mean

Air Quality Standard 80 340


No 10-min Standard or Guideline Applicable

3ACC 4.1 (5%) 9.5 (3%) 3ASC

8.08 (2%)

3BCC 4.3 (5%) 6.9 (2%) 3BSC

12.3 (4%)


These scenarios represent a short-term set of operating conditions which would only occur if the natural gas

supply was interrupted. As such, the annual averaging period is not relevant; however, the scenario has been

run for a full year of meteorological data to ensure the worse-case conditions are identified and annual mean

concentrations have been presented for combined cycle operation for comparative purposes.

The results of the modelling for emissions associated with ASL-fired operation show that the highest predicted

process contributions at the point of maximum impact are all below the respective PME AQS. As would be

expected from the higher mass emission rates for the turbines when operating on ASL, the highest predicted

process contributions at the point of maximum impact are markedly higher than those predicted for gas-fired

operation. The difference varies for pollutant and averaging period, with 1-hour and 24-hour means ranging

between 2 and 28% of the respective PME AQS, compared with 2 and 6% for gas-fired operation.

Figure 7-10 to Figure 7-15 are contours plots showing 1-hour mean NO2 concentrations and 1-hour and 24-hour

mean SO2 concentrations for plant configuration Option B (as the Option with the greater impact) for both

combined and simple cycle operations. Comparing the plots for ASL with the short-term plots for natural gas-

fired operation clearly illustrates the greater impact on local air quality of emissions associated with ASL-fired

operation. Similar to the results for gas-fired operation, the highest concentrations are predicted to occur on-

site, with concentrations reducing rapidly with distance from the point of maximum impact, such that highest

predicted concentrations at sensitive receptor locations are no higher than 10% of the relevant PME AQS for

both combined cycle and simple cycle operation (with the exception of the CCB, where the highest 1-hour mean

NO2 concentration is 13% of the PME AQS).

Overall, the results of the modelling presented in Table 7-10 and Appendix I show that when the plant is

operating on ASL (abnormal operating conditions), no exceedences of the PME AQSs for NO2, SO2 and PM10

concentrations (or IFC Guideline for SO2) are predicted to occur with the minimum design stacks (main and by-

pass). It is also important to remember that in order for the highest predicted short-term concentrations

presented in Table 7-10 and Appendix I to occur, the short-term operation of the plant on ASL would have to

coincide with the worse-case meteorological conditions; therefore, there is a very low probability of the

predicted maximum impacts occurring.

127 | 278

Figure 7-10 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


Figure 7-11 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

129 | 278

Figure 7-12 Scenario 3BCC – Option B, Combined Cycle (OP1) – 24-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


Figure 7-13 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

131 | 278

Figure 7-14 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 1-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)


Figure 7-15 Scenario 3BSC – Option B, Simple Cycle (OP1) – 24-hour Mean SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

133 | 278

Summary of Results and Significance of Impacts

For ASL-fired and both combined cycle and simple operation, the results of the modelling presented in Table

7-10 and Appendix I for the two plant configuration options show that for these short-term abnormal operating

conditions:

the highest predicted pollutant concentrations predicted for either plant configuration or set of operating

conditions are well below the relevant PME AQS for NO2 and PM10;



at the point of maximum impact, the significance of the impact of the emissions from the plant during ASL-

fired operation is at worst (i.e. Option B, simple cycle) moderate negative for 1-hour mean NO2 concentra-

tions, minor negative to negligible for SO2 concentrations and negligible for PM10 concentrations accord-

ing to the significance criteria used in the assessment; and

at sensitive receptor locations, the significance of the impact of the NO2 and SO2 emissions is minor nega-tive at one location (Receptor 1) for 1-hour mean concentrations (Option A and B, simple cycle). For all

other sensitive receptor locations and all relevant averaging periods (e.g. 1-hour and 24-hour), the impact is

considered to be negligible for NO2, SO2 and PM10 concentrations for both plant configurations and opera-

tional modes.

Greenhouse Gas Emissions 7.7.6Natural gas and gas condensate will be used as the primary fuel for the Project. The power plant will also have

the capability of operating on ASL as a back-up if the gas supply is interrupted. The combustion of these fossil

fuels will produce CO2 emissions and, to a lesser extent, methane (CH4) emissions (as a result of incomplete

combustion). CO2 and methane emissions are accepted as contributing to global warming and known as

Greenhouse Gases (GHG). Calculation of global warming potential (GWP) allows comparison with other

sources and provides some context for the plant. GWP is measured in terms of equivalent emissions of CO2;

hence the GWP factor of CO2 is 1. CH4 has a GWP factor of 21 - i.e. an emission of 1kg of CH4 is defined as

having 21 times the GWP of an emission of 1kg of CO2.

The use of emission factors in combination with fuel consumption or power generated is a widely accepted

method for calculating GHG emissions from a range of industrial activities including power generation. GHG

emissions from the power plant have been calculated using the default Intergovernmental Panel on Climate

Change (IPCC) emission factors for CO2 and methane emissions from natural gas (IPCC 2006). The data

used for the calculation of annual CO2 emissions from the Project is presented in Table 7-11 below.


Table 7-11 Calculation of annual carbon dioxide emissions for the Additional Turbines

Parameter Option A Option B Units

Fuel Calorific Value 46.4 MJ/kg

Fuel Consumption (Total Plant)

72.56 72.80 t/h

72,560 72,800 kg/hour

3,370,049 3,381,196 MJ/hour

Average Operational Hours (per GT) 8,322 8,322 hours/year

Annual Fuel Consumption (for Plant) 28,046 28,138 TJ/year

IPCC Guidelines CO2 Emission Factor (2006) 56,100 56,100 kg CO2/TJ

IPCC Guidelines CH4 Emission Factor (2006) 1 1 kg CH4/TJ

Duba CCPP No.1 Annual CO2 Emissions 1,573,355 1,578,559 tCO2 per annum

Duba CCPP No.1 Annual CH4 Emissions 28 28 tCH4 per annum

Duba CCPP No.1 Annual GHG Emissions (GWP) 1,573,944 1,579,150 tCO2 equivalents per

annum

The data in Table 7-11 shows that assuming maximum load (OP1) for the proposed turbines over the two plant

configurations and operation of 8,322 hours per year, the annual GHG emissions would be similar for the two

plant configurations, with 1,573,944 tonnes CO2 equivalents being emitted per year for Option A and 1,579,150

being emitted for Option B. It is worth noting that the IPCC emission factors for natural gas liquids are higher

for both CO2 (64,200 kg CO2/TJ) and methane (3 kg CH4/TJ). If these emissions factors are used, the

corresponding tonnes of CO2 equivalents emitted per year are 1,802,291 for Option A and 1,808,252 for Option

B.

The GHG emissions are indicative at this point because the exact design of the plant has not been finalised

and therefore the emission data has been based on fuel consumption rates and assumed operating conditions

for turbines of the classes specified on the SEC scope of works. More accurate emission calculation will be

possible when the exact make and model of turbines has been finalised and the manufacturers can provide

emission data based on an anticipated annual operating profile.

135 | 278

Mitigation Measures and Residual Impacts 7.8 Construction Phase Mitigation Measures 7.8.1

The location of the construction area on the site benefits from a large separation distance to any sensitive

receptors and therefore, activities associated with the construction of the power plant to the plant have a

negligible impact off-site even with no specific dust control measures.

Nevertheless, mitigation measures representing best practice for construction sites should be employed during

the construction of the power plant to ensure dust emissions and construction traffic/plant exhaust emissions

are minimised to an extent where adverse impacts beyond the boundary of the site would be prevented. Dust

mitigation measures and monitoring provisions are included in Chapter 16: Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan. A full Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) for the

project would be prepared in the basis of this framework. The mitigation measures which will be implemented

during construction include the following:

Measures to reduce dust arising through appropriate stockpile management;

Controlling dust arising through management of vehicle movements and speeds;

Appropriate materials handling (e.g. minimising drop heights);

Measures to reduce dust impacts when grading:

Correct use of cement batching:

Reducing exposed areas of open ground:

Preventing certain types of work in windy conditions;

Controls of excavation, piling and sandblasting works (where relevant); and

Minimising emissions from construction vehicles and plant through regular servicing and maintenance.

Construction Phase Residual Effects 7.8.2Residual impacts, should they occur, following the implementation of mitigation measures would be temporary,

of limited duration and negligible in impact.

Construction Phase Cumulative Effects 7.8.3The construction of the power plant and associated infrastructure will be the only construction works on the

larger area, therefore there will be no cumulative impacts beyond those associated with the power plant com-

plex; therefore, potential impacts would remain the same as above: temporary, of limited duration and negligi-

ble effect.

Operational Phase Mitigation Measures 7.8.4Operational Emissions

All combustion units and associated plant on-site will be subject to a regular inspection, servicing and mainte-

nance programme to ensure optimal efficiency and ensure, as far as practicable, all equipment is in good work-

ing order at all times, which will minimise pollutant emissions.


Emissions of NOx, SO2 and PM10 from the turbines at the facility will be continuously monitored. This monitor-

ing would provide data to confirm assumptions made for the dispersion modelling. This would accurately de-

termine pollutant concentrations in the emissions and provide an indication of any temporal variation in emis-

sions from the plant and further assist in verifying the modelling predictions and/or allow further, more accurate

modelling to be undertaken in the future to determine potential air quality impacts. This will be important if fur-

ther development of power generation capability is considered at the site.

The results of this assessment indicate that a minimum main stack height 60m will not lead to any exceedences

of the PME AQSs under normal operation. For the by-pass stacks, a minimum design stack height of 40m will

also ensure emissions are dispersed adequately and exceedences of short-term AQSs avoided during these

abnormal, short-term operating conditions.

Further assessment of the adequacy of the suggested minimum design stack heights may be necessary when

the design of the plant and the combustion units have been finalised and more accurate emission data is avail-

able; however, the fact that predicted maximum concentrations are all well below the relevant PME AQSs (and

IFC Guideline) provides confidence that impact of the power plant of either configuration on local air quality will

not be significant.

GHG Emissions

The use of natural gas has significant advantages over other fossil fuels:

Each unit of energy provided by the combustion of natural gas results in less global warming emissions than

other fossil fuels; and

Its energy content can be converted to electricity in efficiencies in the order of 60% within CCGT power sta-

tions. This is significantly more efficient than other combustion based electricity production technologies,

particularly heavy fuel oil or coal.

The combination of low emissions per unit of released energy in combination with efficient technologies for the

conversion into electricity and ready transportability of natural gas allows the production of electricity from natu-

ral gas with considerably less greenhouse gas emissions than other fossil fuels.

The plant will incorporate leading combustion technology and will be operated to a high standard to ensure the

efficiency of the combustion plant is maximised as far as practicable to prevent incomplete combustion and

minimise methane emissions from this source. The design will be to a high specification and the facilities will

be maintained to a standard which will control the unnecessary emission of natural gas (methane) from leaks.

Minimising fugitive releases is a priority for the site to control associated risks to safety and the loss of product.

Leak detection and repair procedures will be implemented at the site as part of the larger service and mainte-

nance programme for the plant, which will ensure that fugitive emissions of natural gas are prevented or mini-

mised as far as practicable.

137 | 278

Operational Phase Residual Effects 7.8.5The Scenarios modelled for this assessment have considered optimal design characteristics for the height of

the stacks for the Project to ensure the impact of the plant on local air quality is not significant. Therefore the

significance of the predicted concentrations referred to in the assessment of impacts above and presented in

Appendices G to I represent the residual effects of the emissions from the proposed power plant in the opera-

tional phase.

In addition to this, it should be noted that the emission data used in the assessment was based on assumptions

regarding the proposed combustion units at the site. Therefore, the predicted impacts must be considered

within this context. Every effort has been made to utilise representative input data and conservative assump-

tions to ensure the impacts have not been underestimated. Plant specific pollutant emission data would pro-

vide assistance with determining the level of conservatism and confirming the adequacy of the main and by-

pass stack heights.

Detailed emission data from the proposed combustion units would allow for more accurate modelling of the

proposed plant to be undertaken and provide more confidence of the accuracy of the predicted impacts. Nev-

ertheless, the modelling results show that even if the impact of the power plant operating normally were dou-

bled, it is still likely exceedences of the standards would occur for combined cycle or simple cycle operation.

Summary and Conclusions 7.9 Summary 7.9.1

The impact of the Project on local air quality has been assessed for both the construction and operational

phases. For the construction phase, a qualitative assessment was undertaken based on the likely construction

activities, location of sensitive receptors and local meteorological data to assess the potential air quality im-

pacts.

For the operation phase, a complex dispersion model (Breeze Aermod) was used to predict ground level con-

centrations of NO2, SO2 and PM10 at various receptor locations, including residential locations, in the local area

and surrounding region. Operating conditions representing the plant operating in combined cycle mode during

both typical and worse case ambient conditions were modelled for the assessment. Concentrations were pre-

dicted for the plant operating on both natural gas and ASL (the latter during emergency operation resulting from

gas supply interruption), as well as in simple cycle mode.

GHG emissions from the proposed power plant have been estimated using emission factors for CO2 and me-

thane published by the IPCC for GHG emissions.

Conclusions 7.9.2Construction Phase

The impact of dust and fine particle emissions from construction activities and emissions associated with con-

struction plant and traffic is likely to be of negligible due to the distances to off-site locations, absence of sensi-


tive receptors nearby in the surrounding area and the likely low level of traffic associated with construction

phase.

Operational Process Contribution

The results of the dispersion modelling show that under both representative and worse-case operating condi-

tions no exceedences of the PME AQSs for the pollutants considered in the assessment were predicted to oc-

cur as a result of emissions from the proposed power plant. This is the case at both the point of maximum im-

pact and at sensitive receptors considered in the assessment and for all relevant averaging periods, under both

operational modes (combined and simple cycle).

The significance of the residual air quality impacts associated with the proposed power plant when operating on

natural gas and in combined cycle mode range from minor negative to negligible at the point of maximum

impact, according to the significance criteria used. For all sensitive receptor locations the significance of the

impact of the emissions is negligible when operating on natural gas and in combined cycle mode.

In simple cycle mode and utilising natural gas, the residual impacts are minor negative at the point of maxi-

mum impact and minor negative (at one on-site receptor location) to negligible for sensitive receptor loca-

tions. The summary of significance of the residual impacts for natural gas fired operation applies to both power

plant configurations (Option A and Option B) and sets of ambient conditions (OP1 and OP2). Significance has

only been assigned to short-term impacts (e.g. 1-hour and 24-hour), as an annual averaging period is not rele-

vant to simple cycle operation.

As with the power plant operating in simple cycle mode, operation on ASL would also only be a short-term oc-

currence and therefore, only short-term mean pollutant concentrations were considered.. The residual impacts

for emissions from ASL firing in combined cycle mode are of minor negative to negligible significance at the

point of maximum impact and minor negative (one on-site receptor only. Option B configuration) to negligible

significance at sensitive receptor locations. For simple cycle operation, the significance of the impact was

moderate negative to negligible at the point of maximum impact and of minor negative (at one on-site recep-

tor location) to negligible significance at sensitive receptor locations. The summary of significance of the re-

sidual impacts for ASL-fired operation applies to both power plant configurations (Option A and Option B). Im-

pacts were not modelled for OP2 conditions as the earlier modelling had shown impacts to be similar to, but

lower than, OP1.

With respect to the two potential plant configuration options, Option B (4 x E-Class GTs) was predicted to have

a greater impact on local air quality compared to Option A for all scenarios considered. This is primarily due to

the lower total plant mass emission (e.g. kg/hr) of the pollutants considered for Option A. Although the F-Class

turbine is considerably larger than the E-Class, the modelling results indicate that its impact is lower than the

combined impact of two E-Class turbines.

In addition to compliance with the PME AQSs for all scenarios considered, the contribution of emissions from

the power plant (for both plant configuration options) during gas-fired operation would not contribute more than

25% to the attainment of the relevant PME AQS, which is in compliance with the relevant criteria in the IFC

139 | 278

EHS Guidelines for ensuring a project allows for additional, future sustainable development in the same air

shed.

GHG Emissions

The operation the turbines at DCCPP would generate GHG emissions of approximately 1,579,150 tCO2 equiva-

lents per year, based on the emission data used and assuming continuous operation of the GTs at the plant at

maximum load (8322 hours per year per GT).

Further Impact Assessment

Detailed design information is not currently available for the Project, only that the plant will be based on F-class

and/or E-Class turbines. Therefore, a number of assumptions were required for the dispersion modelling and

GHG emission estimations undertaken for this assessment. Where assumptions were required to develop the

necessary modelling input and emissions data, these were conservative so as ensure worse-case predictions

and prevent, as far as practicable, under estimation of potential air quality impacts or global warming potential.

Therefore, once more detail becomes available on plant design and technology, any proposed emissions miti-

gation and emissions data for the proposed DCCPP (i.e. when an EPC has been appointed for the project), this

should be compared against the input data used and assumptions made for this assessment to determine

whether further detailed assessment (e.g. re-modelling of emissions) is required to fully characterise the poten-

tial impacts of the plant on air quality and determine whether further mitigation measures are required.


Table 7-12: Impact and mitigation summary table for Air Quality



impact

Construction Phase

Release of dust and PM10 associated with construction activities.

Low sensitivity Negligible Development of a CEMP which include the following measures (for example):

Measures to reduce dust arising through appropriate stockpile management;

Controlling dust arising through management of vehicle movements and speeds;

Measures to reduce dust impacts when grading; and

Minimising emissions from construction vehicles and plant through regular servicing and maintenance.

Negligible

Release of air pollutants associated with construction traffic Low sensitivity Negligible Negligible

Operational Phase

Emissions of NO2 associated with the plant operation.

Low to high sensitivity

Negligible to moderate adverse

All combustion units and associated plant on-site will subject to a regular inspection, servicing and maintenance programme to ensure optimal efficiency and ensure, as far as practicable, all equipment is in good working order at all times;

Emissions of NOx, SO2 and PM10 from the turbines at the facility will be continuously monitored;

Further assessment of the adequacy of the suggested minimum design stack heights may be necessary when the design of the plant and the combustion units have been finalised and more accurate emission data is avail-able; and

On-going ambient air monitoring NOx, SO2 and PM10 using a continuous air quality monitoring station should be considered to verify the current baseline and impact of the proposed power plant on the air shed.

Negligible to minor adverse

Emissions of SO2 associated with the plant operation.




Emissions of PM10 associated with the plant operation.

Low to high sensitivity Negligible Negligible

Green House Gas (GHG) Emissions


Minor to critical adverse

The plant will incorporate leading combustion technology and will be operated to a high standard to ensure the efficiency of the combustion plant is maximised as far as practicable to prevent incomplete combustion and minimise methane emissions from this source.

Negligible to moderate adverse

141 | 278

8 Environmental Noise

Introduction 8.1

The potential noise and vibration impacts associated with the construction and operation of the Project are

identified and discussed within this chapter. A review of the relevant standards, legislation and Project specific

noise requirements has been undertaken in order to establish the required criteria used to determine the noise

and vibration effects. The baseline environmental conditions within the vicinity of the power plant are

established and the effects of the construction and operational phases are analysed.

Figure 8-1 Proposed location of Duba combined Cycle Power Plant (6 km north of Almuwaylih – P3)

Where appropriate, during both construction and the operation of the Project, mitigation measures are

specified that will minimise any noise or vibration impact.


Construction Phase Impacts 8.2.1The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia National Environmental Standard sets out General Construction maximum

permissible façade noise limits depending on the designated area type in Article VI – Noise from construction

activities. The permissible noise levels are presented in Table 8-1.


Table 8-1 General Construction maximum permissible facade noise levels

Area Classification Daytime LAeq, 12h dB 5 m

Evening LAeq, 12h dB 5 m

Night-time LAeq,12h dB 5 m

A, B, C 75 65 45

D 80 80 80

The area classification is as follows:

A: Quiet areas – These areas are designated quiet areas as they hold value in terms of being places of

worship, important tourist attractions, recreational park land and those areas surrounding hospitals,

schools and noise sensitive natural habitats.

B: Sensitive – Areas designated in this category will typically be dominated by residential properties

(including hostels and hotels) and may range from sparse population densities to suburban districts of

cities.

C: Mixed – This designation applies to mixed areas often within cities where there is a mix of residential

and commercial activities. This designation will also apply to retail and financial districts.

D: Non-Sensitive – The final classification of district is a predominantly industrial area where there are few

residential properties and commercial premises. This classification also applies to industrial cities and land

that is generally unpopulated.

It should be noted that the table as taken from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia National Environmental Standard

indicates LAeq,12h indices for the evening as well as the night time periods. This is generally a day time index

and the evening and night times are usually measured in terms LAeq,4h and LAeq,8h respectively. The 24

hour day is split into three segments; 0700-1800 for the day time period, 1800-2200 for the evening period, and

2200-0700 for the night time period. Our assessment is based on 12 hour days, 4 hour evenings and 8 hour

nights.

In the absence of any national environmental noise calculation methodology guidance with respect to Saudi

Arabia and where detailed information is available, it is appropriate to estimate the levels of noise and vibration

at local noise sensitive receptors in accordance with British Standard (BS) 5228:2009 Code of practice for

noise and vibration control on construction and open sites – Part 1: Noise.

This document details a methodology for estimating construction noise levels from a site based on the type of

plant, usage, and distance to receiver, barriers and ground conditions. The assessment is carried out for

multiple sources and multiple receivers.

Operational Phase Impacts 8.2.2Criteria for permitted free field external noise limits for given activities are provided within the Kingdom of Saudi

Arabia National Environmental Standards in Article IV – Community noise and presented in Table 8-2.

143 | 278

Table 8-2 Permitted free-field external noise limits for community noise, measured at any noise sensitive property within the appropriate area designation

Designation Daytime LAeq, T dB Evening LAeq, T dB Night-time LAeq, T dB

A 50 45 40

B 55 50 45

C 60 55 50 T- This is understood to be 12 hours for Day, 4 hours for Evening and 8 hours for Night time periods.

The area designations are as follows:

A: Sensitive – These areas are designated quiet areas as they hold value in terms of them being places of

worship, important tourist attractions, recreational park land and those areas surrounding hospitals,

schools and noise sensitive natural habitats.

B: Mixed – Areas designated in this category will typically be dominated by residential properties (including

hostels and hotels) and may range from sparse population densities to suburban districts of cities.

C: Non-Sensitive – This designation applies to mixed areas often within cities where there is a mix of

residential and commercial activities. This designation will also apply to retail and financial districts.

In addition criteria for noise from industrial units in areas set aside primarily for industrial activities are given in

Article V – Noise from industrial units in areas set aside primarily for industrial facilities and presented in

Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Maximum permissible free-field noise levels

Site Daytime LAeq, T dB Evening LAeq, T dB Night-time LAeq, T dB

A1 55 50 45

A2 55 50 45

A3 55 50 45

A4 65 60 50

A5 75 65 55 T- This is understood to be 12 hours for Day, 4 hours for Evening and 8 hours for Night time periods.

The site classification is as follows:

A1 – Retail refers to areas that are entirely dominated by retail, dining and recreational properties.

A2 – Warehousing refers to areas where units predominantly store products or goods for distribution and

there are no or very limited process activities.


A3 – Light industrial refers to those areas which may be mixed with or adjacent to residential properties

where minor manufacturing processes take place.

A4 – Medium density industrial areas are those when a range of manufacturing processes including

combustion take place on small to medium size sites and there is an absence of residential properties.

A5 – High density industrial refers to designated industrial cities and complexes where large scale

manufacturing, refining and petrochemical processes exist. Cement manufacture is specifically included.

In addition to the Local Environmental Standards, the IFC World Bank General EHS Guidelines are presented

in Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Noise level guidelines

Receptor Daytime 0700-2200 LAeq, 1h dB

Nigh-time 2200-0700 LAeq, 1h dB

Residential; institutional; educational 55 45

Industrial; commercial 70 70

In addition to the absolute standards provided in Table 8-4 above, it is also a requirement of the IFC that noise

impacts should not result in a maximum increase in background levels of 3dB at the nearest receptor location

off-site.

Finally, the SEC technical specifications provided sets out the noise level criteria for both indoor and outdoor

equipment as presented in Table 8-5.

Table 8-5 SEC Noise Requirements

Location Measurement Location Sound Pressure Level dB(A)

From any equipment or plant item 1 m from the source 85

Steam turbine 1 m from the steam turbine or its

acoustical enclosure and 1.2 m above ground level of personnel platforms

85

Outside diesel generator buildings for diesel generators and pumps 1 m from equipment 85

Site boundary (Day-time) 1 m outside boundary line and 1.2 m above ground level 70

Site boundary (Night-time) 1 m outside boundary line and 1.2 m above ground level 55

145 | 278

Methodology 8.3

This section describes the different assumptions and methods used to construct each sound propagation

models necessary to evaluate impacts in sensible areas during both construction and operating phases.

Construction Phase 8.3.1Construction noise has been assessed using the methodology set out in BS 5228 Part 1. It is assumed that the

main construction phases are as follows:

Site preparation;

Civil works;

Supply and installation of plant and equipment; and

MEP works.

Noise predictions have been undertaken utilising the Datakustic CadnaA noise modelling software and based

on the source noise levels presented in Table 8-6, which are in accordance with BS5228.

Table 8-6 Construction Noise Emission Data

Equipment

Sound Pressure Level, LAeq dB @10m

Site Preparation

Civil Works

Plant and Equipment

MEP Works

Dozer (41 t) 80 80 - - Tracked Excavator (40t) 79 79 - - Wheeled Loader 80 80 - - Articulated dump truck (tipping fill) 81 - - - Lorry 80 80 80 80 Vibratory Roller 74 74 - - Large Rotary Bored piling rig 83 - - - Cement Mixer truck - 75 - - Tracked Mobile Crane - 77 77 - Lifting Platform - - 67 67 Tower Crane - 77 77 77 Power for site cabins 66 66 66 66 Water pump (diesel) 68 68 - - Angle Grinder - 80 80 -

The noise predictions are based on the following assumptions:

There is one of each item of equipment on the site;

The ground is hard and reflective;

The works are spread mainly across the turbine and HRSG sectors.


Operational Noise 8.3.2Operational noise levels have been assessed using the methodology set out in ISO 9613:2. This methodology

uses the following parameters to estimate environmental noise levels:

Noise source sound power level;

Geometric spreading;

Screening and ground effect;

Air absorption (temperature and humidity).

The ISO standard also considers downward winds: in other words, noises are pushed toward sensible areas

and favourable sound propagation weather conditions are therefore considered. This worst case scenario is

used to evaluate if mitigation measures are necessary.

The main noise sources are related to the gas turbines and other associated systems. There are 6 turbines

proposed (4 gas turbines and 2 steam turbines). Noise models for the steady state base load were developed

and the following scenario was considered:

Combined cycle for Turbines – Proposed plant operation;

There was no noise data available for the proposed units at the time of the report, therefore historic data from

previous work with SEC was utilised and can be seen in Table 8-7, Table 8-8 and Table 8-9.

Figure 8-2 Screen shot of the developed CadnaA 3D model

No cooling system is mentioned in this report since the power plant is working under an open loop system

(sea water). Therefore a water pump was placed as described in the power plant general layout.

147 | 278

Table 8-7 Sound Power Levels of the Gas Turbine Generator

Section

Sound Power Level

Overall

dB(A)

Octave Band Centre Frequencies Hz, dB

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Inlet Ducting (including filter house) 88 101 94 93 82 74 82 54 26 Inlet Filter Face 99 111 104 100 95 93 90 84 76 Accessory Module 103 107 101 98 97 97 99 93 88 Inlet Plenum 103 93 90 92 91 92 101 92 80 Turbine Compartment 113 115 110 108 106 104 109 104 99 GT Exhaust Diffuser Enclosure 112 121 115 111 108 104 104 103 100 GT Load Compartment 105 109 109 104 99 97 100 97 90 GT Generator 107 105 105 101 104 102 101 96 87 Cooling Water Module 107 99 113 105 104 104 94 89 91

Table 8-8 Sound Power Levels for the Steam Turbine package

Section

Sound Power Level

Overall

dB(A)


63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

STG Summary 107 112 108 107 106 101 96 94 93 STG Generator 108 106 105 102 104 103 102 97 88 95 kV transformer (fans on) 75 71 72 72 72 70 68 65 60

Table 8-9 Sound Power Levels for the HRSG

Section

Sound Power Level

Overall

dB(A)


63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

HRSG Wall 96 84 89 92 88 83 79 55 20 Stack Wall 91 84 88 86 79 66 71 29 20 Stack Exit (90-degrees) 95 91 92 77 75 80 70 46 24 Salt water pump 104 97 97 98 99 98 98 94 89

The sound pressure levels for the gas turbine step-up transformer, steam turbine step-up transformer as well

as the auxiliary transformer were assumed to have a diffuse sound field pressure of 75 dB(A). Furthermore

85 dB(A) at 1 m was utilized for the sound pressure levels of all pumps used at the plant (except for the salt

water pump).

In addition it has been assumed that the building fabric of all buildings including Gas Turbine Generators

(GTG), Heat Recovery Steam Generators (HRSG), Steam Turbine Generator (STG) enclosures and pump

enclosures will provide a minimum weighted sound reduction index of 30 dB Rw. This is typically achieved

using an aluminium cladding panel.


The stated assumptions and noise data were used to create a noise model for the steady state base load,

however this model did not include:

Start-up/shut down of the power plant;

Commissioning phase;

Failure conditions;

Emergency conditions; and

Other abnormal operating conditions.

The predicted results from the noise model are given in Section 8.5

Vibration 8.3.3Operational vibration can be an issue with power station developments within a 200 m radius of vibration-

sensitive properties but extremely unlikely beyond a distance of 500 m. Site visits and a review of the

topographical drawings have indicated that the nearest affected premises are beyond this zone of influence (a

fish farm is located approximately 1 km north-west of the main generators – P2 on Figure 8-1). As such,

operational vibration impacts have not been assessed. Any source of vibration significant enough to be

perceived at or beyond the boundary would be potentially destructive close to the source and it is therefore not

considered that this condition would be allowed to occur.


In order to fully quantify the existing baseline noise levels, measurements were under-taken at three

measurement locations around the Project site. The measurement locations are presented in Figure 8-3 and

described in Table 8-10.

149 | 278

Figure 8-3 Noise measurement locations

Table 8-10 Description of noise measurement locations

Location Description

P1 NE corner of plant site. The site is situated approximately 30 metres from the highway and 5 metres from an ungraded track.

The highway traffic was light but includes a high proportion of HGVs. A single car passed close by on the ungraded track. Wind was light and steady throughout the measurement period.

P2 NW of the site near to disused industrial facility. Fish farm about 500 m further north.

The site is situated quite close to the sea; However, the sea conditions were calm so unlikely to have affected noise levels significantly. No real source of noise at this location with the excep-tion of the distant road and some very infrequent off-road traffic in the area.

P3 Northern edge of Almuwaylih (the closest town) near to sports field and mosque. A paved road and unpaved road were also adjacent with very infrequent traffic movements (perhaps two or three vehicles passed nearby). However, there was some concrete mixing and loading activi-ties taking place nearby which was quite consistently noisy. Construction stopped during the night period.


Figure 8-4 Noise measurement location P1 – Future site location – 30 m from road

Figure 8-5 Noise measurement location P2 – Fish farm

Figure 8-6 Noise measurement location P3 (Almuwaylih sports field and mosque)

151 | 278

The noise survey was undertaken between the 20th of May and the 24th of May 2014. A total of ten, fifteen

minute measurements were completed and were averaged at each location (day and night). The results of the

noise survey are presented in Table 8-11. Please see the acronym table for a short explanation of each sound

index.

Table 8-11 Measured baseline noise data

Position LAeq Lmax LA10 LA90

Day Night Day Night Day Night Day Night

P1 57.7 53.8 72.8 71.4 61.2 54.0 39.0 20.7 P2 52.8 35.5 71.0 41.2 49.0 36.7 35.0 33.9 P3 52.0 37.3 68.6 49.6 52.2 41.2 42.0 27.9

It should be noted that during the survey period winds conditions were acceptable and therefore are

considered to be representative of the typical noise environment.

Assessment of Impacts 8.5

In this section the different construction and operational phases of the Project will be studied to detect potential

noise overshoot and recommend mitigation measures where necessary.

Sensitive Receptors 8.5.1The Project site is located approximately 6 km to the north of Almuwaylih. There are currently no noise

sensitive receptors within the Project site, although the fish farm is located approximately 1 km away. In the

future however, noise sensitive receptors will be introduced to the Project site and immediate surrounds as part

of the Project, which include an administrative building and housing compound. Evaluation points renamed with

a “b” are in the same area as the baseline measurements, but are directly positioned at the sensitive receptor

(closest residence for example).

Table 8-12 Noise Sensitive Receptor Locations

Noise Sensitive Receptor Location

P0 Administrative Building 27°45'27.17"N, 35°27'07.06"E

P1b Company housing compound 27°45'58.40"N, 35°26'52.12"E

P2b Fish Farm 27°46'06.90"N, 35°26'02.30"E

P3 Town of Almuwaylih (mosque and sports centre) 27°42'14.73"N, 35°28'34.95"E

The noise sensitive receptors in the vicinity of the proposed works site are shown in Figure 8-7.


Figure 8-7 Potential noise sensitive areas

Construction Phase Impacts 8.5.2The construction phase impact assessment has been undertaken based on the principles described in

Section 8.3.1. A noise map has been created for two worst case construction stage scenarios based on the

levels provided for the site preparation and civil works stage, which demonstrate the impacts to existing

sensitive receptors.

The predicted noise levels for the two construction phases as shown in Table 8-13.

Table 8-13 Noise impact for construction phases

Evaluation point

Area Classification

Recommended maximum night time noise levels Site preparation Civil work

P2b Fish Farm B 45 39 39

P3 Almuwaylih village A 45 13 11

Simulations indicate that the noise levels will be negligible in Almuwaylih village given the distance between the

plant and Almuwaylih, which causes any noise to dissipate before reaching any receptor in that location.

The fish farm, being closer to the Project site, will receive a greater noise contribution. The modelling however

predicts that the noise levels will be in conformity with the applicable noise regulations.

153 | 278

Table 8-14 Construction Noise –Site preparation noise map

1250 m

0


Table 8-15 Construction Noise –Civil works noise map

1200 m

0

155 | 278

Operational Phase Impacts 8.5.3The operational phase assessment has been undertaken based on the principles described in Section 8.3.2

and the results are presented in the form of noise maps in Figure 8-8.

Table 8-16 Noise impact for operational phases

Evaluation point Area Classification

Noise Limit (Night-time)

dB LAeq, T Combined

cycle Single cycle

P0 (Admin. Building) C 50 49 47

P1b (Housing Compound) B 45 46 43

P2b (Fish farm) B 45 45 43

P3 (Almuwaylih) A 40 23 20

The predicted noise levels mainly meet the IFC requirements set out in Table 8-4 and are typical for major

industrial developments. There is only one sensitive receptor that is exceeding IFC standards by 1dBA.

Furthermore the results indicate that the predicted sound pressure levels will meet the PME and SEC daytime

and night time criteria to the exception of the company housing compound. Night time levels are 1 dBA higher

than the regulations recommends for this sensitive receptor.

Noise levels generated by Duba power plant will not be heard in Almuwaylih village.

The Administrative building being mainly for work purposes has a greater sound limit. The noise level

simulated for both operational phase comply with Saudi Arabia noise regulations. Nevertheless, noise levels

are sufficiently high to consider this aspect when constructing the outer envelope of the administrative building.

A good working environment where concentration is required has noise levels of approximately 45 dBA.

Therefore, the outer envelope of the building should provide sufficient sound insulation to meet that criterion.


Figure 8-8 Operational Noise –Combined Cycle Noise Map

1350 m

0

157 | 278

Mitigation Measures, Residual/Cumulative Effects 8.6

Construction Phase Mitigation Measures 8.6.1The predicted construction noise levels during the construction phase are below the criteria therefore no

additional mitigation measures are required.

It is however recommended to follow ‘As Low as Reasonably Practicable’ methods of noise and vibration

control such as:

It is recommended that regular noise monitoring is undertaken within close proximity of noise sensitive

locations, if future works include activities which are known to cause significant levels of noise;

In order to control the duration of noise and vibration from the construction activities, no noise from the

works will be audible at the boundary of any occupied residential property outside the hours of:

Saturday to Thursday 07:00 - 19:00; and

No working on Friday or Public Holidays.

If noise exceeds the required standards the use of acoustic screens or noise attenuation measures will be

implemented;

Stationary machinery such as generators must be kept in enclosed structures during the night;

Items of plant on site operating intermittently will be shut down in the intervening periods between use;

Electrically powered plant should be preferred, where practicable, to mechanically powered alternatives.

All mechanically powered plant should be fitted with suitable silencers;

Use of vibratory hammer for piling rather than impact hammer to reduce noise levels;

High frequency vibrator hammer to be used rather than low frequency based on the type of piling;

Moveable acoustic sound barriers for the hammer and piling equipment to be provided near to receptors

such as the adjacent staff accommodation and other facilities;

Delivery vehicles should be prohibited from waiting within or near the construction site with their engines

running. The movement of heavy vehicles during the night will be avoided wherever practical;

Noisy equipment and machinery will be replaced with less noisy alternatives or provide equipment that is

specifically designed with noise inhibitors, such as generators and compressors with silencers and muffled

jackhammers; and

It is recommended that a grievance procedure be implemented by the EPC Contractor. This will provide a

mechanism for adjacent staff or nearby residents to make representations if significant noise disturbance

occurs.


Construction Phase Residual Effects 8.6.2Given the nature of the locality of sensitive receptors and the baseline noise survey, it is anticipated that the

overall residual impact for construction works will be temporary and of negligible significance.

Construction Phase Cumulative Effects 8.6.3Construction noise has been assessed within the construction noise section above. It is considered that the

cumulative effects of these noise sources are negligible on account of the temporary nature of construction

activities and the considerable distance of the nearest off-site noise sensitive location.

Operational Phase Mitigation Measures 8.6.4Using historical noise data for the plant equipment, the predicted noise emissions from the Duba Power Plant

during the operational phase have a negligible effect on the noise environment. However, the predicted results

are exceeding the night time noise criteria at the company housing compound.

Therefore, the following noise mitigation measures are recommended:

Move the equipment further into the site

Use plant equipment with lower noise levels

Use screens/ enclosures or an acoustic berm to achieve the recommended limits

Ensure that the buildings housing the equipment provide adequate sound insulation

It is also important to note that there are also occupational noise standards that need to be maintained as part

of the Health and Safety of the employees at the facility. It is therefore important that noise levels in working

areas are limited to less than 85 dB(A) at 1 m from any noise generating equipment.

It is recommended that as part of the Operational Management Plan regular noise monitoring is undertaken at

the site boundary to show compliance with PME noise standards. It is further recommended that a full

occupational noise survey is undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees.

Operational Phase Residual Effects 8.6.5Due to the distance of the power plant to the nearest town, it is expected that the overall impact of the residual

operational noise has a negligible significance.

It is anticipated that the overall residual impact for operational works at the accommodation building will be

1dBA above the night time criteria. However, this is in accordance with IFC guidelines and is typical for major

industrial processes.

Operational Phase Cumulative Effects 8.6.6Operational noise has been assessed within the section above. The assessment has indicated that the noise

from the different plant equipment will elevate the existing noise climate. However, it is considered that the

cumulative effects of these noise sources are minor due to the relative importance of the nearest noise

159 | 278

sensitive receptor. Housing compound should be constructed according the site proximity and the town

Almuwaylih should not be impacted by the power plant noise contribution.

There is the potential for further developments in the area, but there is insufficient information to enable an

assessment at this time.


An assessment of the potential noise and vibration effects for the Proect during both construction and operation

has been undertaken.

The construction phase noise impacts have been predicted based upon noise data contained in BS5228. The

results of the assessment show that noise levels are within the recommended limits and recommendations for

the on-going monitoring of the noise levels associated with construction activity have been made.

The operational phase noise impacts have been predicted based upon historical noise data for the intended

equipment. The results of the assessment are within the recommended limits for most sensitive areas;

however, they exceed the night time criteria for the company housing compound. Given that the nearest town is

6 km to the south of the site, it is expected that the overall residual operation noise will have a negligible

significance at this location (Almuwaylih).


Table 8-17 Impact and mitigation summary table for Environmental Noise



impact

Construction Phase

Noise associated with construction activities. Low sensitivity Negligible

No mitigation measures are required but it is however recommended to follow ‘As Low As Reasonably Practicable’ methods of noise and vibration control such as:

It is recommended that regular noise monitoring is undertaken within close proximity of noise sensitive locations, if future works include activities which are known to cause significant levels of noise;

In order to control the duration of noise and vibration from the construction activities, no noise from the works will be audible at the boundary of any occupied residential property outside the hours of:

- Saturday to Thursday 07:00 - 19:00; and

- No working on Friday or Public Holidays.

If noise exceeds the required standards the use of acoustic screens or noise attenuation measures will be implemented.

Negligible

Operational Phase

Noise from the plant operation. Low to high sensitivity Negligible

Development of an OEMP which include the following measures (for example):

Move the equipment further into the site;

Use plant equipment with lower noise levels;

Use screens / enclosures to achieve the recommended limits;

Ensure that the buildings housing the equipment provide adequate sound insulation;

Regular noise monitoring shall be undertaken at the site boundary to show compliance with PME noise standards; and

A full occupational noise survey shall be undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees.

Negligible

161 | 278

9 Soil, Groundwater and Contamination

Introduction 9.1

This chapter considers the soil and geological conditions on site together with an appreciation of contamination

issues. The aim is to identify any potential soil and groundwater impacts associated with the development of

the Project.

The assessment considers potential contamination issues associated with both the construction and

operational phases of the development and provides appropriate pollution control best practice measures.

These measures are summarised below and set out in full in Chapter 16: Framework Construction

Environmental Management Plan and Chapter 17: Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan.


National Legislation and Standards 9.2.1

The General Environmental Regulations (2001) specifies the following requirements in regards to protecting

soil and groundwater from environmental harm:

Article 13.2:

‘To preserve the soil and land and limit is deterioration or contamination’.

Article 13.2.1:

‘To take all precautions required to prevent and control contamination and degradation of soil and land,

remediate degraded and contaminated soil and use best available means and technologies for this purpose in

accordance with the standards and criteria’.

IFC Standards and International Best Practice 9.2.2Sector-specific guidance documents on pollution prevention good practices produced by the IFC are relevant,

which includes:

IFC ‘EHS Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants’ (2008); and

IFC ‘Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines: Contaminated Land’ (2007).

This assessment also considers the likely impacts upon soils and geology as a result of Project activities in

relation to the updated IFC Performance Standards; namely:

Performance Standard 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention.


For reference, the International Finance Corporation (IFC, 2007) defines land as being contaminated when ‘it

contains hazardous materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally occurring levels’. Further,

‘contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface soils that, through leaching and transport may

affect groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites’.

Additional sector-specific guidance documents on pollution prevention best practice guidance developed by the

UK Government and others have been used to inform the assessment, where relevant. These include:

Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control (IPPC) Technical Guidance Note S3 1.01 ‘Combustion

Processes Supplementary Guidance Note’;

The Environment Agency (UK) Pollution Prevention Guideline 6 (PPG6) Working at Construction and

Demolition Sites (2003);

The Environment Agency (UK) Pollution Prevention Guideline 11 (PPG11) Preventing Pollution on

Industrial Sites (2003);

The Environment Agency (UK) Pollution Prevention Guideline 21 (PPG21) Pollution Incident Response

Planning (2003); and

Environmental Protection Agency (US) Office of Compliance (1997) ‘Sector Notebook project - Profile of

Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation Industry’.

Methodology 9.3

The methodology used to conduct this assessment is described below:

Desktop Information Review 9.3.1

A review of available information was made in order to provide a background to the geological and

hydrogeological (groundwater) conditions within the region and the study site.

Site Visit 9.3.2

A Phase I (non-intrusive) Assessment was undertaken to provide an initial appreciation of existing ground

conditions and contamination status of the site. The Phase I Assessment comprised visiting certain areas of the

site and making a visual assessment with regards to, inter alia:

Potential soil and surface water contamination;

Bulk chemical storage, focusing on bulk above and below ground storage tanks and associated piping

equipment;

Hazardous and non-hazardous wastes;

Signs of groundwater abstraction;

163 | 278

Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and the presence of equipment with the potential to contain PCBs;

The presence of ozone depleting substances, e.g. chlorofluorocarbons; and,

The presence of asbestos containing materials.

Current best practice guidance in Western Europe and the USA advocates the use of a conceptual risk

assessment model to establish the potential links between a hazardous source and a sensitive receptor via an

exposure pathway, as illustrated by Table 9-1 below.

The concept behind this approach is that, without each of the three fundamental elements (source, pathway,

and receptor) there can be no potential contamination risk. Thus, the presence of a contamination hazard at a

particular site does not necessarily imply the existence of associated risks.

Table 9-1 Contamination Risk Assessment

The IFC (2007) is also instructive in providing a useful definition of ‘exposure pathway(s)’; as ‘A combination of

the route of migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g. leaching into potable groundwater) and

exposure routes (e.g. ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would allow receptor(s) to come into actual

contact with contaminants.’


The Project site lies along the coast in an area classified throughout as coastal plain and lowlands, running

almost the entire length of the Red Sea. The plains’ surfaces comprise of raised Quartenary coralline reef, up to

30m above sea level, but these are observed to go up to 300m asl. Inland from these plains, the pediments and

promontories lead to the adjacent mountains.

The soil of the Project area is characterized by strongly saline, highly permeable soils with high concentration of

salts in the surface layer, forming a dry crust. This type of soil is typical of low lying coastal sands where the

water table is high, often within 50 cm of the surface, more or less throughout the year.

The soils of this coastal area are classed under the Calciorthid-Camborthid soil association, mainly found on

gently undulating plains along the western edge of Saudi Arabia. This soil association comprises 50 percent

Calciorthids, 30 percent Camborthids and 20 percent other soil types.


Local Seismicity 9.4.1

The site is located within the seismically active Arabian tectonic plate, which for the last twenty million years

has been colliding with the Eurasian plate. The western boundary of the Arabian plate is known as a ‘transform

fault zone’ where the two plates grind past each other, and include the Dead Sea Zone (Ref. NASA Johnson

Space Centre); whilst rifts of the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden constitute the southern boundary, and the Zagros

and Makran mountain ranges mark the present collision zone. Figure 9-1 below provides a graphical

representation of the main plate tectonic features within the Kingdom.

Figure 9-1 Plate Tectonics of Saudi Arabia

[Ref. Saudi Aramco World – Volcanic Arabia (www.saudiaramcoworld.com/issue/200602/volcanic.arabia.htm)]

As per the Saudi Geological Survey, National Centre for Earthquakes and Volcanoes, the most active area for

seismic activity within the Kingdom is along the Gulf of Aqaba (known as the Dead Sea transform fault), and is

an area where large and damaging earthquakes can occur quite regularly, with the last major event taking

place in 1995 (the ‘Haql Earthquake’ which had a magnitude of 7.3 and which caused significant damage on

both sides of the Gulf). Earthquakes of magnitude 6 are common along the spreading axis of the Red Sea but

they are generally not felt onshore and appear to pose little risk.

Whilst the wider area is regarded as seismically active, it is thought that the general environs of the proposed

facility is located within a relatively quiet zone, typically without locally significant seismicity. Indeed, as the

165 | 278

Saudi Geological Survey pronounce, the ‘risk of damage from earthquakes is quite low over most of Saudi

Arabia, the main areas of risk being near the Gulf of Aqaba and Jizan, with lower risk in the west near the Red

Sea and in some of the harrats (Saudi Geological Society).’

The caution is that, whilst major advances have been made in the prediction of the location and magnitudes of

earthquakes and other acts of nature, the field remains an inexact science and further clarification should be

sought as required.

Groundwater 9.4.2

The Project site is coastal with an elevation of approximately 19m above sea level. The groundwater at the site

is therefore expected to be shallow and strongly influenced by the marine environment. Freshwater runoff from

the mountainous area inland is also likely to have an influence. Groundwater is expected therefore expected to

be brackish.

Existing Contamination 9.4.3

No evidence of existing soil contamination was observed on site during the site visit on the 5th May 2014. A

decommissioned industrial facility is present approximately 500m to the north of the Project site which is a

potential source of contamination.

Sensitive Receptors 9.5

The soil strata within and adjoining the site and groundwater are considered as sensitive receptors for the

purposes of this assessment, which may be subject to impacts, including the mobilisation of existing

contamination during construction and spillages of hazardous materials during construction and operation.

During construction the most critical sensitive receptors would be construction staff that may be exposed to any

existing contamination at the site, particularly associated with ground preparation works and excavations.

During operation the site staff and residents of the SEC Housing Area will be the key receptors.

Assessment of Construction and Operational Impacts 9.6


The primary source for potential contamination is considered to be existing soil contamination, which if present

could be mobilised through site construction activities and surface water run-off during the infrequent periods of

rainfall. However, since no obvious signs of contamination were identified during the Phase I Investigation, the

potential for such mobilisation is considered minimal, although if present, may result in a moderate negative

impact prior to the implementation of appropriate mitigation measures.


Some aqueous effluents from temporary construction facilities, including dewatering, washing down, dust

damping activities and concrete work, may lead to the contamination of soil. This impact is likely to be

temporary in nature and will only be applicable during the construction phase. Prior to mitigation, it is

considered that the impact will be of minor negative significance.

The remainder of the potential impacts are associated with the management of waste and hazardous materials.

These impacts will generally be associated with poor storage or handling arrangements of these materials

resulting in chronic or acute spillages of contaminants to land. Prior to the implementation of mitigation

measures, it is considered that the impact will be of minor negative significance.

During construction, there is a potential for construction workers to come into contact with contaminated soils

and hazardous materials. It is therefore important that appropriate measures are taken to protect construction

contractors during site clearance, excavation and general construction activities. It is considered that this may

result in a moderate negative impact prior to mitigation.

The improper storage and use of other hazardous materials during the construction phase such as chemical

solvents, cleaning fluids, fuels and oils etc., may lead to spillages and leaks that may result in soil and/or

surface water contamination. The above issues may result in a moderate negative impact prior to the

implementation of appropriate mitigation measures.

If applicable, cement batching plants require large amounts of “wash-out” water which has a high pH and high

concentration of suspended solids. In addition, plant and equipment wash water may contain some

contaminants such as hydrocarbons although traces of other contaminants may be present. These two waste

water processes can affect the quality of groundwater if discharged to land. The generation of wastewater

during the construction phase is a direct, temporary minor negative impact prior to the implementation of

mitigation measures.


During the operation of the plant, the key contamination issues are likely to be associated with potential leaks

and spills associated with the plant operations and storage of hazardous materials on-site. The materials with

potential to cause contamination include: fuels (such as associated with diesel generator operation); oils (such

as associated with the maintenance and repair of equipment); lubricants (such as those associated with plant

equipment maintenance and repair): and a variety of chemicals.

Prior to mitigation measures being implemented, the use and storage of materials on site with hazardous

properties and the potential to cause contamination is likely to result in a moderate negative impact. However,

adequate handling and storage arrangements complemented by appropriate procedural control measures

would diminish such an impact substantially.

There is the potential for contaminants to be mobilised during periods of rainfall, which may then be discharged

into the wider environment, such as the recharge area of an underlying aquifer. This is considered to be an

impact of moderate negative significance.

167 | 278

Mitigation Measures, Residual and Cumulative Effects 9.7


There will be no discharge or overflow of sanitary waste on site. Modular wastewater storage tanks will be

introduced to the site to provide adequate containment facilities for the construction workforce.

Hazardous materials such as fuel oils and chemicals used during the construction phase that have the potential

to cause contamination will be managed through the CEMP, to be developed by the EPC Contractor. This

CEMP would provide detailed Environmental Control Plans for construction workers and personnel and sub-

contractors including personnel safety, site conduct, security, storage of hazardous material and emergency

preparedness.

The contractor shall be fully responsible that all demolitions and removal of any abandoned facilities are

undertaken in a safe way.

The key control measures incorporated in to the CEMP to promote on-site environmental good practice during

the construction process in relation to the storage of fuels, chemicals and oils on-site must include:

Substitution of any hazardous substances with safer alternatives;

Changing work methods in order to prevent the production or release of potentially contaminative materials;

Enclosing the process or handling system as far as reasonably practicable;

Using a potentially hazardous material away from high risk areas;

Limiting the quantities of hazardous substances during the construction process to reduce the risk of

spillages;

Ensuring that all substances are stored in suitable, undamaged, containers that are clearly marked with the

type, nature and content of the material. This will ensure that all staff are aware of the material and its

properties;

Appropriate storm water management procedures to ensure that contaminants are not mobilised into the

wider environment;

Where practicable, retaining substances during the construction process in a centrally controlled storage

compound in accordance with World Bank Group guidance, and appropriate risk assessment based on the

material safety data sheet provided by manufacturer (the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health

[COSHH Regulations 2002] which provides a similar framework in the UK);

The storage area should: prevent damage to containers by any means; prevent the unauthorized use of

material (e.g. responsible person to sign materials in and out of the compound); can contain any spillage

from materials / substances (by the use of an impermeable surface and walls); and, separate any materials

that may become a hazard if combined;


Returning any unused materials, spent containers, contaminated clothing, rags and tools to the central

compound for appropriate disposal;

As part of the CEMP, emergency clean-up procedures will need to be in place in the event of any potential

spillages; and,

Staff and personnel will need to be briefed through toolbox talks and training on the control of substances

and informing them of all control measures and location of spill response equipment on-site.

In addition the CEMP will also contain control measures to be adopted during the construction stage to

minimise potential impacts associated with leaks and spills from on-site activities. Such measures will include

the following:

All plant should be regularly maintained and appropriate drip-trays should be located below mobile plant

such as generators;

Washout from concrete mixing plant or from cleaning ready-mix concrete lorries is contaminated with

cement and therefore is highly alkaline. This should not be allowed to enter any watercourse/drainage

channel and should be re-used on site where possible; and,

All vehicle/plant re-fuelling should be closely supervised and appropriate spill trays utilised where

appropriate.

The on-going evolution of the site CEMP will need to be agreed with the client, the EPC contractor, and with

PME in order to ensure that any potential environmental and health and safety issues are adequately managed.

This will ensure good working procedures are followed and will decrease the potential risk of pollution incidents

occurring. In addition, appropriate precautions will be implemented to prevent construction workers from having

contact with potentially contaminated soils. Construction workers will be required to wear appropriate personal

protective clothing and be subject to adequate training / awareness.


The implementation of a detailed CEMP for the construction phase of the development is imperative in order to

ensure that appropriate measures are implemented to minimise any potential risks from contamination to the

workforce and the environment during the construction phase, including any groundwater sources, during the

construction phase. Once these measures are followed, the assessment is of a minor negative residual effect.

Construction Phase Cumulative Impacts 9.7.3

The potential for cumulative effects to occur, as a result of the construction phase, is negligible. Type I

cumulative effects – i.e. impacts associated with other construction related impacts - are not expected. Site

investigation work, which will be undertaken at the project site in advance of the commencement of the

construction phase, will however determine if there are any existing issues at the project site associated with

past or current uses.

169 | 278


The key measures for preventing contamination during the operational phase will be designed into the project.

This includes appropriate designs in relation to the following:

Appropriate containment systems around storage tanks (e.g. fuels, oils etc.);

Leak detection facilities;

Fire prevention measures; and

Appropriate storm water management systems.

An OEMP will also be developed which will contain the key operating procedures that are to be implemented

for the project to prevent contamination of the ground and surface water. Such measures will include:

Hazardous chemicals and materials to be appropriately stored on-site in secure, bunded compounds and

located on an impervious surface. The storage areas will need to be clearly labelled with material safety

data sheets (MSDS) maintained as part of the on-site record keeping;

Details and properties for each material should be clearly detailed which include its nature (poisonous,

corrosive, flammable), prohibitions on its disposal (dumpster, drain, sewer) and the recommended disposal

method (recycle, sewer, burn, storage, landfill). A signed checklist should be developed for users of

hazardous materials detailing amount taken, amount used, amount returned and disposal of spent material;

All contaminated effluent shall receive appropriate treatment at the source of pollution before being

collected and discharged. Please note that further measures relating to water and wastewater resources

appear in the pertinent chapter of this report; and

Further, the Client dictates that every ‘effort shall be taken to ensure that the risk of pollution is eliminated.

Provisions shall be made to bund all oil storage facilities. All delivery areas shall have suitable drainage

gully provisions to all sides to prevent spillages to spreading to the surrounding ground.

Other measures in relation to personnel safety, housekeeping and security, on-site awareness training and

emergency preparedness policies are also essential. Such measures will form part of the OEMP with the

overall aim of avoiding incidences which may lead to potential contamination issues. Such measures will

include, inter alia:

To protect and promote health and safety issues to all staff and personnel on-site;

To minimise exposure to potential hazards and safety issues and reduction in risk from injury and health

risk;

To minimise impacts on the environment from the plant activities taking into account the necessary balance

between economic efficiency, energy requirements and environmental protection;

Promote good practice measures in terms of health and safety to comply, as a minimum, with KSA law and

policy requirements;


Provide appropriate security measures to ensure that any potential issues that may result in contamination

are avoided;

Promote appropriate safety zoning to the hazards that may be present and to ensure that any spillages or

incidents are avoided;

Provide emergency response procedures to any potential incidents to ensure that contamination incidents

are controlled if they occur;

Provision of written standard operating procedures for all processes and appropriate document control;

Provision of awareness training for all employees including management, office staff and technical staff on

pollution prevention and control techniques and best practices;

The establishment of daily checklists for plant and office areas to confirm cleanliness and adherence to

proper storage and security. Specific employees should be assigned specific inspection responsibilities and

given the authority to remedy any problems found;

Continuous monitoring and reporting of the plants’ performance should be undertaken in order to establish

baseline conditions and whether conditions are improving or deteriorating; and,

Regular reviews of emergency response procedures should be undertaken, including a contingency plan

for spills, leaks, weather extremes etc.


It is anticipated that the detailed OEMP for the site will dictate good on-site working practices the risk of

pollution incidents will be minimised resulting in a minor negative residual effect.


It is anticipated that the risk of cumulative impacts during the operational phase is low. Best practice measures

implemented as part of the OEMP will reduce the risk of contamination events occurring at the Project site.

Summary & Conclusions 9.8

It is recommended that an investigation of existing contamination associated with the decommissioned

industrial facility is undertaken prior to any major excavation works take place on site.

It is a requirement that any existing contaminated materials on site identified during site preparation works,

including soils, are considered as hazardous waste and disposed of in a licensed landfill site prior to site

preparation works by an appropriately licensed contractor. Notwithstanding the above, intrusive investigations

will need to be enacted if additional significant pollutant sources or contaminations are identified prior to or

during the site preparation works.

171 | 278

In addition, during the construction and operational phases of the project, there is a potential for workers and

visitors to come into contact with contaminated land and hazardous or semi-hazardous wastes, as well as the

potential for leaks and spills to adversely affect the wider environment. The CEMP and OEMP must be

implemented to manage these risks and to reduce the likelihood of any future negative environmental and

social impacts.


Table 9-2 Impact and mitigation summary table for soil, groundwater and contamination



impact

Construction Phase

Impacts associated with mobilisation of existing contamination.

Medium to high sensitivity

Negligible to major adverse

An investigation of existing soil and groundwater contamination associated with the decommissioned industrial facility should be undertaken prior to excavation works taking place on site.


Discharge of aqueous effluents from temporary construction facilities and activities e.g. dust damping activities, sanitary wastewater.

Low to medium sensitivity

Minor adverse

Adherence to the CEMP ensuring good working practices are followed, thereby decreasing the risk of pollution incidents occurring. The CEMP will include the following measures includes (for example):

There will be no discharge or overflow of sanitary waste on site. Modular wastewater storage tanks will be introduced to the site to provide adequate containment facilities for the construction workforce;

Changing work methods in order to prevent the production or release of potentially contaminative materials;

Substitution of any hazardous substances with safer alternatives; and

Limiting the quantities of hazardous substances during the construction process to reduce the risk of spillages.

Negligible

Impacts associated with management of waste and hazardous materials resulting from poor on-site management.

Low to medium sensitivity Minor adverse Negligible

Potential for construction workers to come into contact with contaminated soils and hazardous materials.

Medium to high sensitivity

Moderate adverse

The CEMP shall provide detailed Environmental Control Plans for construction workers and personnel and sub-contractors including personnel safety, site conduct, security, storage of hazardous material and emergency preparedness; and

Staff and personnel will need to be briefed through toolbox talks and training on the control of substances and informing them of all control measures and location of spill response equipment on-site.


Improper use and storage of hazardous materials such as solvents, cleaning fluids, fuels and oils.


Moderate adverse

Adherence to the CEMP ensuring good working practices are followed, thereby decreasing the risk of pollution incidents occurring. The CEMP will include the following measures includes (for example):

Ensuring that all substances are stored in suitable, undamaged, containers that are clearly marked with the type, nature and content of the material. This will ensure that all staff are aware of the material and its properties; and


173 | 278



impact

Impacts upon groundwater resulting from improper discharge of wastewater e.g. ‘wash out’ water from cement batching plants.


Minor adverse

Washout from concrete mixing plant or from cleaning ready-mix concrete lorries is contaminated with cement and therefore is highly alkaline. This should not be allowed to enter any watercourse/drainage channel and should be re-used on site where possible;

Negligible

Operational Phase

Contamination resulting from the use and storage of hazardous materials on-site.


Moderate adverse

The key measures for preventing contamination during the operational phase will be designed into the project. An OEMP will be also developed which include the following measures (for example):

Hazardous chemicals and materials to be appropriately stored on-site in secure, bunded compounds and located on an impervious surface. The storage areas will need to be clearly labelled with material safety data sheets (MSDS) maintained as part of the on-site record keeping;

Details and properties for each material should be clearly detailed which include its nature (poisonous, corrosive, flammable), prohibitions on its disposal (dumpster, drain, sewer) and the recommended disposal method (recycle, sewer, burn, storage, landfill). A signed checklist should be developed for users of hazardous materials detailing amount taken, amount used, amount returned and disposal of spent material;

Provide emergency response procedures to any potential incidents to ensure that contamination incidents are controlled if they occur; and

Continuous monitoring and reporting of the plants’ performance should be undertaken in order to establish baseline conditions and whether conditions are improving or deteriorating.


Impacts upon the wider environment e.g. recharge area of an underlying aquifer resulting from contamination potentially mobilised during periods of rainfall.


Moderate adverse



10 Waste Management

Introduction 10.1

This chapter presents the results of a solid waste assessment for the Project. The potential impacts that may

arise from waste generated during the construction and operational phases are identified.

The chapter also details opportunities for implementing mitigation measures together with good practice for the

storage, transfer and disposal of waste in order to reduce the potential impacts arising during each phase of the

development. These measures are summarised below and set out in full in Chapter 16: Framework

Construction Environmental Management Plan and Chapter 17: Framework Operational Environmental

Management Plan.


National Legislation and Standards 10.2.1

The GER, 2001 makes specific reference to the control of solid waste materials and, in particular, waste

materials which are classified as hazardous in terms of their impacts on the environment. The following are of

particular note:

Article 14 (Hazardous Waste Management) identifies the Presidency of Meteorology and the Environment

(PME) as the responsible authority for the regulation of waste materials; and

GER Appendix 4 “Hazardous Waste Control Rules and Procedures” provides details regarding the

classifications of waste and the obligations placed on producers, transporters and waste disposal

authorities to ensure environmental pollution is avoided. Prior to shipping any hazardous waste outside the

facility, the generator of hazardous waste shall comply with the requirements for packaging, record keeping

and duty of care obligations.

Further, the revised PME environmental standards issued in 2012 include the following, which are of relevance

to this assessment:

Environmental Standard 8 - Waste Acceptance Criteria;

Environmental Standards 9 - Waste Classification;

Environmental Standard 12 - Waste Control;

Environmental Standard 13 – Waste Handling and Storage;

Environmental Standard 14 – Waste Training and Operators; and

175 | 278

Environmental Standard 15 – Waste Transport.

In particular, the Environmental Standard 12 makes specific reference to the control of solid waste materials

and in particular waste materials which are classified as hazardous in terms of their impacts on the

environment:

Article 4 (Purpose) identifies that PME is charged with protecting the natural environment and is

therefore obliged to issue controls over waste activities in KSA’.

The Waste Classification Standard for KSA provides the following:

“A national classification system that may be employed within KSA by all waste generators, transporters, facility

operators and the relevant competent agencies and other interested parties. The standard provides

classification, coding and defining of all waste types so they can be handled treated or disposed of

accordingly".

IFC Standards 10.2.2

The IFC Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants (December, 2008)

requires:

“Management of ash disposal and reclamation so as to minimize environmental impacts – especially the

migration of toxic metals, if present, to nearby surface and groundwater bodies, in addition to the transport of

suspended solids in surface runoff due to seasonal precipitation and flooding. In particular, construction,

operation, and maintenance of surface impoundments should be conducted in accordance with internationally

recognized standards.”

Section 1.5 of the IFC General EHS Guidelines covers Hazardous Materials Management and Section 1.6

deals with Waste Management and is applicable to all projects that generate, store or handle any quantity of

waste. The waste management guidelines state that facilities that generate and store wastes should practice

the following:

Establish waste management priorities at the outset of activities based on an understanding of potential

Environmental, Health, and Safety risks and impacts;

Establish a waste management hierarchy that considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery, recycling,

removal and finally disposal of wastes;

Avoid or minimize the generation waste materials, as far as practicable;

Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has been minimized then options for recovering and

reusing waste should be developed; and

Where waste cannot be recovered or reused, identify means of treating, destroying, and disposing of it in

an environmentally sound manner.


This assessment also considers the likely impacts upon soils and geology as a result of Project activities in

relation to the updated IFC Performance Standards; namely:

Performance Standard 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention.

It is a requirement of this performance standard to implement measures to ensure the following:

‘Avoid the generation of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials. Where waste generation cannot

be avoided, the client will reduce the generation of waste and recover and reuse waste in a manner that is

safe for human health and the environment. Where waste cannot be recovered or reused, the client will

treat, destroy or dispose of it in an environmentally sound manner that includes the appropriate control of

emissions and residues resulting from the handling and processing of the waste material’;

‘When hazardous waste disposal is conducted by third parties, the client will use contractors that are

reputable and legitimate enterprises licensed by the relevant government regulatory agencies and obtain

chain of custody documentation to the final destination’;

‘The client will avoid or, when avoidance is not possible, minimise and control the release of hazardous

materials….The client will avoid the manufacture, trade and use of chemicals and hazardous materials

subject to international bans or phase-outs due to their high toxicity to living organisms, environmental

persistence, potential for bio accumulation or potential for depletion of the ozone layer’; and

‘This section also provides guidelines for the segregation of waste into hazardous and non-hazardous

streams and how to manage these waste streams. The Project should seek to demonstrate compliance

with the principles and guidelines set out within this document’.

Methodology 10.3

The principal aim of this assessment is to consider the key waste management issues associated with the

construction and operational phases of the proposed Project with particular reference to identifying

opportunities for the reduction of the severity or likelihood of significant environmental impacts.

The methodology adhered to comprised of a number of tasks including:

Site visit in May 2014 to gain an understanding of any issues regarding waste;

A desk top review to collate existing information relevant to waste generation and disposal within the Tabuk

area and the Kingdom;

A review of the current project and past projects in relation to waste storage and transfer requirements; and

A review of available and accessible waste guidance and policy information.

177 | 278


Introduction 10.4.1

The existing baseline conditions on site have been assessed based on a site visit undertaken in May 2013 as

well as a desktop analysis of the waste situation in KSA and implications of these for the Project.

Waste Management in KSA 10.4.2

Responsible management of solid waste materials, both hazardous and inert, has become a pressing need for

all developing and modern economies, including the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. There are strong economic and

environmental reasons for tackling the growing quantity of solid waste.

Waste management sites and facilities in the Kingdom are typically operated and managed by private

companies or local municipalities, with PME as the competent environmental regulator. When new sites are

proposed and constructed, PME plays an important role in advising the operators on the environmental

protection requirements for the facility.

The economic growth in Saudi Arabia, in addition to correlating urbanisation and population growth has

resulted in a significant increase in the quantities of solid waste generated. It is estimated that 15 million tons of

solid waste are generated annually, which equates to a per capita waste generation rate of between 1.5 to

1.8kg per person per day (Zafar, 2013). The vast majority of municipal solid waste is sent directly to landfill,

with an estimated 10-15% recycled. Although both recycling and composting activities are undertaken on a

small scale in comparison to the amounts of waste generated nationally, increasing interest is being placed in

these sectors, with the Saudi government being acutely aware of the pressing need to identify solutions to the

existing waste management issues facing the country (SEC, 2014).

Efforts are also underway to deploy waste-to-energy technologies in the Kingdom. The Saudi government is

aware of the critical demand for waste management solutions, and is investing heavily to solve this problem.

The 2011 national budget allocated SR 29 billion for the municipal services sector, which includes water

drainage and waste disposal. The Saudi government is making concerted efforts to improve recycling and

waste disposal activities. Recently the Saudi Government approved new regulations to ensure an integrated

framework for the management of municipal wastes. The Ministry of Municipal and Rural Affairs will be

responsible for overseeing the tasks and responsibilities of the solid waste management system.

However, more serious efforts are required to improve waste management scenario in the Kingdom. A

methodical introduction of modern waste management techniques like material recovery facilities, waste-to-

energy systems and recycling infrastructure can significantly improve waste management scenario and can

also generate good business opportunities.


The design of any new facility should take into account the types of waste being produced within a given area

or region and the environmental setting in which it will be placed. The needs and concerns of the local

population should be considered within the decision process.

Existing Site Conditions 10.4.3

The proposed Project site is located by the Al-Muwaylih Village within the Tabouk Province. This north western

region of the Kingdom is characterized by agricultural activities reflecting on the availability of natural resources

including water, both from rain and ground sources.

Currently, there is only one industrial zone located in Tabouk with few industrial facilities, the most significant of

which are related to cement and steel manufacturing.

For this reason, the majority of waste produced in Tabouk is agricultural waste rather than industrial.

Agricultural waste is commonly burned in open spaces near their farms representing significant environmental

concern. A single waste facility exits within boundaries of the Tabouk Province. However, the facility is merely a

dump site, located south from Tabouk City, which lacks in design and maintenance and is not in line with waste

management standards of PME.

It is understood that the Tabouk municipality is in the early stages of planning for a new sanitary landfill facility

which would be developed in accordance with the PME standards.

No facility designed specifically for hazardous waste material exists in Tabouk, therefore each industrial facility

generating hazardous wastes must individually contract a certified contractor approved by PME in order to

establish an appropriate hazardous waste management procedure.


The main sensitive receptor relating to hazardous and non-hazardous waste generated by the proposed Project

will be the waste infrastructure utilised for the treatment and storage of wastes produced from the facility, both

during the construction and operational phases e.g. city landfills operated by the local municipalities (in this

instance, Northern Borders Municipality). These receptors have been assessed as low to medium in terms of

sensitivity.

Potentially sensitive receptors also include the soil within the site which could be adversely affected in the event

of a contamination event due to inadequate storage provisions. Additionally, operational workers may also

represent sensitive receptors and could be exposed to hazardous materials if adequate procedures have not

been implemented to ensure the abatement, correct storage and transport of these materials and

contamination of the environment resulting from releases of hazardous substances. These are discussed below

and dealt with in Chapter 9: Soils, Geology and Contamination and Chapter 13: Socio-Economic.

179 | 278



A summary of the potentially significant effects associated with the construction phase waste management is

presented below.

The construction of the facility is likely to generate significant quantities of waste; Table 10-1 below outlines the

waste types and sources expected during the construction phase. At this stage, however, it is not possible to

fully quantify the amounts of wastes produced.

Table 10-1 Typical Construction Phase Waste Origins

Excavation and Demolition Waste

Spoil;

Demolition waste

Other Solid Wastes

Residual general waste

Construction wastes

Concrete and cement

Brick / Block/ Ceramics

Metals including steels from fabrication, iron aluminium etc.

Glass and Cladding

Timber and plaster board

Insulation materials including fibreglass

Plastics from packaging and construction materials

Hazardous wastes

Oil both liquid and sludge

Paint, thinners contaminated painting equipment

Chemicals

Excavation and Demolition Waste

A qualitative impact assessment cannot be undertaken at this stage due to limited data regarding the expected

quantities of excavation material generated through excavation works on site.

It is anticipated that a significant quantity of excavation waste will be generated, through the construction of

foundations across all parts of the site, pile arisings and the construction of service trenches.

It is expected that the majority of excavated material will comprise of natural ground, which is likely to be

classified as non-hazardous waste due to the absence of historical sources of contamination within the area.

This issue has been covered in detail within Chapter 9: Soil and Geology.

However, any excavated material that does require disposal to landfill due to likely contamination renders the

impact from excavation waste to be of moderate negative significance upon landfill and other local waste

facilities, prior to the implementation of mitigation measures.


Whilst a qualitative impact assessment cannot be undertaken to ascertain the levels of excavation and

demolition waste generation, it is thought that this may result in a minor negative impact.

Management of Construction Waste

Waste material from the construction of buildings and plant infrastructure will require off-site disposal.

Additionally, the high number of construction workers expected to be required at the site during the construction

phase is likely to result in an increase in waste generation.

Licensed waste management facilities must be used for disposal and therefore the waste generation is likely to

result in a minor negative impact.

Uncontrolled or unlicensed dumping of waste is common in the region and steps should be taken to ensure this

does not happen in order to prevent significant environmental damage in the local area.

Storage of Construction Waste

The impacts associated with the poor storage of construction materials on-site may result in the potential

wastage of large volumes of raw materials. It is anticipated that prior to the implementation of appropriate

mitigation measures that this will result in a minor negative impact.

Contamination issues associated with the poor storage of construction wastes are dealt with in Chapter 11:

Soils, Geology and Contamination.

Generation of Hazardous Wastes

Hazardous wastes likely to be produced will include oil (both liquid and sludge), paint, thinners, contaminated

painting equipment and chemicals associated with construction activities.

It is anticipated that potential impacts of hazardous waste streams generated from construction activities of the

facility are likely to be of moderate negative significance due to the potential to cause contamination if not

managed or disposed of properly. It is also noted that not all landfills in the Kingdom are lined which suggests

that the leaching of hazardous materials to the surrounding soil strata and groundwater may occur.


The types of solid waste materials generated during the operational phase may be expected to include:

Waste associated with operation and maintenance works of the plant equipment; and,

General waste streams generated from the administration buildings, site canteen and worker accommoda-tion.

181 | 278

It should be noted that the use of natural gas as the primary fuel is beneficial with regards to solid waste gener-

ation. Unlike other fuels, such as coal and heavy fuel oil, the use of natural gas to create electricity does not

produce substantial amounts of solid waste6.

Generation of Hazardous Wastes

Hazardous wastes likely to be produced will include hydrocarbons and oils, solvents, contaminated rags, steel

and plastic drums, filters, paints and greases. Periodically it may also include pipe work, metals and plastics

associated with plant maintenance or filter media and sludge arising from treatment works.

It is anticipated that potential impacts of hazardous waste streams generated from the maintenance works and

plant processes of the Project are likely to be of moderate negative significance due to their potential to cause

contamination if not managed or disposed of properly. Uncontrolled or unlicensed dumping of waste is also

common in the region and steps should be taken to ensure this does not happen in order to prevent significant

environmental damage.

Sludge generated from the sanitary waste treatment plant will need to be disposed of by an appropriately

licensed contractor. It has been assumed that the storm drains will not be connected to the sewage system.

Should there be any interconnectivity between these systems, sanitary sludge would need to be disposed of as

hazardous waste, since the potential exists for hazardous substances such as chemicals through accidental

spills, to enter and contaminate this system. The issue of liquid wastes from wastewater treatment processes is

considered in Chapter 10: Water Resources and Waste Water.

General Solid Wastes

Based on natural gas operation, the only waste stream from the power plant itself will be a small amount of

spent catalyst which is generated every one to five years.

The waste from the operational administration area and any worker’s accommodation included within the site

boundary of the plant will be general waste streams of a predominately non-hazardous nature and may include:

Paper – waste paper may be generated during the general administration process and on site record

keeping;

Organic food waste – leftover food and preparation waste from canteen areas;

Cardboard – waste cardboard may be generated from deliveries of material to the site;

Green waste – from on-site landscaping; and

Plastic packaging – waste plastic packaging in the form of shrink and bubble wrap.

6 USEPA (Last updated on 9/25/2013) http://www.epa.gov/cleanenergy/energy-and-you/affect/natural-gas.html


The Project is unlikely to result in a significant generation of general solid waste during operation and the

impact is therefore predicted to be of minor negative effect, due in the main to the impact on depleting landfill

space in the region.


The mitigation measures applicable to waste management are set out within this section and are summarised

in Chapter 16: Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan and Chapter 17: Framework

Operational Environmental Management Plan.

Construction Phase Mitigation Measures 10.7.1In accordance with Environmental Standard 8 – Waste Acceptance Criteria, a waste generator must undertake

a detailed audit of their waste to establish whether the waste:

i. is prohibited from disposal to landfill;

ii. is hazardous and suitable for landfill in its current condition;

iii. is hazardous and would meet the Waste Acceptance Criteria (WAC) for dedicated hazardous landfill;

iv. is hazardous and regarded as stable and non-reactive;

v. will be classified as inert, appears on the WAC lists and does not require testing;

vi. requires testing prior to being certain as to which class of landfill it can go to; or

vii. has, or may be subject to treatment of some sort.

Details of the waste classification process are set out in Environmental Standard 9 – Waste Classification.

Once the waste is characterised, the Generator must then consider the ways in which the waste might be

managed and disposed, in accordance with the waste hierarchy of minimisation, reuse, recovery or ultimate

disposal. This is illustrated in Table 10-2, below.

183 | 278

Table 10-2 Waste Hierarchy

If disposal is the only option, the Generator must select the disposal option that avoids or reduces any impact

on the environment. Where landfill is the only disposal option identified for all or part of the waste, the

Generator must consider the appropriate treatment options as follows:

i. Identify the landfill that may be able to accept the treated waste; and

ii. Establish whether the waste will meet the relevant WAC.

During the construction phase, the EPC contractor and their sub-contractors will be required to minimise the

impacts on the environment that may arise as a result of construction works. This is normally implemented via

the development of a Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP), and adherence to such a plan.

The construction contractor will also promote the commitment to continual improvement and the identification of

appropriate opportunities to reduce waste and where practicable, promote recycling and the potential reuse of

materials. This will be implemented by ensuring increased awareness among construction workers of more

sustainable working practices, for example through ‘Tool Box Talks’ to ensure that all workforce and sub-

contractors are adequately informed.

The EPC contractor and their sub-contractors will be required to identify the types and quantities of waste that

can be minimised or effectively segregated for recycling/re-use and the materials that require disposal to

landfill. As part of this process, clearly labelled waste skips should be provided for the separation of specific

waste materials such as metal, wood, cardboard and polythene for recycling. Separate skips or containers will

also be provided for residual waste streams generated during the construction phase which cannot be reused

or recycled.

Any waste fuels, oils and chemicals will be stored separately in a bunded compound situated on an

impermeable surface in order to prevent any potential spillage and contamination issues prior to collection for

appropriate disposal.


In addition, and in accordance with the IFC EHS Guidelines (Waste Management), waste minimisation should

be encouraged among suppliers. This is likely to involve suppliers committing to reducing surplus packaging

associated with any construction materials; particularly common packaging materials such as plastics (shrink

wrap and bubble wrap), cardboard and wooden pallets. This may also involve improved procurement and

consultation with selected suppliers regarding commitments to waste minimisation, recycling and the emphasis

on continual improvements in environmental performance. Table 10-3, below, summarises the most important

mitigation measures that will be implemented to minimise the potential waste of on-site materials during

construction.

Table 10-3 Measures to Reduce the Waste of on-site Materials

Ordering Delivery

Avoid: Over ordering (order ‘just in time’);

Ordering standard lengths rather than lengths

required;

Ordering for delivery at the wrong time (update

programme regularly).

Avoid: Damage during unloading;

Delivery to inappropriate areas of the site;

Accepting incorrect deliveries, specifications, or

quantities.

Storage Handling

Avoid: Damage to materials from incorrect storage;

Loss, theft, or vandalism through secure storage

and on-site security.

Avoid: Damage or spillage through incorrect or repeti-

tive handling.

Additionally, in order to ensure that such a system of reuse and recycling is effective a set of measures should

be set out which encourages a programme of auditing at each stage of the construction process. This will assist

in achieving appropriate on-site waste targets and focus upon:

Quantifying raw material wastage;

Quantifying the generation of each waste stream;

Methods by which the waste streams are being handled and stored;

Quantifying the material disposed of off-site to landfill facilities; and,

Identifying responsibilities.

Setting waste targets and undertaking future measurement and monitoring will assist in determining the

success of waste management initiatives employed at the Project site during construction. This will ultimately

lead to continual improvement as the construction process progresses.

185 | 278

Environmental Standard 12 – Waste Control sets out a Duty of Care on waste generators, transporters and

disposers to ensure that:

a) Waste is not illegally disposed of or dealt with without a licence or in breach of a licence or in a way that

causes pollution or harm;

b) Waste does not escape from a Waste Handler’s control;

c) Waste is transferred only to an ‘authorised person’, such as the relevant Competent Agency, registered

transporter or licensed disposer;

d) When the waste is transferred, it is accompanied by a full written description so that each person who has it

knows enough to deal with it properly and thus avoids committing an offence under GER 2001.

Waste Generators shall be responsible for identification of the types of waste and hazardous waste they

generate, as well as for ensuring that such wastes are stored, treated and disposed of in an environmentally

sound manner that does not cause its dispersal and also does not cause any detrimental effect on human

health, safety and welfare or the environment and the natural resources.

To this end, The Generator shall be required to:

i. classify and identify their waste;

ii. refrain from delivering or transferring wastes to a waste transporter or to a Treatment, Storage or

Disposal (TSD) facility which are either not registered, not licensed or who do not have a site ID

number from the Competent Agency;

iii. refrain from delivering consignments of waste for transportation outside the TSD Facility without being

accompanied by a Waste Tracking Form, obtained from the Competent Agency, where relevant;

iv. comply with segregation and storage requirements as specified in the Waste Segregation and Storage

Standard; and

v. prepare the waste for transportation.

It is also a responsibility of Waste Generators to prepare a Waste Tracking Form. The Generator must give the

prescribed information to the Transporter and, within fourteen days of the transfer, give the information to the

Competent Agency on the completed form. The following information must be provided on the form:

i. the Generator’s name, address, municipality and contact details;

ii. the name, address, and contact details of the person to whom the waste is to be transported;

iii. the day and time the Generator gives the waste to the transporter for transporting;

iv. the type and number of containers if the waste is hazardous; and

v. the following waste details:

The type of waste;


The amount in kilograms, tonnes, cubic metres or litres;

Its physical nature (liquid or solid);

Its hazardous waste code, if relevant (see Waste Classification Standard);

The waste origin code for the activity that produced the waste.

The Generator is required to record and keep for a minimum period of five years the following information:

i. the information detailed in the waste tracking form; and

ii. the Transporter’s name, address and contact details.

Environmental Standard 14 – Waste Handling and Storage sets out that all stored wastes must be segregated

as follows:

a) Segregation reduces the risk of waste being incorrectly classified and ensures that the correct procedures

are followed from the point of generation through to final disposal.

b) Liquids must be kept separate from solid wastes, and non-hazardous and inert waste must be segregated

from hazardous wastes, so as to create effective segregation systems to:

i. prevent unwanted or potentially dangerous reactions;

ii. reduce the rate of accidental exposure to potentially hazardous substances;

iii. ease handling and disposing of wastes;

iv. increase the diversion of waste for the purposes of recycling.; and

v. keep the cost of waste disposal to a minimum.

Environmental Standard 14 – Waste Handling and Storage requires that waste storage areas are managed as

follows:

a) Storage areas must be located to eliminate or minimise the double handling of waste.

b) Storage areas must be clearly marked and signed with regard to the quantity and hazardous characteristics

of the wastes stored therein.

c) The waste Generator using satellite storage areas and the designated waste manager of the main waste

storage are responsible for the proper accumulation, maintenance and housekeeping of their storage

areas. They must ensure that:

i. Waste streams do not get mixed and that no waste other than the normal waste stream, approved for

the container, is placed in the collection container.

ii. The waste components are correct and complete for each waste container.

iii. Accurate records are maintained to ensure compliance with onward transportation of the waste and to

minimize analytical costs associated with disposal.

187 | 278

iv. All leaks, spills, and releases are recorded.

v. Major leaks, releases or spills sufficient to pose a threat to human health or the environment are

brought to the attention of the Competent Agency.

vi. All major hazardous spills (>25 litres) are reported immediately to the Competent Agency and the

appropriate evacuation action taken.

d) Storage areas must be constructed such that any spillage or loss of containment of a particular waste type

cannot spread to other waste types. This is particularly important where flammable materials are involved.

e) The total maximum storage capacity of the storage areas must be clearly and unambiguously stated in

writing, accompanied with details of the method used to calculate the volumes held against this maximum.

The stated maximum capacity of storage areas must not be exceeded.

f) The storage arrangements must be marked on a site plan which clearly shows:

i. waste types to be stored in particular areas;

ii. separation arrangements;

iii. any fire breaks proposed; and

iv. the maximum storage capacity of each storage area.

g) Storage area drainage infrastructure must ensure all contaminated runoff is contained and that drainage

from incompatible wastes cannot come into contact with each other.

h) There must be vehicular, for example, forklift, and pedestrian access at all times to the whole of the storage

area such that the transfer of containers is not reliant on the removal of impediments which may be

blocking access, other than drums in the same row.

i) Containers must be stored in such a manner that leaks and spillages cannot escape over bunds or the

edge of the sealed drainage areas.


Waste management must be included within the EPC contractor’s EHS plan and CEMP. These should provide

the necessary framework for the management of waste on-site during the construction process. This should

include encouraging waste minimisation practices during the construction process, setting waste diversion

targets and segregating waste streams for reuse/recycling. It will also help to ensure that waste is disposed of

at suitable licensed facilities and reduce the amount of waste disposed of thereby reducing the associated

traffic impact. It is anticipated that the implementation of best practice measures highlighted above and in

accordance with the aforementioned IFC guidelines, will reduce the possibility of contamination occurring. Such

an approach will result in the impact of construction waste reducing from being of minor negative significance to

a negligible impact.


Following the implementation of appropriate controls such as testing for contaminants, and subsequent

remediation if required, it is considered that the residual impacts associated with excavation and demolition

waste will be negligible.

Assuming that hazardous waste streams are handled by a locally registered waste contractor and transferred to

an appropriately licensed hazardous waste facility, and control measures are implemented to prevent

accidental spillages and ensure appropriate storage, the residual impact of the generation of hazardous waste

is considered to be of negligible significance.

Storage of Construction Waste

It is anticipated that implementation of the best practice measures highlighted above and in accordance with

the aforementioned IFC guidelines, will reduce the possibility of contamination occurring. The potential for

contamination to occur associated with the storage of construction waste is assessed in the chapter on soils,

geology, and contamination. It is anticipated that such an approach will result in a reduced effect although

construction waste remains of minor negative concern.


Given the remote location of the project site and lack of developments (existing or proposed) in the surrounding

area cumulative impacts are not expected to be a major concern.


The operational phase of the Project will result in the generation of waste streams associated with the plant

operation, maintenance works and administration functions. Once the plant is in operation, it is important that a

comprehensive OEMP is developed by the appointed O&M Company and that waste management is

considered a priority.

A formal and structured way of monitoring and recording waste and associated impacts shall be developed. A

schedule of monitoring and periodic audits to inform the OEMP process shall be established. Procedures for

waste management will be clearly defined. Plans will be drawn up for waste generated due to emergencies and

accidents. Responsibilities of individuals relating to waste management shall be clearly assigned. The financial

resources necessary to implement and operate a suitable waste management system shall be specified, as

well as those people responsible for making those resources available. Capacity building and training needs

shall be identified to ensure that waste can be properly managed and controlled. Staffing requirements and

other supporting arrangements shall be identified to demonstrate capacity to manage waste generated at the

site. A framework for the development of an OEMP is presented in Chapter 16: Framework Operational

Environmental Management Plan.

189 | 278

Waste Strategy

Current international best practice, including the IFC guidelines, advocates the need to operate sustainable

waste management practices for major industrial developments. Such guidance sets out scenarios for dealing

with waste in a preferential order from waste prevention and reduction through to re-use, recovery (energy and

materials) and disposal via landfill. The waste hierarchy can be expressed as in Table 10-2 above.

Therefore, waste management practices at the Project site should involve consideration of the following:

Ensuring compliance with national and international best practice guidance;

Encouraging opportunities to minimise waste;

Providing good on-site storage practices;

Providing suitable waste receptacles for the segregation of waste streams for recycling and general waste

for disposal to landfill;

Providing fully covered waste storage areas; and

Appointing dedicated personnel responsible for waste management issues.

Management of General Waste – Industrial Facilities

Industrial wastes that do not leach toxic substances or other contaminants of concern to the environment may

be disposed by suitably licensed contractors in landfills or at other disposal sites provided they do not impact

nearby water bodies.

Management of Hazardous Waste

The hazardous waste generated from maintenance works and plant operations are likely to include waste oils,

fuels, chemicals, empty containers and filters and replaced parts which may have associated hazardous

properties. Hazardous waste streams should be handled by a locally registered waste contractor and

transferred either to an appropriately licensed hazardous waste facility for disposal or an on-site waste

incinerator should be established for the treatment of hazardous waste.

The GER Appendix 4 (2006) “Hazardous Waste Control Rules and Procedures” details the requirements for

managing hazardous waste. A few of the key requirements are included below, which will need to be complied

with during the operation of the Project:

Containerise and pack hazardous waste in a proper and environmentally sound manner placing warning

labels on each package in accordance with the specifications and standards applicable in the Kingdom;

Accurately fill up the product data on the appropriate section of the hazardous waste transportation docu-

ment in accordance with the instructions provided in the document;

Confirm with the PME, that the storage, treatment or disposal facility designated in the transportation doc-

ument is capable of managing the waste that will be sent to it;


Make the necessary arrangements with both the transporter who will carry the waste and the receiving fa-

cility designated in the transportation documents as the destination for the waste (such as providing the fa-

cility with full and detailed information on the waste and samples for analysis);

Provide the transporter with the transportation document and copy of the safety data sheets for each type

of hazardous waste being transported; and

Comply with the hazardous waste transportation instructions provided in the transportation document.

The hazardous waste generator shall comply with the following for keeping of records and reports:

Keep one copy of each transport document it has generated pending receipt of the signed copy from the

facility designated in the document. It shall also keep the signed copy for at least 5 years as of the date of

receipt of the waste by that facility;

Retain copies of the results of all tests and analysis performed on the hazardous waste as well as copies of

all pertinent reports, correspondence and documents for at least five years from the last date of handling of

such waste;

Submit to the PME an annual report on all hazardous waste generated during the year. Copies of such re-

ports shall be retained for at least five years from the date of completion;

Submit on demand to the PME or the agencies designated by it, all documents, records and reports related

to the waste; and

Hazardous Waste Transporters and Hazardous Waste Management Facilities are required to have both a

valid identification code and a work permit from the PME.

Non-Hazardous Solid Waste Management

The administration buildings and offices on-site are likely to generate quantities of non-hazardous waste

streams including waste paper, cardboard, plastic packaging that have the potential to be segregated for

recycling. Therefore suitable waste receptacles will need to be provided at central locations on-site for the

segregation of waste streams for recycling and residual general waste. The segregated waste will be

transferred to the central storage area on-site for non-hazardous waste which will consist of dedicated

containers for recyclable waste and general waste. The storage area for non-hazardous waste will be located

on an impermeable hard-standing surface and located under cover.


The negative effects associated with waste generation during the operational phase will be reduced through the

application of best practice waste management measures.

191 | 278

The implementation of the above good practice waste management measures will not however eliminate the

waste and it is anticipated that there will be a negligible residual effect associated with the management of

hazardous wastes on site.




Summary & Conclusions 10.8

Overall, with the implementation of good environmental practices through the contractor EHS policies and

guidance, together with the development of a CEMP and OEMP, the Project should be able to limit pressures

on the existing waste management facilities in the surrounding region and reduce the potential for any localised

contamination to occur.

However, it is anticipated that the quantities of hazardous and non-hazardous waste streams generated by the

Project may be substantial and therefore it is essential that the approach to waste management at the site as

highlighted above is rigidly adopted.


Table 0-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for waste management



impact

Construction Phase

Increased pressure on local landfill and other local waste facilities due to disposal of contaminated excavated material and demolition waste.


Minor to moderate adverse

It is anticipated that the majority of excavated material will require off-site disposal. If there is a potential presence of contaminants, the excavated material must be tested prior to offsite removal and disposed of to an appropriate hazardous waste facility.


Generation of raw material waste. Low to medium sensitivity Minor adverse

Development of a CEMP which include the following measures (for example):

Identification of the types and quantities of waste that can be minimised or effectively segregated for recycling/re-use; and

Identification of the materials requiring disposal to landfill.

Negligible

Poor storage of construction materials on-site resulting in the wastage of large volumes of raw materials.


Minor adverse

Good working practices are encouraged on-site within the CEMP, particularly in relation to the storage and disposal of waste materials; and

All on-site workers should be aware of the location of storage areas and the requirements of such areas.

Negligible

Contamination associated with generation and disposal of hazardous wastes.


Moderate adverse

Adherence with the CEMP ensuring good working practices are followed;

A waste generator must ensure that hazardous wastes are stored, treated and disposed of in an environmentally sound manner without dispersal or detrimental effects; and

All hazardous wastes should be classified and delivered to a registered Competent Agency.


Operational Phase

Generation of hazardous waste streams.


Moderate adverse

Hazardous waste streams shall be handled by a locally registered waste contractor and transferred either to an appropriately licensed hazardous waste facility for disposal or an on-site waste incinerator should be established for the treatment of hazardous waste. Control measures regarding hazardous waste stream shall be developed within the OEMP.


193 | 278



impact

Generation of solid waste. Low to medium sensitivity Minor adverse

Suitable waste receptacles shall be provided at central locations on-site for the segregation of waste streams for recycling and residual general waste;

The segregated waste shall be transferred to the central storage area on-site for non-hazardous waste which will consist of dedicated containers for recyclable waste and general waste; and

The storage area for non-hazardous waste will be located on an impermeable hard-standing surface and located under cover.

Negligible


11 Water Resources and Wastewater

Introduction 11.1

This Chapter discusses the baseline information relating to water resources and wastewater at the Project Site

and in the surrounding area. In particular, it considers the sources of water and the effective management of

waste water streams during construction and operational phases of the Project.

Where significant impacts are identified, appropriate avoidance and mitigation measures are provided, which

are summarised below and set out in full in Chapter 16: Framework Construction Environmental Management

Plan and Chapter 17: Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan.


Wastewater Standards 11.2.1

The IFC Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants (2008) provide environmental guidance for effluents from power

plants, including thermal discharges, wastewater effluents and sanitary wastewater. Furthermore, relevant

standards exist within KSA for discharges e.g. PME 2012 standards, which include discharge standards to

marine waters and to municipal collection systems. Standards for the re-use of waste waters have also been

developed by the Ministry of Agriculture and Water (1989).

The PME stipulate a series of standards for direct discharge, as specified within the Industrial and Municipal

Wastewater Discharges Standards (2012). Of potential relevance are discharge standards to Municipal

collecting systems, although it is understood that the majority of wastewater streams will be treated on site or

removed by tanker for treatment and disposal at a wastewater treatment plant. In the event that any discharges

to a municipal system are made, all wastewater effluents will be required to comply with the standards identified

within Chapter 3: Environmental Legislation and Standards.

Methodology 11.3

An overview of the existing conditions on site is presented below based on information provided by the Client

and a site walkover undertaken in May 2014. The key sources of information are listed within the references

section at the end of the chapter.

An assessment of potential impacts has been made for the construction and operation phases of the project

using the project planning and project design information available. For details of the relevant waste water

quality standards and guidelines please refer to Chapter 3, Section 1.5.

195 | 278


Overview of Water and Wastewater in Saudi Arabia 11.4.1

Given Saudi Arabia’s desert climate, rapidly growing population, large agricultural requirements, and recent

substantial infrastructure and industrial development, the supply of water is a significant challenge.

Saudi Arabia is fourth highest in the world in average water use per citizen. It is estimated that 70% of the

Kingdom’s water requirements are provided for by desalination. Indeed, at present, Saudi Arabia is the largest

producer of desalinated water in the world accounting for 30% of total world capacity. A 2,300-mile pipe

distribution network supplies potable water to major urban and industrial centres, with approximately 70% of the

desalinated water subsequently used for agricultural purposes, 25% for drinking water, and 5% for industrial

use.

The remaining 30% of current water needs are supplied by groundwater abstraction. Given the low

precipitation, the groundwater in many of the country’s aquifers has taken centuries to accumulate and cannot

recharge at the same rate as current rates of abstraction. In parts of the country reliant on groundwater it has

been estimated that there may be less than twenty years remaining reserves of non-renewable resources at

current rates of usage.

Less than one half (47%) of the current population of the Kingdom has a connection to a piped water supply.

The shortfall is made up of supplies delivered in trucks and containers, which may be considerably more

expensive than an equivalent amount delivered by pipe, or from private wells. There is a national tariff for water

supply to the public, which has been in force since 1994. Before that all water was provided free of charge. The

tariff applies everywhere in the Kingdom, regardless of the cost of production and delivery.

Existing Site Conditions 11.4.2

No permanent surface freshwater features were identified during the site reconnaissance undertaken by WSP

in May 2014. The site is intersected by a number of dry wadi beds which are likely to flood during winter rainfall

events, as shown in the site context map in Figure 11-1. This will be a key consideration during both

construction and operation to ensure that the Project site is not flooded and that surrounding areas are

protected from flood.

The western edge of the site borders the Red Sea.


Figure 11-1 Site context map including wadi locations

197 | 278


The primary water source for the Project will be desalinated water from the sea. Therefore there will be no

abstraction from freshwater aquifers.

The land within and surrounding the Project site is a potentially sensitive receptor to the release, accidental or

otherwise, of wastewater and a concern does remain with regards to the depth of any aquifer/s in the region –

whilst it is expected that groundwater beneath the project site will be brackish, major, pollution instances may

have a significant deleterious effect. It is therefore contingent on the responsible body to take all necessary

precautions when such extraction takes place to ensure that no contamination of local water bodies takes

place.

The construction site area and the subsequent operational facility and staff are considered to be sensitive

receptors with respect to flooding.

Further, construction and operational staff are therefore thought to be one of the more sensitive receptors as

they will require a continuous supply of safe drinking and washing water throughout the construction and

operation period. There is also the possibility of staff coming in contact with non-potable water.



Provision of Potable and Other Water

As noted earlier, it is understood that the Client is to provide the source of potable water and from an

appreciation of the information that has been received, it is anticipated the source of potable water for the

construction phase will be via tankers.

Large amounts of potable and utility water will need to be brought to the Project Site to serve the needs of

construction personnel and construction processes. Provided that this water is obtained without impacting upon

other consumers or depleting unsustainable sources than the impact significance is considered to be negligible.

Discharge of Wastewater Streams

Whilst it is understood that there will be no direct discharges to the environment in terms of wastewater

streams, some aqueous effluents from temporary construction facilities, including washing down, dust damping

activities and concrete work, may lead to the contamination of soil, underlying groundwater and the marine

environment. This impact is likely to be temporary in nature and will only be applicable during the construction

phase. Prior to mitigation, it is considered that the impact will be of minor negative significance.

The potential does exist, however, for contamination of the soil and groundwater in the event of any accidental

spillages or leaks of fuels, oils and other hazardous materials. Depending on the scale of the event this impact

could range from medium to major negative significance.


During the construction phase, a large number of staff, including labourers and sub-contractors, will be working

on the site, generating a large volume of sanitary waste. As the contractor is to provide a sewage treatment

system in order to achieve the additional requirements of the new facility, and the fact that the any/all collected

sanitary waste water will be directed to this sewage treatment system, it is thought that any effects will be of a

negligible, negative impact.

Storm Water Run-Off and Erosion from the Construction Site

There is the potential for controlled and uncontrolled emissions associated with the construction of the Project

which could result in contamination of groundwater and the marine environment. The primary source for

potential contamination is considered to be existing soil contamination, which if present could be mobilised

through site construction activities and surface water runoff during the infrequent periods of rainfall. Following

the Phase I Site Walkover Survey, it has been determined that the likelihood of contamination on site is minimal

and this is impact is therefore considered to be of negligible significance.

Construction activities such as any ground excavation and piling for building foundations will result in ground

compaction and, ultimately, reduce the permeability of the underlying soils and reduce the amount of water

infiltrating the ground. Therefore, in the event of a storm, the volume and the rate of surface water run-off will

be increased, which may pose a localised flood risk. The Kingdom receives very little annual rainfall; however,

when rainfall occurs this can be very heavy and can result in rapid flushing of surfaces and high levels of

surface runoff in a short time period. The topography of the site and presence of wadis suggests that high

volumes of runoff and flooding could be an issue. This will have to be confirmed by during detailed design.

Increasing the volume and rate of surface water run-off at certain times of the year, as a result of an increase in

the impermeable areas across the project site and altering ground levels will affect local drainage patterns and

may result in temporary ‘ponding’ of water in certain parts during the construction phase during times of rainfall.

The groundwork and excavation of the site should be carefully phased to ensure that surface (or flood) water

conveyance is maintained.

Therefore, temporary changes to the drainage regime as a result of construction, including the increase in the

volume and rate of surface water run-off, are likely to result in a direct, temporary, minor negative impact on the

drainage regime, prior to the implementation of mitigation measures. However, it must also be noted that

periods of heavy rainfall are rare and the project site is not thought to be located within a known flood risk area

and therefore the overall risk of significant changes to the drainage regime is not thought to be significant.


Provision of Potable, Utility and Fire Fighting Water

Potable water, utility water and fire-fighting water will be supplied from seawater via reverse osmosis plant. The

key impact will be the production of brine effluents which will need to be disposed.

It is not possible at this stage to fully determine the significance of the impacts associated with brine

discharges.

199 | 278

Wastewater Streams

It is understood that there will be no direct discharges to the environment of wastewater. The majority of treated

effluents will be treated on-site and recycled for reuse within the power plant or for irrigation purposes. Oily

water will be treated using an oil separator prior to discharge to the evaporation pond along with brine from the

reverse osmosis units. Such impacts are therefore considered to be negligible.

The liquid wastes that are to be collected by a mobile vacuum truck will need to be collected by an authorised

contractor and subsequent specialist (PME licensed contractor) off-site disposal. Without mitigation measures,

this is considered to be negligible.

Storm Water Generation and Management

Rainwater falling on areas where there is a risk of mixing with oils will be channelled as oily water to the oil

separator. All other rainwater considered to be clean will be captured in the waste water pond for reuse on site

for irrigation. The main risk associated with this process would be for a long-term build-up of contaminants

within irrigated soils. However, as there will be an on-site laboratory responsible for ensuring the quality of the

treated effluents prior to reuse the likelihood of this is considered to be low. The impact associated with

stormwater contamination is therefore considered to be negligible.

Significant storm water management will be required as part of the Project design to ensure that sufficient water

conveyance is maintained. In the absence of appropriate management this is considered to be an impact of

major significance.



A facility-specific Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) will be developed by the EPC

Contractor prior to any construction.


As referenced earlier, it is understood that potable water and utility water will be supplied from tankers. It is

imperative that appropriate sources of water are used and that water minimisation measure are implemented

and fully conveyed to all construction staff.

Potable water should not be used for any other purpose than drinking water and, if required, for washing

facilities. Signs should be clearly placed next to sinks and in bathrooms encouraging staff to minimise the

amount of water used. If possible, push taps which automatically cut-off water should be used in preference to

turning taps.


To protect the environment from flooding during heavy downpours, a localised run-off management system will

be employed by the EPC Contractor. This should comprise temporary surface water run-off facilities, which in


addition to containing contaminants will provide on-site attenuation for surface water flows, thereby reducing

the flood risk.

It is recommended that the EPC Contractor undertakes a detailed topographic survey and drainage pattern

analysis to determine the existing conditions on site and estimate storm water collection at the Site and

surrounding area. Information which could be considered in further assessments includes:

Slope information;

Drainage pattern interpreted from high resolution satellite imagery or field surveys;

Historic information regarding rainfall patterns;

Investigation of storm water runoff and direction;

Demarcation of catchment area within watershed.

Mitigation measures with respect to surface water run-off and contamination are dealt with comprehensively in

Chapter 8: Soils, Geology and Contamination.

Generation of Sanitary Wastewater from On-Site Facilities

All sanitary waste water will be collected and disposed of at a sewage treatment system.

Mitigation measures with respect to the potential for the contamination of the soil and groundwater in the event

of any accidental spillages or leaks associated with collection, storage and collection are dealt with

comprehensively in Chapter 8: Soils, Groundwater and Contamination.

Potential for Contaminated Waters to be Released to the Environment

Adequate infrastructure should be installed on the construction site for the collection and storage of all

contaminated wastewaters generated during the construction phase e.g. plant washdown water or chemical

wastewater streams. The wastewater must then be collected by a suitably qualified and PME approved

hazardous liquid waste contractor. Duty of care records should be maintained for all potentially contaminated

wastewater throughout the construction phase.

Mitigation measures to prevent releases of contaminated waters to the environment are dealt with

comprehensively in Chapter 8: Soils, Geology and Contamination.



It is assumed that significant amounts of potable and other sources of water will be required during the

construction phase. The extraction from ground-well sources remains of concern given the nationally perilous

state of the aquifer source. This therefore remains of moderate negative significance despite the

implementation of water conservation measures.

201 | 278


Following implementation of the proposed mitigation measures, the residual impacts associated with storm

water run-off will be negligible.

Generation of Sanitary Wastewater from On-Site Facilities

The assessment remains of negligible impact, providing all safety measures are followed, such as the checking

of pipelines for leakages.

Potential for Contaminated Waters to be released to the Environment

The residual impacts associated with releases of contaminated waters to the environment are dealt with

comprehensively in Chapter 8: Soils, Geology and Contamination.





It is anticipated that there will be no direct discharges to the environment in terms of wastewater streams. It is

further understood that all effluents will be either transferred for treatment at the sewage treatment plant, or

disposed of at separation pits, evaporation ponds, and/or waste water holding ponds. All such facilities will be

required to match or exceed the engineering requirements of the Client, and to comply with national and inter-

national best practice and standards.

An over-arching recommendation is that a facility-specific operational environmental management plan (OEMP)

is developed prior to the operation of any part of the facility. The delivery of and adhered to the OEMP is

normally the responsibility of the EPC Contractor.

Provision of Potable and Utility Water

Measures to reduce the requirements for reverse osmosis water should be fully investigated by the EPC and

detailed within a site-specific environmental management plan. Furthermore, there is an opportunity to limit the

consumption of potable water through the introduction of water efficient faucets, urinals, showerheads and

toilets together with a programme of workforce education.

Generation and Disposal of Wastewater Streams

Oily water and waste drainage from such areas as the GT building and crude oil treatment plant are to be

collected in local sumps and then forwarded to an oil-water separator which is to be periodically emptied via

suction pump to a mobile vacuum truck, and subsequent specialist (PME licensed contractor) off-site disposal.

The chemical waste water drainage system must be properly designed to ensure the proper collection, treat-

ment, storage, and final disposal of any chemically contaminated or potentially contaminated liquids.


If on-site disposal, then all separation pits, evaporation ponds, and waste water holding ponds must be appro-

priately designed, constructed and managed.

If off-site disposal, then such waste must be collected by an authorised contractor and the procedures noted

above followed.

All sanitary waste water is to be collected and treated at a sewage treatment plant prior to reuse for irrigation

purposes. The use of treated wastewater for irrigation represents a beneficial reuse of a waste product from the

facility. However, it will be necessary to implement adequate quality control measures to ensure that no impacts

upon the environment or health and safety are realised. The United States Environmental Protection Agency

(USEPA) Guidelines for Water Reuse (2004) provide guidance on the safe reuse of wastewater for irrigation. It

is recommended that these guidelines, or a suitable recognised alternative, are adhered to when implementing

this element of the project.


The alteration of ground levels and the introduction of additional areas of impermeable hard standing will have

a permanent effect on local drainage patterns. It is therefore important that a site wide stormwater management

system is designed and implemented.

All industrial process areas and hazardous material areas will be contained under roof structures to ensure any

rain is directed away from these areas. In addition, all industrial process areas and hazardous material storage

areas will be either walled or bunded to ensure no storm water interacts with the hazardous materials. All storm

water should then only have contact with the roofs and hard standing areas of the facility.

Rainwater captured from areas where there is a risk of it mixing with oils will be captured separately and chan-

nelled to the oil separator prior to discharge to the evaporation pond. Clean rainwater will be channelled to the

wastewater storage pond for reuse as irrigation water or recycling to the plant’s cooling water cycle.


Provision of Potable and Utility Water

The impact significance associated with the use of reverse osmosis to provide potable water cannot be estab-

lished until after a detailed marine modelling study including the brine effluents has been undertaken.

Generation and Disposal of Wastewater Streams

As referred to earlier, it is understood that there will be no direct discharges to the environment in terms of

wastewater streams.

It is expected that chemicals (typically, ammonia, phosphate, and oxygen scavengers) will be delivered to the

facility in drums or similar containers before being transferred to mixing and dilution vessels. Providing good

practice is adhered to, detailed mitigation measures and procedures detailed within a site-specific environmen-

tal management plan, and frequent tool-box talks are arranged, this become of minor negative significance.

203 | 278

Other liquid wastes will be stored on-site for collection by road tanker and subsequent specialist (PME licensed

contractor) off-site disposal. The following information must be recorded by the licensed contractor. Providing

good practice in site management and transportation is adhered to, the residual effect is thought to be of negli-

gible negative concern.

Any off-site disposal remains of minor negative concern, again attributed to any leakages in the system or

spillages from the tankers.

The generation and treatment of sanitary wastewater streams remains of negligible concern.


Captured stormwater will either be recycled on site or treated and discharge to the evaporation pond. As there

will be no off-site discharges the impact is considered to be negligible.




Summary and Conclusions 11.7.7

The construction impacts that have been identified are those that, with good on-site and off-site environmental

management practices, can be relatively easily avoided or mitigated. Following their implementation the

residual impacts are considered to be of negligible negative significance and therefore are considered

acceptable.

The residual operational impacts related to the facility are considered to be of moderate to negligible negative

significance.

Recommendations and mitigation detailed within this assessment are designed to ensure compliance with EPA

and IFC effluent discharge guidelines, in addition to guidance set out within the IFC Environmental Health and

Safety Guidelines for Water and Sanitation (2007).

Finally, and as determined within this section, a comprehensive construction environmental management plan

(CEMP) and operational environmental management plan (OEMP) are required for the facility.


Table 0-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for water resources and wastewater



impact

Construction Phase

Increased pressure on local water resources due to an increase in water demand for potable and utility water requirements on-site.


Negligible to Major adverse

Use of appropriate water sources;

Water minimisation measures conveyed to staff; and

Potable water should be used for only drinking and if required fo washing facilities.


Contamination of the soil as a result of sanitary and construction related effluents.



All sanitary waste water will be collected and disposed of at a sewage treatment system;

Adequate infrastructure should be installed on the construction site for the collection and storage of all contaminated wastewaters generated during the construction phase e.g. plant washdown water or chemical wastewater streams;

The wastewater must then be collected by a suitably qualified and PME approved hazardous liquid waste contractor;

Duty of care records should be maintained for all potentially contaminated wastewater throughout the construction phase; and

Mitigation measures with respect to the potential for the contamination of the soil and groundwater in the event of any accidental spillages or leaks associated with collection, storage and collection are dealt with comprehensively in Chapter 8: Soils, Groundwater and Contamination.

Negligible

Potential for uncontrolled and controlled emissions resulting in groundwater contamination from surface water run-off or existing contamination sources.

Low to high sensitivity Negligible

A localised run-off management system will be employed by the EPC Contractor;

It is recommended that the EPC Contractor undertakes a detailed topographic survey and drainage pattern analysis to determine the existing conditions on site and estimate storm water collection at the Site and surrounding area; and

Mitigation measures with respect to surface water run-off and contamination are dealt with comprehensively in Chapter 8: Soils, Geology and Contamination.

Negligible

Increased volume and rate of surface run-off and erosion causing on-site flooding.


Minor adverse Negligible

205 | 278

Operational Phase

Discharges of wastewater streams: oily water and liquid wastes.


The chemical waste water drainage system must be properly designed to ensure the proper collection, treatment, storage, and final disposal of any chemically contaminated or potentially contaminated liquids;

If on-site disposal, then all separation pits, evaporation ponds, and waste water holding ponds must be appropriately designed, constructed and managed;

If off-site disposal, then such waste must be collected by an authorised contractor; and

All sanitary waste water is to be collected and treated at a sewage treatment plant prior to reuse for irrigation purposes. The use of treated wastewater for irrigation shall follow the USEPA Guidelines for Water Reuse (2004).

Negligible

Storm water management: potential risk of a long-term build-up of contaminants within irrigated soils due to the use of rainwater and risk of inundation due to flooding events.


Negligible - Major

A site wide stormwater management system shall be designed and implemented;

All industrial process areas and hazardous material areas will be contained under roof structures to ensure any rain is directed away from these areas. In addition, all industrial process areas and hazardous material storage areas will be either walled or bunded to ensure no storm water interacts with the hazardous materials; and

Rainwater captured from areas where there is a risk of it mixing with oils will be captured separately and channeled to the oil separator prior to discharge to the evaporation pond. Clean rainwater will be channeled to the wastewater storage pond for reuse as irrigation water or recycling to the plant’s cooling water cycle.

Negligible


12 Terrestrial Ecology

Introduction 12.1

This chapter assesses the status of the existing terrestrial ecology on the Project site and presents the






The IFC’s Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living Natural

Resources (2012) should be applied to projects:

(i) located in modified, natural, and critical habitats;

(ii) that potentially impact on or are dependent on ecosystem services over which the client has direct

management control or significant influence; or

(iii) that include the production of living natural resources (e.g., agriculture, animal husbandry, fisheries,

forestry).

Performance Standard 6 requires the following:

“The risks and impacts identification process…should consider direct and indirect project-related

impacts on biodiversity and ecosystem services and identify any significant residual impacts. This

process will consider relevant threats to biodiversity and ecosystem services, especially focusing on

habitat loss, degradation and fragmentation, invasive alien species, overexploitation, hydrological

changes, nutrient loading, and pollution.

As a matter of priority, the client should seek to avoid impacts on biodiversity and ecosystem services.

When avoidance of impacts is not possible, measures to minimize impacts and restore biodiversity and

ecosystem services should be implemented’.

There are no specific requirements within KSA that protect terrestrial ecology and biodiversity. However, since

terrestrial flora and fauna form part of the definition of “The Environment”, they should be afforded adequate

protection from unnecessary damage and deterioration.

The National Commission for Wildlife Conservation and Development (NCWCD), which has now been renamed

the Saudi Wildlife Commission (SWC) assisted by its two prominent research centres, the King Khalid Wildlife

Research Centre (KKWRC) and the National Wildlife Research Centre (NWRC) run a chain of fifteen wildlife

207 | 278

reserves comprising about 4% of the country land area where conservation of certain wildlife species is a major

priority.

Methodology 12.3

This assessment has been undertaken with due consideration of Performance Standard 6 (Biodiversity

Conservation and Sustainable Natural Resource Management) of the IFC Performance Standards on Social

and Environmental Sustainability.

The terrestrial ecology assessment comprised a desktop review of existing, accessible information relating to

the site and its surrounding area and was supported by a terrestrial ecology site investigation. A review of The

ESIA for the Umm Wu’al Phosphate Project (Jacobs, 2013) was also carried out.


The Word Wide Fund for Nature (WWF, 2014) classifies the area in which the site is located as Arabian Desert

and East Sahero- Arabian Xeric Shrublands. This is the largest desert ecoregion which holds relatively little

biodiversity. The primary biomes in this region are deserts and xeric shrublands. Many species, such as the

striped hyena, jackal and honey badger have become extinct in this area due to hunting, human encroachment

and habitat destruction. Other species have been successfully re-introduced, such as the endangered white

(Arabian) oryx and the sand gazelle, and are protected at a number of reserves. Overgrazing by livestock, off-

road driving, and human destruction of habitat are the main threats to this desert ecoregion.

During the site visit for the project location, it was observed that vegetation scattered across the site were of

common species, typical to the area. While no wildlife was observed, small burrows, tracks and droppings seen

on site elude to the presence of fauna.


Figure 12-1 Examples of terrestrial ecological features on the site

209 | 278


With regards to terrestrial ecology, the site has been deemed to be of a moderate ecological diversity and

therefore generally medium sensitivity to impacts. The wadis provide relatively lush vegetation compared to the

more arid raised areas. The sandy beach and associated dune vegetation is also a notable habitat for bird

species in particular.

Specific receptors may include the vegetation within the wadis, burrowing rodents and lizards as well as

occasional large mammals.



There are a range of construction impacts which could affect the terrestrial ecology of the site during the

construction of the facility. However, the baseline terrestrial ecology survey on site indicates that the value in

terms of ecological diversity is moderate. The following impacts are notable:

Areas of terrestrial habitat, such the wadis and sandy beach, will be lost as a consequence of the project;

Site clearance and grading may disturb or destroy flora and fauna such as burrowing rodents or reptiles;

Removal of the top layer of sand due to levelling and grading of the site may reduce the seed bank for fu-

ture flora growth;

Wastes from construction have a potential to pollute the natural environment if not adequately managed;

There is a potential for damage to the vegetation of adjacent areas and lay-down areas at the construction

stage; and

Roads and pathways carry the potential to attract both contamination from littering and fugitive materials

and dusts. This could be particularly important where fly ash is being transported. The fringes of these

roads, particularly in the downwind direction may become contaminated from windblown ash residue. The

potentially toxic nature of these compounds may affect nearby vegetation.

The construction phase impacts are deemed to be of moderate, negative significance without the

implementation of mitigation measures.


There are potentially positive impacts associated with any site landscaping. Within the fence line, the terrestrial

vegetation will be provided a refuge from heavy grazing from animals such as camels and goats. This could


promote significant growth of plants which will in turn provide a habitat for invertebrates and birds, potentially

increasing the biodiversity of the site.

Exotic weed and pest control may be desired by the operator; however these activities may represent a threat

to any indigenous favourable species that are growing naturally and which provide ecological value to the area.

The operational phase impacts (i.e. landscaping) are deemed to be of minor, positive significance without the

implementation of mitigation measures.



Where significant site levelling and re-grading is expected, the productive top surface layer should be re-

moved separately and either spread back within the site once the re-grading has been completed, or

spread on the adjacent environment. This will give seeds that exist in the top surface layer a chance to

germinate.

Wastes from construction must be adequately managed in terms of a waste management regime so that

the waste does not end up in the terrestrial environment. An adequately enforced waste management plan

will also serve to reduce the attraction of pest species such as rats and flies to the site.

During construction, unnecessary movement of machinery around the site should be avoided where possi-

ble. Dedicated transport access ways should be designated to avoid damage to the existing natural vegeta-

tion. Construction activities should be limited to the proposed site and measures should be taken to avoid

damage to adjacent areas.

Vehicles carrying potentially toxic, friable materials such fly ash, should be covered at all times so that

these materials are not accidentally deposited into the natural environment, causing harm to flora and fau-

na. Littering from construction vehicles must be prohibited.


The residual effect of the construction works is considered to be of moderate negative significance.





The principal mitigation measures during the operational phase are as follows:

211 | 278

Any landscape planting should be designed to provide some ecological benefit in attracting bird and insect

species. Native species should be favoured over exotic species.

Where practicable, naturally growing vegetation within the fence-line should be protected and/or encour-

aged, i.e. ensuring that vehicles and members of staff keep to maintained roads and pathways would pro-

tect the onsite vegetation from trampling. This will encourage native species which will be free from grazing

pressure of livestock animals which would in turn attract fauna species such as birds and insects, increas-

ing the biodiversity of the site.

The land within the fence-line boundary should be kept clear of any municipal or industrial waste arising

from facility processes (other than designated areas where appropriate controls should be applied), staff

and staff housing and offsite sources. This would improve the general “environmental quality” and amenity

value of the site and reduce potential attraction of pest species such as rats and flies to the site.


Following mitigation from operational impacts, the residual impact will be minor, positive significance.




Summary 12.8

This chapter assesses the status of the existing terrestrial ecology on the proposed site and presents the


The site has been categorized as being of moderate ecological value and sensitivity due to the presence of

wadi and sandy beach areas which provide habitat for reptiles, rodent and bird species.

The overall construction impacts on the terrestrial ecology are considered to be of medium adverse significance

while the operational impacts (e.g. landscaping) will be of minor positive, significance.


Table 12-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for terrestrial ecology



impact

Construction Phase

Site clearance and grading may disturb or destroy flora and fauna; and removal of the top layer of sand may reduce the seed bank for future flora growth.

Medium sensitivity

Moderate adverse

Where significant site leveling and re-grading is expected, the productive top surface layer should be removed separately and either spread back within the site once the re-grading has been completed, or spread on the adjacent environment. This will give seeds that exist in the top surface layer a chance to germinate.

Moderate adverse

Wastes from construction have a potential to pollute the natural environment.

Medium sensitivity

Moderate adverse

Wastes from construction must be adequately managed in terms of a waste management regime so that the waste does not end up in the terrestrial environment; and

An adequately enforced waste management plan will serve to reduce the attraction of pest species such as rats and flies to the site.

Moderate adverse

Potential damage to the vegetation of adjacent areas and lay-down areas.

Medium sensitivity

Moderate adverse

Unnecessary movement of machinery around the site should be avoided where possible;

Dedicated transport access ways should be designated to avoid damage to the existing natural vegetation; and

Construction activities should be limited to the proposed site and measures should be taken to avoid damage to adjacent areas.

Moderate adverse

Roads and pathways carry the potential to attract both contamination from littering and fugitive materials and dusts.

Medium sensitivity

Minor adverse

Vehicles carrying loose materials should be covered at all times so that these materials are not accidentally deposited into the natural environment, causing harm to flora and fauna; and

Littering from construction vehicles must be prohibited.

Negligible

213 | 278

Operational Phase

Within the fence line, the terrestrial vegetation will be provided a refuge from heavy grazing from animals. This could promote growth of plants which will in turn provide a habitat for invertebrates and birds, potentially increasing the biodiversity of the site.

Low sensitivity Minor positive Any landscape plantings should be designed to provide some ecological benefit in attracting bird and insect species. Native species should be favoured over exotic species;

Where practicable, naturally growing vegetation within the fence-line should be protected and/or encouraged;

The land within the fence-line boundary should be kept clear of any municipal or industrial waste arising from facility processes, staff and staff housing and offsite sources.

Minor positive

Exotic weed and pest control desired by the operator. Low sensitivity


Negligible


13 Socio Economic

Introduction 13.1

This chapter of the ESIA considers the potential socio-economic impacts (both positive and negative) of the

proposed facility on its environs during both the construction and operational phases. Where appropriate,

mitigation measures and residual effects have been included and assessed respectively.

The Interorganisational Committee on Guidelines and Principles for Social Assessment (US NOAA , 2003)

provides a broad definition of a Social Impact Assessment as the:

‘systematic…appraisal of the impacts on the day to day quality of life for people and communities when the

environment is affected by development.’

This chapter highlights the methodology used to conduct this study and is followed by a brief examination of

Saudi Arabia’s macro socio-economic situation. From this, the baseline conditions of the proposed site and the

surrounding area are presented followed by an assessment of the social and economic effects of the proposed

development.





International Standards 13.2.1

The International Finance Corporation (IFC, part of the World Bank Group) ‘performance standards’ place a

significant emphasis on ensuring that the likely social and economic impacts of a project are identified and

minimised and that this is clearly demonstrated within the ESIA documentation. The specific IFC Performance

Standards appropriate to this assessment are:

Performance Standard 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and Impacts;

Performance Standard 2: Labour and Working Conditions; and

Performance Standard 4: Community Health, Safety and Security.

Performance Standard 1 requires that a project proponent should identify the range of stakeholders that may

be interested in their actions and consider how external communications might facilitate a dialog with all

stakeholders. Furthermore, Performance Standard 1 states that “The client will develop and implement a

215 | 278

Stakeholder Engagement Plan that is scaled to the Project risks and impacts and development stage, and be

tailored to the characteristics and interests of the Affected Communities”.

Performance Standard 2 (Labour and Working Conditions) in particular, determines the standard of care that

must be taken with regards to workers during the construction and operational phase of the proposed facility.

SEC and the appointed EPC and associated parties must ensure that the objectives are achieved and to

promote the fair treatment of workers and safe and healthy working conditions.

Performance Standard 4 places an emphasis on the avoidance or minimisation of impacts upon community

health, safety, and security that may arise from a proposed project.

IFC’s EHS Guidelines for Thermal Power Plant (2008) also address industry-specific impacts on the social and

economic aspects of the site and surrounding context, specifically:

Occupational Health and Safety; and,

Community Health and Safety.

National Standards 13.2.2

The Labour Law (by Royal Decree No. M/51, 2005) defines the regulation of employment, labour relations,

worker contracts and work place conditions in the Kingdom.

The law contains provisions intended to protect the interests of both employers and employees with the aim of

establishing a stable, equitable and sustainable work environment. This law will therefore provide a minimum

legal basis for the engagement of the Project workforce, the working conditions and worker housing. The law

also specifically addresses such issues as protection against occupational hazards; major industrial accidents

and work injuries; and health and social services.

The law will apply to the construction and operational workforce as well as applying to both the project

company staff and all contractors.

Methodology 13.3

An assessment of the Project’s social and economic impacts has been conducted using a range of research

techniques. The objective of this section is to identify the baseline social and economic characteristics of both

the site and the surrounding local area (approximately 50km radius of the site).

This baseline review focused upon the area’s demographics, infrastructure (roads, transportation and

communication levels) potable water and sanitation facilities, education and healthcare services, economic

activity, social organisation, land ownership patterns, and land use patterns.

However, due to the inherent difficulties in assessing the significance of socio-economic issues, it is inevitable

that there will be a degree of subjectivity in assessing the nature of the impacts described. Nevertheless, this

chapter has described the principal impacts on the local social and economic climate in terms of whether the


impact and residual effects are positive or negative; permanent (long-term) or temporary (short-term); and

major, moderate, minor, or negligible.

Desk Study 13.3.1

A desktop study review has been undertaken for the proposed project and the key information has been

incorporated into the social and economic assessment and decision making process.

Information sources considered as part of the desk study include, inter alia:

Information provided by the Client;

CIA – The World Factbook website: www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/;

World Bank’s web-site: www.worldbank.org;

International Financial Corporation’s website: www.ifc.org;

UNESCO Institute for Statistics: www.uis.unesco.org; and;

The International Labour Organisation (ILO) website: www.ilo.org.


Introduction 13.4.1

The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia as we know it today came into being in the early part of the 20th century. Under

the Basic Ruling Law, the King is the ultimate source of authority for the executive, judicial and organisational

powers of the State. The King appoints the Council of Ministers, which he also leads as Prime Minister. Saudi

Arabia’s political and judicial apparatus is bound to Islamic principles, with the sharia (Islamic law) the basis for

all legislation.

Population and Demography 13.4.2Saudi Arabia is the largest country in the Arabian Peninsula covering an area of 2.15 million square kilometres.

Its population was estimated to be 26.54 million in 2012, including 5.6 million non-nationals (CIA, 2013).

From 1981 to 2001, the population grew from 9.9 million to 21.4 million, a total increase of 54%, averaging out

at a per annum increase of about 3.67%. The United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs

(2010) has estimated that the rate of population growth in Saudi Arabia in the years 1975-1999 was at an even

higher rate of 4.2%, making it one of the highest in the world.

There are several causes for this tremendous population growth. The first being the reduction in infant death

rates over the past 20 years. From 65 deaths per 1000 live births in 1980, Saudi Arabia had dropped to 19 per

1000 by 1999, and 15.61 per 1000 in 2012. However, whilst this is one of the lowest in the Arab world, and less

217 | 278

than half the regional average, KSA ranks 111 out 223 countries in the world (CIA, 2013). Likewise, life

expectancy in Saudi Arabia, which was 61 in 1980, had risen to 72 by 1999 and 74.35 in 2012 (CIA, 2013).

The population is comprised of approximately 75% Saudi citizens and 25% non-Saudi residents. Of these, 4.7

million people live in the capital Riyadh. The age structure of the kingdoms population was estimated in 2012

to be (CIA, 2013):

0-14 years: 28.8% (male 3,913,775/female 3,727,767);



55-64 years: 4.1% (male 604,722/female 494,497); and

65 years and over: 3% (male 416,673/female 384,741).

Health Care 13.4.3

The increased life expectancy of both infants and the elderly has been largely due to the Saudi Government’s

investment in the health care system. In 2009 (CIA, 2013), the Kingdom spent 5% of GDP on health

expenditure and healthcare provisions within KSA have been widely cited by the World Health Organisation

(WHO) as being an exemplar model for the development of healthcare infrastructure within third world

countries.

Education 13.4.4

Saudi Arabia’s educational policy aims to ensure that education becomes more efficient, to meet the religious,

economic and social needs of the country and to eradicate illiteracy.

General education in the Kingdom consists of kindergarten, six years of primary school and three years each of

intermediate and high school. The Ministry of Education sets overall standards for the country's educational

system and also oversees special education for the handicapped. Early in 2003 the General Presidency for

Girls' Education was dissolved and its functions taken over by the Ministry, to administer the girls' schools and

colleges, supervise kindergartens and nursery schools and sponsor literacy programs for females. The first

government school for girls was built in 1964; by the end of the 1990s there were girls' schools in every part of

the Kingdom. Of the nearly 5 million students enrolled in Saudi schools for the academic years 2003-04, it is

thought about half of these were female.

In addition to the dramatic quantitative growth of the educational system since the introduction of the First

Development Plan in 1970, there has also been an improvement in the quality of education. One measure of

this emphasis is that while the number of students in the educational system increased six-fold between the

1970s and the 1990s, the number of full-time teachers grew more than nine-fold. The Kingdom's ratio of 15

students to every teacher is one of the lowest in the world. The government, however, continues to work to

improve educational standards. This has been achieved by raising the quality of teacher training programs,


improving standards for evaluation of students and increasing the use of educational technology. One aspect of

this is the introduction of computer science at the secondary level. In 2000, an ambitious school computer

project was named after Deputy Prime Minister and Commander of the National Guard Crown Prince Abdullah.

In addition, the administration of the educational system has also been enhanced by delegating greater

authority to the Regional Boards.

Employment and Labour Market 13.4.5

In 2012, it was estimated that Saudi Arabia had a total work force of 8 million (CIA, 2013) albeit, approximately

80% of the workforce was comprised of non-nationals (CIA, 2013). Despite having a high unemployment rate,

especially amongst the younger generations (estimates for the Kingdom range between 14% and 25%),

employment in the Kingdom can be divided into the following sectors:

Government 40%;

Industry, construction and oil 25%;

Services 30%; and,

Agriculture 5%.

Saudi Arabia has enacted a policy known colloquially as ‘Saudiisation’ the goal of which is to increase

employment of Saudi citizens by replacing 60% of the estimated 5.6 million foreign workers in the country. To

do this, the Saudi government has stopped issuing work visas for certain jobs and has moved to increase the

training of Saudi nationals and has minimum requirements for the hiring of Saudi nationals by private

companies.

The labour market of Saudi Arabia is subject to significant challenges, with considerable unemployment and

skills shortages in key sectors. Official records estimate unemployment of Saudi males as 10.7% (CIA, 2013)

(2012, est.) however, numerous sources recognise this as a significant underestimate, with some placing

unemployment as high as 25%. This is particularly acute in the large youth population, which generally lacks

the education and technical skills the private sector needs.

Economic Overview 13.4.6

Saudi Arabia has an oil based economy with strong government controls over major economic activities. The

petroleum sector accounts for roughly 75% of budget revenues, 45% of Gross Domestic Product (GDP), and

90% of export earnings. About 40% of GDP comes from the private sector. Saudi Arabia has the largest

reserves of petroleum in the world (26% of proven reserves). Saudi Arabia’s GDP was estimated in 2012 to be

$657 billion, with a real GDP growth of 6% on the previous year (CIA, 2013).

In spite of the recent surge in its oil income, Saudi Arabia continues to face long term economic challenges

including high rates of unemployment, as highlighted above. It has a rapidly growing population, around

1.523% (2012, est.) a year (CIA, 2013), which verifies the government’s consequent need for increased public

219 | 278

spending. Saudi Arabia’s young population has increased, while oil export revenues have sharply decreased.

Saudi Arabia has also moved towards subsidy cuts, tax increases and financial sector reforms.

While the government is expanding the country’s oil and gas industry, it is also diversifying the economy into

non-oil sectors, including manufacturing and services. Although the state retains a dominant role in the

economy, the government is seeking to encourage the development of the private sector, particularly in areas

such as utilities and services.

Since 1970, economic development in Saudi Arabia has been organised through five-year development plans,

which establishes infrastructure development targets and an overall framework for public spending. The

primary objective of this plan is to increase the Saudi employment through economic growth, new investments

education, and the development of national capabilities and skills.

Social Development 13.4.7

In the context of the Arab world, the welfare of Saudi Arabia’s citizens ranks reasonably highly. The 2011

United Nations Human Development Index (HDI) gives Saudi Arabia a score of 0.777, placing it within the High

Human Development category and above the average level for the Arab States data grouping. Graphical

analysis of the change in HDI in the Kingdom over the past 30 years also indicates that the growth of the HDI in

Saudi Arabia has outstripped the average rate for the Arab world.

The Project Site 13.4.8

The Project is located in area dominated by agricultural activity, but has begun to see industrial developments.

The movement of trade is flourishes in this region with the help of proximity to various ports the closest of which

is Duba Port, only 40 km to the south, allow for the import and export of goods.

Al Muwaylih Village is a growingly popular destination for visitors seeking a access to the Red Sea. Beach,

desert and unique cultural heritage offer visitors a diverse combination of opportunities. The region is also

known for its variety of plants and animals, and diverse locations like sandy deserts, hills, and unique rock

formations.


Figure 13-1 Al Muwaylih Village

Figure 13-2 Al Muwaylih Village

The coastal range is also a key resource for fisheries; approximately 5 km north from the Project site, a fish

farm of the Tabuk Fisheries Company exists, using cages for fishing process. Adjacent to the project border

remains an old mining site which belongs to the Ministry of Petroleum and Mineral Resources.

Figure 13-3 Tabuk Fisheries Company fish farm

Figure 13-4 Decommissioned industrial facility


A number of key sensitive receptors have been identified (existing and proposed) which will be the core focus

of the assessments undertaken within the ESIA technical chapters. These are considered to be the most

sensitive receptors within the potential zone of influence of the Project. The great majority are human receptors.

Specifically, Table 13-1 below described the following sensitive receptors in terms of socio-economic impacts.

221 | 278

Table 13-1 Key Sensitive Receptors


The fish farm Disturbance associated with the

construction work (noise, dust,

access)

Impacts to farming activties

associated with operational

discharges from the plant;


Project; and

Exposure to noise emissions from

the Project.

Duba Construction

workers

Health and safety;

Working conditions and welfare;

Exposure to air emissions from

existing facility.

Not Applicable

Residents of Al Muwaylih

Disturbance or nuisance due to

increased activities asscoiated with

construction; and

Increased pressure on local

facilities due to presence of the

construction labour force.


Project; and


the Project.

Operational staff at

existing Duba facility Not Applicable

Health and safety;

Working conditions;


Project; and


the Project.

Economic Positive economic impacts through

employment opportunities for Saudi

nationals and skills transfer.

Positive economic impacts through

employment opportunities for Saudi

nationals, skills transfer and the

supply of power.




Construction Worker Welfare

The main issues to be considered are associated with the labour force during the construction phase, which

includes the following:

Health and safety at work;

Access to medical facilities where required;

Reasonable working hours, wages and other benefits;

Provision of suitable and safe accommodation and sanitation; and

Access to welfare and recreation facilities.

With respect to health and safety at work, construction sites are considered to be a relatively dangerous

working environment and without proper health and safety controls there is a considerable risk of serious injury

or fatalities. Access to medical facilities is also crucial with respect to accidents and illness either in the

workplace or outside. In the absence of mitigation measures, the potential impacts are therefore considered to

be of major negative significance.

Other working conditions such as reasonable working hours, wages and other benefits are considered to be

good working practices and should be employed at all times. In the absence of mitigation measures, this has

the potential to be an impact of moderate negative significance.

In addition, a large number of labourers may be housed temporarily near the site. It must be ensured that the

labour and working conditions are of an acceptable standard. Housing must be adequately designed with

adequate sanitary and safety facilities such as fire suppressants. Issues such as retrenchment policies must be

clearly defined prior to work beginning.

Impacts on Surrounding Communities

It is considered that the potential for dust to impact upon any sensitive receptors is likely to be of negligible

significance given their distance from the Project site.

No impacts for dust and noise nuisance are likely in terms of the residents of Al Muwaylih due to the distance

separating them from the Project site.

Impact on Local Business

The influx of professional workers into the area, whilst expected to the relatively low, will generate economic

opportunities and rewards for the local population of Al Muwaylih, enhancing social and economic

development. This is deemed to be a minor positive impact.

223 | 278

Additional impacts may be associated with local employment created during the construction phase. Taken in

consideration, the high level of unemployment in the Kingdom, any additional creations for jobs and for Saudi

nationals is likely to prove beneficial for the local economy.

The construction of the proposed facility will create direct and indirect opportunities for various support service

providers including guards, cleaners, catering and other site management, prior to mitigation to be a minor

positive impact on a short term basis.

Social Issues

As above, the proposed facility will introduce a certain number of professional workers (including expatriates) to

the local area. However, in addition to the potential benefits that this may represent, this influx may also result

in social and cultural tensions, albeit this is deemed unlikely and thus thought to be a minor negative impact on

a short term basis.


Operational Worker Welfare

One of the key issues is ensuring that operational staff and contractors are protected from workplace incidents

and illness through appropriate health and safety systems both during normal operation and other tasks such

as maintenance and repair. Appropriate safety systems such as fire protection and emergency procedures will

also be required. The potential health and safety impacts are considered to be of moderate negative

significance in the absence of suitable control measures.

Noise Nuisance upon Local Residents/Receptors

The results of the noise modelling assessment (Chapter 7) indicate that the predicted sound pressure levels will

meet the 70dB(A) criteria at the boundaries of the site. No noise impacts are expected at any sensitive

receptors or at Al Muwaylih itself. The impact is therefore determined to be negigible.

Air Quality Impacts on Human Health

A full assessment of air quality impacts associated with the operation of the Project has been undertaken within

Chapter 6: Air Quality.

The primary operational impact on air quality relates principally to stack emissions and their potential effect on

ground level concentrations (GLCs) of key airborne pollutants, such as SO2, NOx and particulates.

The results of the dispersion modelling show that under both typical and worst-case operating conditions no

exceedences of the PME AQSs for the pollutants considered in the assessment were predicted to occur as a

result of emissions from the Project at sensitive receptors in this area over all averaging periods. The impact is

therefore determined to be negigible.

Impacts on Local Businesses and Social Issues

As intimated above, the influx of professional workers, labourers, and other staff members into the area will

generate economic opportunities and rewards for the local population of Al Muwaylih, enhancing social and

economic development. This is deemed to be a minor positive impact on a long-term basis.


Indirect opportunities for various support service providers including guards, cleaners, catering and other site

management will provide employment and a further source of income for these services giving a minor to

moderate positive impact.

The employment of local workers on such a project of national importance with the requisite training which will

be included within their contracts will improve their capabilities and skill. This will also result in improving their

employability should they move on from the Project. This is deemed to be a negligible to minor positive impact;

The additional employees required for the operation of the proposed facility will put additional pressure on local

services which is deemed to be a negligible negative impact.

Similar to the construction phase, a potentially positive economic impact will result from any local employment

created by the operational phase of the Project. Whilst the likely nature of these impacts, and the effect of

expatriate workers, is largely unchanged from the construction phase, they are likely to be amplified by the

greater time-scales involved in the operation of the site.

The relatively small workforce required during the operational phase means that potential impacts are likely to

be less significant. However, all relevant labour and working condition laws and guidelines must still be adhered

to during this phase.

The marine modelling has demonstrated that the existing fish farming operations will not be adversely impacted

by the operational phase of the project due to water quality impacts associated plant outfall.



Construction Worker Welfare

Construction activities undertaken for the proposed facility will be managed in such a way as to minimise

construction impacts through the Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP); to be developed by

the EPC. Such measures are to include:

The development of a Health and Safety and Environmental Policy would provide detailed health and safety

guidelines for staff, personnel and sub-contractors, including personal safety, site conduct, security, site

safety zoning and emergency procedures;

In common with Performance Standard 2, on site medical facilities must be made available throughout the

construction phase for the use of workers. Trained health and safety and first aid personnel must be identi-

fied to workers as part of their training schedule;

Suitably qualified personnel must be chosen for potentially hazardous activities such as for the installation

and testing of specialist electrical equipment;

225 | 278

Appropriate action must be taken for outbreaks of illnesses amongst workers, minimising the transmission

as far as is possible;

The EPC contractor must establish a Human Resources Policy which will be communicated to employees

with information including, but not limited to, their rights under national labour and employment laws, salary,

and other associated information, such as medical care and insurance. The Human Resources Policy will

ensure an approach of non-discrimination is followed with equal opportunities for all. No child labour or

forced labour will be used for the proposed facility;

In common with Performance Standard 1 (Section 23), the establishment of a ‘grievance mechanism’ for

workers and local residents, will involve the identification of a local environmental co-ordinator, identified by

the EPC within the management structure, to identify and log all concerns. This contact information will be

provided to the public via appropriate transparent measures and a placard left on the perimeter of the site

with further details of contact arrangements. The resultant procedure to address these concerns will be

made clear to the complainant and a set process followed, as identified within the CEMP, and within a suit-

ably prompt period;

Throughout the construction and operation of the proposed facility, a long term training programme should

be implemented to ensure adequate training and qualification of all staff employed within the IPP and its as-

sociated facilities. The aim of this programme would be to ensure that personnel acquire and maintain the

combination of knowledge and demonstrated skills as required to safely and adequately fulfil their responsi-

bilities. The objective of the long term training plan will be to ensure that the facility is operated safely and

efficiently, while also guaranteeing the long term economic success of the project; and,

In common with Performance Standard 4, all components of, and infrastructure associated with, the project

will be constructed in accordance with industry best practice and by qualified engineers.

Impacts on Surrounding Communities

Construction activities undertaken for the Project will be managed in such a way as to minimise construction

impacts through the EHS Plan which will be implemented and monitored by the Contractor and any sub-

contractors, to include an update of existing EHS documentation. The EHS Plan will also be required to

incorporate all the mitigation measures identified within this ESIA, which is presented in Chapter 15. This will

ensure that the effects of construction works upon the local community is minimised.

In addition, a grievance procedure needs to be established for local residents to ensure that any issues are

resolved to the satisfaction of all parties. This will include the following:

Clear contact numbers for key construction management staff who can be contacted in the case of

complaints, which could be posted on signage near to the site access gates or in leaflets distributed to the

local community; and

A clear grievance procedure which involves studying the basis of complaints, identifying corrective actions

and communicating the response to the complainant.



With the implementation of the CEMP it is considered that health and safety risks for construction site workers,

particularly the risks of serious injury, illness or fatalities are significantly reduced and therefore the residual

significance is predicted to be minor negative significance.

With the implementation of the mitigation measures set out above it is predicted that the residual impacts upon

construction staff in relation to their working conditions and welfare will be negligible significance.

Nuisance to nearby landuses due to increased dust, noise, emissions, traffic and increased levels of activity will

be kept to a minimum with the use of construction corridors and low-noise producing equipment, where

possible. These mitigation measures will be identified and implemented through a CEMP. Following the

implementation of such techniques, the impact is deemed to be a negligible impact on a short-term basis,

although concerns from residents will be iterative. As such, the CEMP must be viewed as an ‘organic’

document which will require constant updating in view of new concerns coming to light, and allowing the

addressing of such concerns.

The residual effects of the construction of the Plant on the local businesses will be a minor positive effect.

The residual effects related to potential social issues relating to the presence of a construction workforce will be

negligible.

The residual impacts of indirect employment opportunities and influx of professional workers during the

construction are both of minor positive significance.





It is recommended that the following measures are adopted during the operational phase of the Project, ideally

within an Operational Environmental Management Plan (OEMP), a framework for which is provided in Chapter

16:


To provide the employees with a safe and risk free environment, it is recommended that a comprehensive

EHS plan is developed and implemented. This framework, in line with Performance Standard 2, will

address measures for accident prevention, identification, mitigation and management of hazards (including

physical, chemical, and radiological hazards), training of workers and reporting of accidents and incidents;

Occupational noise standards need to be maintained as part of the Health and Safety of the employees at

the facility. It is therefore important that noise levels in working areas are limited to less than 85 dB(A) at

227 | 278

1m from any noise generating equipment. It is further recommended that a full occupational noise survey is

undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees;

In accordance with Performance Standard 2, the Project should develop and implement a human resource

policy outlining the management approach towards working conditions, entitlement to wages and any

benefits and terms of employment. This policy must be disseminated and accessible for all employees,

clearly defining the employees’ legal rights and the management’s statement on child labour, forced labour

and on non-discrimination and equal opportunities. This policy will also provide the mechanism through

which employees can express and register their concerns and the system through which these grievances

will be addressed;

Expatriate staff must be provided with an induction course (as part of their training), which will highlight

local customs, cultures and living conditions in KSA. The objective of this course will be to familiarise the

expatriate staff with knowledge of their host country and provide an understanding and respect for other

cultures. The aim will be to reduce, prevent and mitigate against social and cultural tensions and potential

hostility between workers and the residents of surrounding communities;

The provision of facilities for workers, such as kitchen facilities, dining areas, washrooms, and a mosque,

will minimise the placing of undue pressure on existing local services;

Where feasible, staff will be of local origin where suitably qualified applicants are available. This will ensure

a degree of balance between the use of non-Saudi Arabian workers and locally employed personnel during

the operational phase, and limit the impact on the local economy;

In common with Performance Standard 4, all components of and infrastructure associated with the Project

will be operated in accordance with industry best practice by qualified staff; and

In line with IFC Performance Standard 1, it is also recommended that a grievance mechanism is

established for local residents, giving them a platform to raise any concerns.

Noise Nuisance

The predicted environmental noise emissions from the Project during the operational phase are below the noise

criteria based on the supplied noise data, therefore no significant noise nuisance upon nearby sensitive

receptors is expected and no additional mitigation measures are required.

However, it is important to note that there are also occupational noise standards that need to be maintained as

part of the Health and Safety of the employees at the facility. It is therefore important that noise levels in

working areas are limited to less than 85 dB(A) at 1m from any noise generating equipment.


The key mitigation requirement which can be implemented relates to the stack design of the Project. SEC

requirements are for the HRSG stacks to be a minimum of 60m which has been shown to be more than

adequate to ensure acceptable ground level concentrations.


All combustion units and associated plant on-site will be subject to a regular inspection, servicing and

maintenance programme to ensure optimal efficiency and ensure, as far as practicable, all equipment is in

good working order at all times and will minimise pollutant emissions.

Emissions of NOx, SO2 and PM10 from the Project will be continuously monitored using a Continuous

Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS).

Ambient air monitoring of NOx, SO2 and PM10 using a continuous air quality monitoring station should be

considered to verify the current baseline and impact of the existing facilities in the airshed.

Impacts on Local Businesses

The detailed design of the Project must consider measures to minimise or avoid any impacts upon the existing

fish farming operations.





It is not considered that there will be any Type 1 significant cumulative effects during the operational phase of

the Project. Type 2 cumulative impacts will be related to the


It is generally thought that the development of the Project will have a positive impact on the local economy,

particularly in terms of local job creation, and if the mitigation measures detailed above, and within the

framework OEMP delivered as part of this ESIA are followed. In addition, it will be the responsibility of the EPC

contractor and Operations and Maintenance Company to develop comprehensive Environmental Management

Plans specific to the construction and operation of the proposed facility.

Due to the provision of additional employment opportunities during both construction and operation, the

proposed facility is expected to represent a positive employment option which may draw prospective residents

back to the region.

Key economic benefits that are thought likely to be derived from the proposed facility include:

The creation of temporary and permanent jobs during the construction and operational phases of the pro-

posed development;

The potential for labour and procurement contracts to be let locally during the construction phase and the

capital cost of the redevelopment; and,

229 | 278

The potential for indirect increased local spending from the incoming workforce.

The main negative impact would be associated with impacts upon the existing fish farm to the north of the site.

Discharges from the facility during operation have the potential to affect the farming operations.


Table 13-2 Impact and mitigation summary table for socio-economic



impact

Construction Phase

Workers health and safety: Construction sites are considered to be a relatively dangerous working environment and without proper health and safety controls there is a considerable risk of serious injury or fatalities.

High sensitivity Negligible to major adverse

Development of a CEMP which include the following measures (for example):

The development of a Health and Safety and Environmental Policy shall provide detailed health and safety guidelines for staff, personnel and sub-contractors, including personal safety, site conduct, security, site safety zoning and emergency procedures;

On-site medical facilities must be made available throughout the construction phase for the use of workers. Trained health and safety and first aid personnel must be identified to workers as part of their training schedule; and

Suitably qualified personnel must be chosen for potentially hazardous activities such as for the installation and testing of specialist electrical equipment.

Minor adverse

Working and accommodation conditions such as working hours, wages and housing.

High sensitivity Moderate adverse All relevant labour and working condition laws and guidelines

must be adhered. Negligible

Dust and noise nuisance upon surrounding communities. Low sensitivity Negligible

Construction activities undertaken for the Project will be managed in such a way as to minimise construction impacts through the EHS Plan which will be implemented and monitored by the Contractor and any sub-contractors, to include an update of existing EHS documentation; and

A grievance procedure needs to be established for local residents to ensure that any issues are resolved to the satisfaction of all parties.

Negligible

231 | 278



impact

Influx of professional workers into the area generating economic opportunities and rewards for the local population of Al Muwaylih.

Low to medium sensitivity Minor positive

As the impacts are considered to be positive there is no requirement for any mitigation measures to be implemented.

Minor positive

Indirect employment opportunities for various support service providers including guards, cleaner etc.

Low to medium sensitivity Minor positive Minor positive

Influx of professional workers causing social and cultural tensions in the community.

Low to medium sensitivity Minor adverse

Clear grievance procedure and ease of contact maintained between the local residents and businesses. Negligible

Operational Phase

Workers health and safety. High sensitivity Moderate adverse


Implementation of a comprehensive EHS plan; and

It is therefore important that noise levels in working areas are limited to less than 85 dB(A) at 1m from any noise generating equipment. It is further recommended that a full occupational noise survey is undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees.

Minor adverse

Noise nuisance upon local receptors.


The predicted environmental noise emissions from the Project are below the noise criteria based on the supplied noise data, therefore no significant noise nuisance upon nearby sensitive receptors is expected and no additional mitigation measures are required.

Negligible




impact

Potential health impacts upon the employees as a result of SO2, NOx and particulates exceedences.

High sensitivity Negligible

The key mitigation requirement which can be implemented relates to the stack design of the Project;

All combustion units and associated plant on-site will be subject to a regular inspection, servicing and maintenance programme;

Emissions of NOx, SO2 and PM10 will be continuously monitored using a Continuous Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS); and

Ambient air monitoring of NOx, SO2 and PM10 using a continuous air quality monitoring station should be considered to verify the current baseline and impact of the existing facilities in the airshed.

Negligible

Influx of professional workers into the area generating economic opportunities and rewards for the local population of Al Muwaylih.

Low to medium sensitivity Minor positive

As the impacts are considered to be positive there is no requirement for any mitigation measures to be implemented.

Minor positive

Indirect opportunities for various support service providers and other site management providing employment and a further source of income for these services.


Minor to moderate positive

Minor to moderate positive

Improvement of the workers capabilities and skills thanks to the training received for this type of Project.


Negligible to minor positive

Negligible to minor positive

233 | 278



impact

Additional pressure on local services due to the additional employees required.


Negligible


The provision of facilities for workers, such as kitchen facilities, dining areas, washrooms, and a mosque, will minimise the placing of undue pressure on existing local services;

Where feasible, staff will be of local origin where suitably qualified applicants are available. This will ensure a degree of balance between the use of non-Saudi Arabian workers and locally employed personnel during the operational phase, and limit the impact on the local economy;

The Project should develop and implement a human resource policy outlining the management approach towards working conditions, entitlement to wages and any benefits and terms of employment; and

Expatriate staff must be provided with an induction course (as part of their training), which will highlight local customs, cultures and living conditions in KSA.

Negligible

Labour and working conditions. High sensitivity Minor adverse Minor negative

Impacts upon the existing fish farming operations associated with the plant sea outfall

High sensitivity Negligible The plant is not expected to have adverse impacts upon the

existing fish farm based on the results of the preliminary marine modelling study.

Negligible


14 Cultural, Heritage and Archaeology

Introduction 14.1

The Tabouk region is recognised to be rich in its antiquities and archaeological sites such as petroglyphs, forts,

and Syrian-Egyptian pilgrimage route. The Al-Muwaylih Fort, which dates back to the sixteenth century AD, is

located approximately8km south of the Project site.

Despite this, no features of archaeological or cultural significance were identified on or near to the site.

Management measures have been defined in Chapter 16 to ensure chance archaeological finds are dealt with

appropriately during construction.

235 | 278

15 Landscape and Visual

Introduction 15.1

This chapter determines the significance of the project in terms of visual impact by defining the character of the

existing landscape and locating potentially significant viewpoints. The purpose of this chapter is to describe,

determine and assess the existing character and visual resources of the Project site and its immediate

surroundings.

This chapter also evaluates the likely visual impacts of the development on the landscape during the

construction and operational phases and, where appropriate, pertinent mitigation measures are proposed.

Although landscape impacts and visual impacts are interrelated, it is instructive to briefly explain the difference

between ‘landscape’ and ‘visual’ impacts:

‘Landscape’ refers to the appearance of the land (its shape and colour for example). It is not just a visual

resource but is also shaped by a number of factors, such as the topography, geology and ecology of the ar-

ea. Generally, landscape impacts are changes that affect the character and quality of a landscape, due pri-

marily to development.

Whilst, ‘visual’ impacts relate solely to changes in the available view or views of the landscape, and, im-

portantly, the effect of such changes on people.

Relevant Standards 15.2

There is no legislation in Saud Arabia concerning the landscape and visual impacts of a project.

Methodology 15.3

The methodology used follows and incorporates accepted international best practice, such as information

detailed within the ‘Guidelines for Landscape & Visual Impact Assessment (2002), produced from a combined

venture between the UK’s Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment, the Landscape Institute;

and Morris and Therivel (2001), particularly in relation to. Including a site survey undertaken in May 2014 to

establish the character of the existing site and its surroundings and the relationships of the site to adjacent

areas and public views points towards the site.



The project site is coastal with sandy and rocky beaches on the seaward side. Behind are raised flat gravel

areas intersected by dry wadi beds with relatively lush vegetation. The site could be described as being a

natural remote and scenic coastal area. Figure 15-1 shows representative images of the project site.

View towards the coast across the project site

The sandy beach on the coastal side of the site

View inland from the project site

Typical feature wadi on site

Figure 15-1 Representative image of key site features

The main viewpoint of the site would be vehicles passing on the road parallel to the inland side of the site or

boats viewing the site from offshore. There are no other significant viewpoints.

237 | 278

Assessment of Construction and Operational Phase Impacts 15.5


During the construction phase, plant and equipment, including large cranes, will be present on the site. Prior to

mitigation, such structures are likely to have a temporary impact of minor negative significance.


The proposed project will be visible during the operational phase, since the facility is expected to cover an area

of approximately 1.5 km by 1.0 km. However, the presence of a power plant in this area will have an impact

upon the visual character of the landscape. This is assessed as being a permanent impact of moderate

negative significance.

14.6 MITIGATION MEASURES, RESIDUAL AND CUMULATIVE EFFECTS


Implementation of site hoardings in strategic areas and general good site management practices related to

material stockpiling and waste management will be the main mitigation measures during construction.


Given the temporary nature of the construction operations and the site location, the residual effects will be

temporary and of negligible significance.


Impacts relating to the landscape and visual aspects of proposed development are unlikely to contribute to

cumulative impacts associated with construction works at the site.


The surrounding area is remote with limited existing human influences. It is considered that the visual impact on

the areas will be of moderate significance and limited mitigation will be required. It is proposed within the

Landscaping Plan that a vegetated buffer is planted around the inland side of the site.


Given the nature of the locality and lack of sensitive receptors, it is anticipated that the overall residual impact

will be of permanent but moderate negative significance.



Impacts relating to the landscape and visual aspects of proposed development are unlikely to contribute to

cumulative impacts associated with operations at the site.


The proposed project site is located in a remote coastal landscape with limited sensitive receptors (view

points). However, the presence of a power plant in this area will have an impact upon the visual character of

the landscape. There are limited opportunities for mitigating the permanent impact of this kind of facility.

However, it recommended planting a vegetated buffer along the inland side of the power plant to improve the

aesthetic appearance.

239 | 278

Table 15-1 Impact and mitigation summary table for landscape and visual



impact

Construction Phase

Construction activities (cranes, excavations, etc.) will have a temporary adverse impact on the landscape character of the surrounding area.

Medium sensitivity Minor adverse

Site hoardings; and

Good site management – material stockpiling, waste management etc.

Minor adverse

Operational Phase

The permanent presence of the project will have an adverse effect on the natural, remote and scenic nature of the surrounding environment.

Medium sensitivity

Moderate adverse

Using vegetation to act as a visual buffer in strategic areas. Moderate adverse


16 Framework Construction Environmental Management Plan

Purpose of the CEMP 16.1

This chapter proposes a framework for pollution control and best practice measures that should be adopted

during the construction phase of the Project in order to avoid, minimise, or offset likely impacts in the areas on

and surrounding the site that are attributable to the project.

It is recommended that the mitigation requirements set out within this Framework Construction Environmental

Management Plan (CEMP) chapter will be included in full within any Project Environmental, and Health and

Safety (EHS) Plan or CEMP established by the construction contractor and other associated standalone

documents where relevant.

The updated Project EHS Plan or CEMP will therefore provide a logical extension of the ESIA process and will

ensure that recommendations contained within the ESIA are implemented, assuring that the Project does not

deviate from the environmental and social profile that formed the basis of this document.

In a similar vein the Project EHS Plan or CEMP will serve to ensure that requirements of the General

Environmental Regulations (GER, 2006) and, where relevant, the IFC Operational Standards and Guidelines

are also met and serve as a clear and auditable indication as to how those requirements are implemented

during the construction phase.

The primary objective of the Project EHS Plan or CEMP will be to provide a clear direction on the requirements

of the construction contractor and all subcontractors in their activities: each requirement is measurable and

enforceable; hence any non-compliance can be identified and addressed swiftly.

The objectives of the Project EHS Plan or CEMP are defined as follows:

Prescribe an overall management structure with clearly defined accountabilities and responsibilities;

Ensure an environmental management structure responsible for implementing the relevant measures within

the Framework CEMP;

Ensure adequate and relevant environmental induction training for all contractors and subcontractors

(including construction workers);

Incorporate Emergency Planning into the management system;

Stipulate a programme of deliverables, meetings, audits, communication protocols and reporting

requirements to monitor and manage the construction works;

241 | 278

Define objectives and targets for environmental and social management on the construction activities

(these objectives and targets will be captured in the detailed Environmental Control Plans of the full Project

EHS Plan or CEMP);

Implement Mitigation Measures and Monitoring Programmes;

Prescribe a mechanism for recording and reporting environmental and social concerns, improvement,

complaints or incidents;

Define the communications protocols for liaison with local communities and regulatory authorities on

environmental and social matters;

Ensure compliance with all regulatory requirements of the GER 2006 and with all IFC operational standards

and Guidelines, where relevant; and

Stipulate a mechanism for periodical review for the Project EHS Plan or CEMP.

ISO 14001 Model 16.2

One of the most widely used environmental management systems, developed by the International Standards

Organisation (ISO), is the ISO14001 standard for environmental management of activities. The standard

provides a logical framework within which to prepare and develop the Project Environmental Health and Safety

Plan and subsequent formal EMS (if applicable). The structure of a typical EMS certified to ISO 14001 is shown

in Table 16-1.

Table 16-1 ISO 14001 Structure


CEMP Implementation 16.3

Resources, Roles, Responsibility 16.3.1Environmental governance will be clearly set out and maintained as a stand-alone document by the

Construction Project Director for the duration of the project. This structure will be agreed prior to and during the

construction phases. Although individual sub-contractors may have adequate controls in place when reviewed

independently, the Construction Project Director is the lead contractor for EHS in the proposed scheme and

has the authority to update, replace or approve them as appropriate to ensure its responsibilities are met.

These relationships will be set out in an organisational chart which will be supported by a more detailed

description of the roles and responsibilities of the organisations such as Construction Project Director, Site

Manager, Site EHS Manager, Subcontractors Site EHS representatives etc. All construction teams with a

significant project involvement should be consulted as part of the development process.

Clear roles and responsibilities for internal staff will also be specified for the construction phase which will

include responsibility for both environmental as well as health and safety issues. The definition of roles and

responsibilities is an important part of environmental governance and allows for discreet management of tasks

and involvement throughout the project team.

It is everyone’s responsibility to ensure that the Project EHS Plan or CEMP policies and applicable Client’s

procedures are adhered to.

Training and Induction Procedure 16.3.2Competence, training and awareness are critical to the effective implementation of the Project EHS Plan or

CEMP, and therefore all site personnel and visitors must attend an EHS induction course which includes

environmental awareness in order to gain an understanding of the environmental aspects and associated

environmental mitigation measures related to the construction phase.

An Induction and Training Procedure will be developed to cover aspects of training involving those personnel

and activities likely to have a significant effect on the environment, including: Induction Training for New Site

Personnel including General Site Induction, Supervisors Site EHS Training, Visitor Induction and Toolbox

Talks.

In addition, the Project EHS Plan or CEMP will be updated in order to include Specialist Training for individuals

with specific roles and responsibilities, including but not limited to: Chemical and fuel handling, Hot Work,

Handling or organic solvents, Handling of toxic materials etc.

Environmental Incident Procedure 16.3.3A site specific emergency procedure for all foreseeable eventualities that pose significant risks to site

personnel, local communities and the environment will be developed and will need to be implemented and

adequately communicated to all involved parties during the construction phase of the project. These emergency

243 | 278

plans will be supported by planned simulated training exercises in order to test their robustness and

practicability.

CEMP Compliance 16.3.4The Project EHS Plan or CEMP will set out how the compliance of construction activities will be periodically

inspected and audited through:

Routine inspections:

Areas Supervisor’s Weekly Inspections;

Site Managers Weekly EHS Tour;

Site EHS Managers Inspections; and

Routine daily Surveillance Inspections.

EHS Audits:

Subcontractor Audits, undertaken within the first month of the arrival of the subcontractor, then

subsequently on a 6 monthly basis;

EHS Road map Self-Assessment;

EHS Road map Verification Assessments; and

Internal Site Audits.

Client and Third Party Audit.

Non-conformances Management Procedure 16.3.5Any deviations from the Project EHS Plan or CEMP identified by site personnel or other parties through formal

site inspections, audits, visual observations or other mechanisms, would need to be documented and

associated corrective action and preventative action implemented by competent individuals in order to mitigate

the environmental impacts and to prevent re-occurrence.

Complaints Management Procedure 16.3.6A Complaint Procedure will be established in order to effectively address all complaints received by the project

management team and construction contractor; outlining roles and responsibilities, and timeframes for

investigation and resolution of complaints.

Environmental Review Procedure 16.3.7A review of any Project EHS Plan or CEMP will be required in order to ensure that all requirements of this

Framework CEMP are included and to ensure continual improvement, suitability and effectiveness of the

overall management system.


Environmental Control Plans 16.3.8Specific Environmental Control Plans (ECP) detailing mitigation measures which must be implemented during

the construction phase of a project in order to minimise potential environmental and social impacts. This will

include as minimum all mitigation measures identified within the ESIA.

Typically the structure of an ECP will be as follows:

1. Environmental Impacts;

2. Responsibilities;

3. IFC Guidelines;

4. Standards; and

5. Environmental or Social Issue(s):

a. Objective;

b. Target;

c. Responsibilities;

d. Mitigation measures;

e. Monitoring Activities;

f. Reporting; and

g. Records Management.

Environmental Aspects and Mitigation Measures 16.4

An assessment of construction activities will be conducted to determine the significant environmental aspects

and resulting impacts, taking into consideration normal, abnormal and emergency operation, together with the

location of the sensitive receptors identified.

The environmental aspects will be determined and ranked based on an approved methodology, which will be

consistent with the ISO 14001:2004 Standard for Environmental Management Systems and detailed within the

Project EHS Plan or CEMP.

Each contractor and sub-contractor will be required to undertake their own review of the Environmental Aspect

Register, which includes the potential environmental impacts of the project during the construction phase. This

sets out the construction activities where mitigation measures will be implemented. They will also be required to

use the same approach provided in the methodology detailed within the Project EHS Plan or CEMP to

determine the significance of any new aspects and impacts resulting from a new construction activity if the

methodology differs significantly from what has been assumed in advance of the appointment of the

245 | 278

construction contractor. This will therefore identify any additional environmental aspects and impacts which

would need to require additional mitigation measures.

The ESIA has identified the following aspects that require control during the construction phase:

Marine Environment;

Air Quality;

Noise and Vibration;

Solid Waste Management;

Socio Economic;

Soils, Geology and Contamination;

Water Resources and Wastewater;

Marine Environment 16.4.1During the construction phase, the following mitigation measures shall be implemented:

A marine construction and dredging plan will be developed to avoid, or substantially reduce and / or mitigate

the potential impacts upon identified receptors, including:

– A justification for the selection of the dredging technology will be utilised;

– Details of all mitigation and management measures proposed for dredging and marine construction;

– The plan for disposing of the dredge material; and

– Environmental monitoring requirements.

If a cetacean or other sensitive species is spotted within the surrounding area, the work will not commence.

Observations will continue during work and works will cease as a response to any sightings and will begin

again only 30 minutes after last sighting;

Marine construction will not be undertaken during inclement weather conditions;

Suitable dredging methods will be used to minimise the loss of sediments into the neighbouring water col-

umn and cause minimum disturbance to the marine ecology of the area;

Marine construction areas shall be bunded where possible.

Fences will be erected for near water construction areas to minimise rock and soil fall or waste materials

migrating into the marine environment;

Fuels, oils, hazardous chemicals and hazardous wastes shall be stored in covered, bunded areas to ensure

that spillages are isolated from the storm water system and therefore cannot discharge into the sea;


Dewatering effluents must not be discharged directly to the marine environment – settlement basins and silt

screens will be used and the turbidity of the resultant water measured frequently;

Silt screens will be employed where practicable in order to reduce the dispersion of sediments; and

Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in sea water will be monitored continuously at various locations in and

around the dredging/construction work areas in order to assess the sediment transport and the resultant im-

pacts.

Air Quality 16.4.2

Mitigation Measures by construction activities

Stockpiling of friable materials

Minimize stock pile heights (circa. 3m);

Pile surfaces will be as smooth as possible to reduce wind erosion. An irregular pile surface will create

turbulence that aggravates dust;

When reclaiming from stockpiles, loaders will work on the lee side (sheltered side) of the pile where its

activity is sheltered from the wind;

Stockpiled materials shall be covered with tarpaulin type materials to prevent wind blowing off dust from

these areas; and

Good housekeeping to make sure that unnecessary stockpiled waste material does not accumulate and

become airborne pollution.

Vehicle movement

Vehicles and vessels carrying loose aggregate should be covered at all times;

Vehicles should not be overloaded while transporting sand, as this may lead to spillage and littering of

roads;

Keep vehicles equipment as free from dust as possible; and

Make sure tailgates of trucks are secured properly to prevent spillage of aggregate and clean up

spillages immediately;

Temporary site roads and any unpaved areas will be watered to avoid excessive dust. The frequency of

watering will be determined by weather conditions (wind, humidity, temperature) and the erodibility of

the soil;

Existing roads to be utilized to the maximum extent;

The contractors will ensure that adequate supply and storage of water is available on site for dust

suppression;

247 | 278

Speed of vehicles will be restricted to 15 km/h along the temporary site roads and any unpaved areas of

the site to avoid creating excessive dust;

Fencing of construction area to prevent external vehicle movement on site;

Any machinery which is intermittent in use will be shut off during periods of non-use, or if not practical to

be throttled back to a minimum;

Washing of vehicle tyres to prevent dust emissions during movement outside the Project site; and

Provision of covers on vehicles transporting soil or other loose materials.

Unpaved Roads

New direct access roads would be constructed providing clearly designated haul routes;

Existing tracks would either be compacted and/or water sprayed;

Designated working corridors would assist in controlling the routes for vehicle access across the site

and reducing airborne dust;

Regular non-potable water spraying (dust suppression) of the haul roads with water sprinklers;

Regular inspection and, if necessary, cleaning of surrounding roads to check for dust deposits (and

removal if necessary);

Keep speed limit to 15km/hr on site, with signs erected to this effect; and

Paving of roads will stop dust emissions from these surfaces, which has already been undertaken for

the site access road.

Materials handling

Operators must exercise caution to maintain minimum height for dropping of aggregate materials;

Loader operators should be trained to avoid overfilling their bucket and spilling aggregate on the carry

over to the trucks; and

Operators must be trained to observe potential problem conditions. For example, the loader takes a cut

from a pile just to see how dusty it is. If it looks like a problem, wet the pile down.

Grading

Grading of material is potentially a source of dust. It is envisaged that such operations will not generally

be undertaken during periods of high wind and will be subject to stringent application of dust

suppression sprays.

Cement batching

On-site cement and concrete batching, where required, will be undertaken in suitable areas, with wind

shielding to avoid wind-blown dry cement.


Exposed areas

Plant naturally occurring (endemic), desert adapted trees and shrubs around the perimeter of the site to

act as a wind and dust screen;

Do not remove any existing site vegetation unless absolutely necessary; and

Cover exposed dust generating areas with shade cloth materials until needed.

Climatic conditions

During extremely windy conditions, activities should be temporarily ceased to prevent excessive dust

generation.

Demolition

Dust suppression using spraying of treated water on land and buildings;

Water spraying will prevent dust generation due to demolition of buildings and other facilities;

Demolition to be avoided during high wind speeds; and

Screens to be provided for each demolition activity to prevent dust emissions to nearby receptors.

Excavation

Spraying of water on the ground before excavation to moist the area and prevent dust emissions; and

Loading of materials into the trucks by excavators to be carried out from minimum height to prevent dust

generation.

Piling

Spraying of water on the ground before piling to moist the area and prevent dust emissions.

Sand blasting

Barriers or protective screens to be installed around any sand blasting areas to avoid the dispersion of

fugitive dust.

Sand blasting of materials, if required, to be conducted in offsite locations prior to shipment to site based

on the feasibility.

Construction Vehicles and Plant Air Emissions

Exhaust emissions from Vehicle and Machinery

Heavy machinery will be serviced prior to commencement of construction. Any emission filters or

catalytic converters (in the case of petrol engines) will be tested for compliance with supplier’s

specifications. In the case of non-compliance, they will be replaced;

249 | 278

Motor vehicles and plant equipment are to be fitted with appropriate exhaust equipment to minimise

emissions;

The contractor shall inspect the machinery, vehicles and vessels every morning for defects (indicator

lights, oil leaks) and excessive emissions;

All vehicles and machinery including diesel power generators will be frequently maintained and serviced

to manufacturer specifications with at least a major service every 6 months;

Clean fuel, i.e. low sulphur diesel will be used.

Black smoke will not be allowed from construction equipment.

Idling of vehicles will be avoided at site. Vehicles will be switched off when not in use.

Proactive liaison with the PME and local residents for any complaints;

All complaints pertaining to the construction vehicles and plant machinery will be recorded as well as

immediate actions taken to rectify the situation;

Unnecessary journeys will be avoided;

The combustion of any waste materials including waste oils on site will not permitted under any

circumstances;

When possible the use of mains powered electrical equipment should be used in preference to using

generators to provide power; and

Ensure limited escape of gases during maintenance works.

Gaseous Substances

Gaseous Hazardous Substances

These substances must be appropriately stored with the necessary warning signage, in accordance with

the MSDS;

Personnel using such substances must be trained in the safe handling of such substances; and

Personnel must be provided with the necessary safety equipment to protect against any possible

harmful emissions.

Noise Management 16.4.3

General

It is recommended that regular noise monitoring is undertaken within close proximity of noise sensitive

locations, especially if future works include activities which are known to cause significant levels of noise;


In order to control the duration of noise and vibration from the construction activities, no noise from the

works will be audible at the application site boundary of any occupied residential property outside the hours

of:

Saturday to Wednesday 08:00 - 18:00

Thursday 08:00 - 13:00; Or

No working on Friday or Public Holidays.

If noise exceeds the required standards the use of acoustic screens or noise attenuation measures will be

implemented (refer to standards below);

Stationery machinery such as generators must be kept in enclosed structures for noise control during the

night;

Items of plant on site operating intermittently will be shut down in the intervening periods between uses;

Electrically powered plant should be preferred, where practicable, to mechanically powered alternatives.

All mechanically powered plant should also be fitted with suitable silencers;

Proper PPE to be provided to all personnel working in high noise areas;

Appropriate breaks to be provided to personnel working in high noise areas;

High noise sign boards to be placed in high noise areas such as piling, excavation, cutting, grinding, etc.

Backfilling

Backfilling activities will be restricted to day time hours.

Excavation and material handling

Loading of materials into the trucks by excavators to be carried out from a minimum height to prevent high

noise; and

Excavations to be restricted to day time hours.

Piling

Piling activities to be conducted during the day time;

Use of vibratory hammer rather than impact hammer to reduce noise levels;

High frequency vibrator hammer to be used rather than low frequency based on the type of piling; and

Moveable acoustic sound barrier for the hammer and piling equipment to be provided near to receptors

such as accommodation and other facilities.

Cutting, bending and welding

Cutting of steel rods and other building materials to be conducted in separate areas; and

251 | 278

Machinery used for cutting to be adequate to ensure low noise generation.

Sand blasting

Sand blasting, if required will be conducted during day time and in closed environment with temporary

noise barriers.

Vehicle movement

Speed restriction of 15 kmph to be enforced on internal roads to minimise noise from vehicle movement;

Vehicle movement and delivery of materials will be avoided at night time (6pm to 6am) to ensure minimum

disturbances to the nearby receptors;

Vehicle deliveries will be organised in order to avoid pile of delivery trucks leading to high noise levels; and

Deliveries will be routed so as to minimise disturbance to nearby communities. Delivery vehicles will be

prohibited from waiting within or near the site with their engines running. The movement of heavy vehicles

during the night will be avoided wherever practical.

Construction equipment

Noise from vehicles, machinery and equipment used on site will not exceed the manufacturer’s

specifications, based on the installation of adequate noise reduction systems;

Equipment and machinery will be regularly serviced to ensure that they are kept in good condition, with

attention given to muffler maintenance and noise reduction systems;

Noisy equipment and machinery will be replaced with less noisy alternatives or provide equipment that is

specifically designed with noise inhibitors, such as generators and compressors with silencers and muffled

jackhammers;

Acoustic covers and barriers must be used on all machine engines that generate excessive noise levels;

Any machinery will be shut off during periods of non-use or, if not practical to do so, will be throttled back to

a minimum; and

Where possible, ensure that operation times of noisy equipment, machinery and activities are carried out

during daytime hours.

Solid Waste Management 16.4.4The aim of the proposed mitigation measures during the construction phase is to ensure adherence to the

waste management hierarchy of the ‘3 Rs’: “Reduce – Reuse – Recycle”, and to present procedures for the

correct segregation and disposal of the waste streams. Waste streams will be collected by locally registered

waste contractors and transferred to appropriately licensed waste facilities for recycling or disposal. A chain of

custody relating to the waste will be implemented with the aim of ensuring the waste is handled and disposed of

correctly by suitable qualified contractors.


Non Hazardous Solid Waste Management 16.4.5

Waste Storage

Damage to materials from incorrect storage will be avoided;

Loss, theft, or vandalism will be avoided through secure storage and on-site security;

Effective segregation of waste streams will be undertaken to facilitate onsite reuse and offsite recycling

where possible;

Construction workers will be informed and trained with regards to waste minimisation throughout toolbox

talks;

Dedicated containers for segregated waste streams for reuse/recycling/disposal will be located under cover

on an impermeable hardstanding surface and will be located at strategic locations in the onsite compound;

These containers will be stored in a covered and enclosed area when practicable to provide protection from

the elements and scavengers;

Dedicated skips for any residual construction waste that requires off-site disposal will be located under

cover on an impermeable hardstanding surface in a designated area. Key waste streams will include any

excavated soil from building foundations and waste chemicals / oils will be located in the on-site

construction compound;

Waste storage on site will be in designated and appropriately signed area(s). Skips will be clearly labelled

to specify the waste streams which can be recycled or disposed of;

Waste that is generated during construction will be classified as hazardous or non-hazardous and stored

appropriately;

Domestic solid waste generated within workers accommodation areas will be stored in specified areas prior

to removal and disposal by the specifically appointed waste management sub-contractor;

Food waste will be collected and stored within an allocated skip and disposed of by a specifically appointed

waste management sub-contractor; and

Storage practices will be implemented across the site in order to ensure that any wastage is kept to a

minimum.

Waste Minimisation and Waste Recycling

Over ordering will be avoided;

Ordering standard lengths rather than lengths required will be avoided;

Ordering for delivery at an inadequate time (update programme regularly) will be avoided;

Conventional dry recyclable materials (paper, cardboard, plastic etc.) will be either reused on site or

removed by licensed contractors for recycling;

253 | 278

The following dry recyclable materials will be reused or recycled; Glass, papers and cardboard, metals

(other than aluminium), aluminium, organic waste and plastic could be recycled;

Containers will be suitably marked and stored in a covered and enclosed area to ensure that the weather

and/or scavengers cannot access them;

Recyclable materials will be collected by recycling contractors registered with the PME;

Excavated material from the construction activities will be reused for backfilling and other activities,

wherever possible;

Welding rods will be used to the maximum extent prior to disposal only certified welders will be employed

for welding purposes;

Metal waste from cutting will be reused on site to the maximum extent possible;

Waste metal scrap will be collected in separate bins or skips and disposed to waste metal recyclers;

Leftover concrete after casting will be reused for the construction of temporary works;

Where possible, materials will be ordered in bulk to reduce packaging;

Suppliers will be requested to use minimal packaging or take back packaging such as plastic drums;

Dedicated skips for segregated waste streams for re-use/recycling will be located under cover on an

impermeable hardstanding surface in the onsite construction compound(s);

Dedicated skips for any residual construction waste that requires off-site disposal will be located under

cover on an impermeable hardstanding surface. Key waste streams will include any excavated soil from

building foundations and waste chemicals / oils will be located in the on-site construction compound;

Suppliers will be required to reduce surplus packaging associated with any construction raw materials;

particularly common packaging materials such as plastics (shrink wrap and bubble wrap), cardboard and

wooden pallets. This will also involve improved procurement and consultation with selected suppliers

regarding commitments to waste minimisation, recycling and the emphasis on continual improvements in

environmental performance;

Concrete/cement will be purchased from local ready mix works, where possible, to allow materials to be

generated in close proximity to the site, thereby allowing for ‘just-in-time’ resource ordering and minimising

transport costs associated with haulage of raw and finished or semi-finished products;

Material deliveries will be efficiently planned in order to avoid damage to the materials and the unnecessary

generation of waste;

Coordination between local contractors and suppliers will be effective in order to avoid the excessive

purchase of raw materials and to prevent the risk of materials being lost, stolen or damaged;

Handling and storage of delivered materials will be effective in order to prevent loss or damage through

exposure to the weather, mud and onsite vehicles through:


Ensuring well-timed deliveries to the site;

Providing on-site security; and

Installing temporary site security fencing.

Conventional wastes (paper, cardboard, plastic etc.) will be either reused by approved firms or removed

from site by licensed contractors preferably for recycling;

Any construction waste materials will be reused where feasible, for example, timber and other scrap

material representing commercial value shall be separated and stored in a segregated area prior to reuse

or recycling (including selling of products to third parties);

Damage during unloading operations will be avoided through careful handling;

Damage to materials from incorrect storage or handling will be avoided;

Temporarily site security fencing will be installed; and

On-site 24h security will be provided and together with temporary site security fencing.

Waste Handling and Transport

Damage during unloading operations will be avoided;

Delivery to inappropriate areas of the site will be avoided;

Acceptance of incorrect deliveries, specifications or quantities will be avoided;

PME approved certified waste contractors will be sourced in order to regularly remove the separated waste

streams;

All relevant consignments of waste (waste manifests) for disposal or recycling will be specify: type,

destination and name of the carrier. This will indicate whether the waste is to be treated, recycled or

disposed of to a landfill site and discharge liability from the waste producer by ensuring that disposal

activities are in accordance with local regulations;

On site waste auditing at each stage of the construction process is required as part of the audit programme

in order to develop and to allow reporting on waste management targets and to ensure that the Project

EHS plan or CEMP is being adhered to;

The segregated materials for recycling will be collected on an agreed basis with a local waste recycling

contractor;

The construction contractor will perform biannual inspection of all waste management facilities for their

areas of assignment and based on this audit, contracts will be renewed or rejected;

Industrial / domestic waste containers will be checked prior to leaving the PROJECT site to ensure that:

The waste containers are clean on the outside, sealed, and not leaking;

255 | 278

The required forms for wastes and other documents required for shipment are completed and correct;

and

Waste separation will be undertaken by staff wearing suitable PPE such as gloves and dust masks.

Waste Disposal

All non-hazardous waste generated on site, if it is not suitable for reuse either on site or off-site, must be

disposed of at a landfill site, which is licensed by PME;

A licensed waste management contractor will be appointed for all removal of waste from site and delivery to

the PME licensed landfill; and

Collection of all non-hazardous construction waste will be undertaken at least daily.

Staff Training

Training will be provided to educate all construction workers regarding best practice waste management

practices and recycling initiatives, and to encourage more sustainable working practices. Emphasis will be

placed on the waste minimisation hierarchy: “Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle”;

All workers will be provided with a comprehensive induction awareness program outlining which wastes

must be segregated in adequately labelled containers;

Specific PPE and training will be provided; and

PPE must be worn by employees at all times.

Hazardous Waste Management 16.4.6

Identification

All identified contamination areas, generated by historical or existing incidents and hazardous waste (e.g.

chemical/fuel drums) will need to be appropriately stored, removed and diverted to a licensed hazardous

waste landfill site prior the development of the area.

Storage

The construction contractor will nominate EHS representatives to manage hazardous wastes on site. These

individuals will be responsible for ensuring the correct placing, construction, maintenance and

housekeeping of the hazardous waste storage areas;

Accurate record keeping of hazardous waste types and amounts will be undertaken. This will take place on

a monthly basis or as new hazardous waste stream is produced. The following information shall be kept up

to date for each hazardous waste stream:

Name and description of the hazardous waste stream;


Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the hazardous waste stream;

Quantity of the hazardous waste stream produced per month;

Characteristic(s) of the hazardous waste stream (e.g. flammability, toxicity);

Hazardous Waste Responsibility Details; and

Inventory of all hazardous wastes on site, which should be updated daily. This should be available for

Emergency crews in case of an event.

Any waste fuels, oils and chemicals will be stored separately in a bunded compound situated on an

impermeable surface in order to prevent any potential spillage and contamination issues prior to collection

for appropriate disposal;

Storage areas will be clearly marked and signed with regard to the quantity and hazardous characteristics

of the hazardous waste streams materials stored therein;

Hazardous wastes will be stored in a container which has sufficient strength and structural integrity to

ensure that it is unlikely to burst or leak in its ordinary use;

Any unused materials, spent containers, contaminated clothing, rags and tools will be returned to a central

compound, where practicable, for appropriate disposal;

For liquid hazardous waste streams, the waste container will be situated within a secondary containment

system which will satisfy the following requirements:

It must have a capacity of not less than 110% of the container’s storage capacity or, if there is more

than one container within the system, of not less than 110% of the largest container’s capacity or 25% of

their aggregate capacity, whichever is the greater;

It must be positioned, or other steps must be taken, so as to minimise any risk of damage by impact so

far as is reasonably practicable;

Its base and walls must be impermeable to water and oil;

Its base and walls must not be penetrated by any valve, pipe or other opening which is used for draining

of the system; and

If any fill pipe, or draw off pipe, penetrates its base or any of its walls, the junction of the pipe with the

base or walls must be adequately sealed to prevent hazardous wastes escaping from the system.

Each individual drum, package or container will be clearly labelled. Internationally recognised warning

signage shall be used to indicate the hazards of the individual hazardous waste materials;

Where any drum is used for storage in conjunction with a drip tray as the secondary containment system, it

is sufficient if the tray has a capacity of not less than 25% of:

The drum’s storage capacity; or

257 | 278

If there is more than one drum used at the same time with the tray, the aggregate storage capacity of

the drums.

Incompatible hazardous wastes will be segregated and stored separately. For example, flammable liquids

and other organics must be segregated from acidic and caustic materials;

Where there is risk of a spill of hazardous wastes, a spill control, prevention, and countermeasure plan will

be established as a specific component of the Site Emergency Preparedness Plan;

Storage areas will be constructed such that any spillage or loss of containment of a particular hazardous

waste type cannot spread to other material types. This is particularly important where flammable materials

are involved;

Covered plastics containers will be provided in the first aid area (for waste syringes, suturing kits and

needles) and also clearly identified bagging for infectious or contaminated items;

Containers holding hazardous wastes will be clean, in good condition, not leaking, and compatible with the

waste being stored within;

Regular inspection and maintenance of storage areas including drums, vessels, pavements and bunds will

take place;

The stated maximum capacity of waste storage areas will not be exceeded; and

There will be vehicular and pedestrian access at all times to the whole of the waste storage area such that

the transfer of containers is not reliant on the removal of impediments which may be blocking access, other

than drums in the same row.

Handling

Staff members will be assigned to manage hazardous wastes on site, to make sure that hazardous wastes

are handled in the correct manner in order to reduce the risk of accidents;

Prior to commencing work involving handling waste materials, all personnel will be familiar with the relevant

hazardous properties and instructed on the relevant emergency plan;

Personnel will wear appropriate PPE according to the type of hazardous waste they are working with;

The use of drip trays for liquid hazardous waste will be compulsory in order to contain any spills;

Any spillage of fuel or oils waste into the marine environment will be efficiently contained with oil booms

and pumps will be readily available to pump out any spillages; and

Emergency procedures will be put in place in case of spills.

Transportation

Contractors responsible for transporting hazardous wastes from the site will be suitably qualified and

possess a license from the PME to perform such work;


The vehicles will be in a good condition and will be suitable for the material being conveyed;

A transportation document will be created in order to establish a chain-of-custody, using multiple signed

copies to demonstrate that the hazardous waste stream has been transported and received by the disposal

facility in the correct manner (such as intact, non-leaking labelled containers, licensed transporter, correct

handling);

Employees involved in the transportation of hazardous waste will be trained regarding proper transport

procedures and emergency procedures;

Hazardous wastes will be labelled, and external signs on transport vehicles will be appended;

Competent individual(s) will be available for emergency response on call 24 hours/day;

Hazardous wastes will be transported outside of peak traffic hours;

A material safety data sheet shall be filled in for each item of hazardous waste. These forms will be kept on

record for at least 5 years following completion of the construction phase; and

Any spillages during transport will be removed and disposed of in a manner decided by the PME and the

Civil Defence.

Social Aspects 16.4.7

Construction Workers Welfare Management

The implementation of Project EHS Plan or CEMP will ensure that all health and safety guidelines for

construction workers, personnel and sub-contractors are followed and any potential risk is mitigated and

managed. The Project EHS Plan or CEMP will include detailed practices on undertaking safe work in relation to

the following:

The use of PPE will be mandatory;

Control measures will be implemented with regards to the use and the storage of hazardous substances;

A permit to work system for potentially hazardous work will be established;

Control measures will be established in relation to:

Crane operation;

Working at heights;

Using scaffolding;

Using ladders and steps;

Barricading;

Electrical safety;

259 | 278

Welding, cutting and grinding;

Working in confined spaces;

Excavations; and

Working over and near water.

Emergency response procedures will be developed;

First aid procedures (including the provision of first aid kits);

Provision of an ambulance service; and

Disciplinary action for non-compliance.

Local Communities Management 16.4.8

Grievance Mechanisms for Local Communities

Contact details and nominated individuals will be provided to local communities through the following

means:

Project Notice Board; and

Newsletter.

All complaints and claims will be acknowledged within 48 hours of receipt by being reported to the

construction contractor;

The construction contractor will assign and dispatch an Investigation team following a complaint;

Investigation tasks will be agreed, delegated and actioned by the investigation team;

Remedial actions recommended by the investigation team will be implemented and finalised;

Complainant will be contacted by the construction contractor and advised on the outcome of the

investigation within one week unless additional information or clarifications are needed;

Complaints and actions taken will be discussed on a monthly basis between the relevant parties;

Recording will involve:

Date and time of the complaint;

Method by which the complaint was made;

Personal details of the complainant;

Nature of the complaint;

The action to be taken; and

Details of the response provided to the complainant.


Project Notice Board

To ensure visible and clear notification, the construction contractor will erect notice boards with key

contacts (e.g. nominated environmental representative) at specific positions, and pro-actively communicate

with members of the public; and

The site notice board will display information on the construction activities, as well as contact numbers, all

of which could be used to contact responsible staff members or lodge specific complaints.

Project Newsletters

Project Newsletters would be disseminated to the relevant parties in order to ensure that ongoing feedback

is provided on the progress and environmental and social management performance of the project to a

broad group of parties affected by construction activities.

Contamination 16.4.9

Hazardous Materials Management

Sourcing of Hazardous Materials

The procurement manager will look at substitution of any hazardous substances with safer alternatives and

limit the quantities of hazardous substances during the construction process to reduce the risk of spillages.

Storage

The construction contractor and nominated staff members will have responsibility to ensure the correct

management of hazardous materials on site. These individuals will be responsible for ensuring the correct

placing, construction, maintenance and housekeeping of the hazardous materials storage areas, in addition

to provide toolbox talks and training on the control of substances and informing relevant employees of all

control measures, health and safety issues and location of spill response equipment on-site;

The storage area will be designed as to prevent damage to containers by any means, the unauthorized use

of material and contain any spillage from hazardous materials (e.g.: by the use of an impermeable surface

and walls).

Types, nature, characteristic of the hazardous materials will be recorded on site, and available to all

personnel;

The unauthorised use of hazardous materials will be prevented by requiring a responsible person to sign

materials in and out of a compound;

Where practicable, substances during the construction process will be retained in a central controlled

storage compound in accordance with World Bank guidance and appropriate risk assessment based on

the material safety data sheet provided by the supplier;

Storage areas will be clearly marked and signed with regard to the quantity and hazardous characteristics

of the materials stored within;

261 | 278

The storage areas will be designed in order to prevent damage to containers by any means and the

unauthorized use of material.

Hazardous materials will be stored in a container which is sufficient strength and structural integrity to

ensure that it is unlikely to burst or leak in its ordinary use;

The container will be situated within a secondary containment system;

Any valve, filter, sight gauge, vent pipe or other equipment ancillary to the container (other than a fill pipe or

draw off pipe or, if the oil has a flashpoint of less than 32oC a pump) will be situated within the secondary

containment system;

Where a fill pipe is not within the secondary containment system, a drip tray will be used to catch any spills

when the container is being filled;

Each individual drum, package or container will be clearly labelled. Internationally recognised warning

signage shall be used to indicate the hazards of the individual hazard materials;

Where any drum is used for storage in conjunction with a drip tray as the secondary containment system,

the drop tray will have a capacity of not less than 25% of:

The drum’s storage capacity; or

If there is more than one drum used at the same time with the tray, the aggregate storage capacity of

the drums;

Incompatible, hazardous materials will be segregated and stored separately. For example, flammable

liquids and other organics must be segregated from acidic and caustic materials;

Where there is risk of a spill of hazardous materials, responsible parties will prepare a spill control,

prevention, and countermeasure plan as a specific component of the Site Emergency Plan;

Storage areas will be constructed such that any spillage or loss of containment of a particular hazardous

material type cannot spread to other material types. This is particularly important where flammable

materials are involved;

The storage area will prevent damage to containers by any means;

Covered plastics containers will be provided in the first aid area (for syringes, suturing kits and needles)

and also clearly identified bagging for infectious or contaminated items;

Containers will be stored in such a manner that leaks and spillages cannot escape over bunds or the edge

of the sealed drainage areas;

Regular inspection and maintenance of storage areas including drums, vessels, pavements and bunds will

be undertaken;

The stated maximum capacity of storage areas will not be exceeded;


The use of hazardous substances during the construction process will be reviewed and when feasible

decreased in order to reduce the risk of spillages;

There will be vehicular and pedestrian access at all times to the whole of the storage area such that the

transfer of containers is not reliant on the removal of impediments which may be blocking access, other

than drums in the same row; and

Washout from concrete mixing plant or from cleaning ready-mix concrete vehicles is highly alkaline. This

will not be allowed to enter the marine environment and will be re-used on site where possible or stored

appropriately and removed by a licensed contractor to a PME approved facility.

Handling

All identified contamination areas will need to be appropriately removed and diverted to a licensed

hazardous waste landfill site prior to the development of the area;

Work methods will be updated if the production or release of potentially contaminative materials occur;

All vehicle/plant re-fuelling will be closely supervised and appropriate spill trays utilised where appropriate;

Competent staff member(s) will be assigned to manage hazardous materials on site, in order to ensure that

that hazardous materials are handled in the correct manner to reduce potential accidents;

Prior to commencing work involving handling materials, all personnel will be familiar with the relevant

hazardous properties and instructed on what to do in case of an emergency and location of spill response

equipment on-site;

Personnel must wear appropriate PPE according to the type of hazardous materials they are working with;

Machinery will be situated on sealed surfaces to prevent contamination of soil and groundwater below with

oils, chemicals or fuels;

Use of drip trays will be compulsory to contain spills;

Vehicle and plant refuelling will be closely supervised and spill trays utilised;

Refuelling areas and hazardous materials usage areas must be set back at least 50m from any water

drainage system;

All vehicle/plant re-fuelling will be closely supervised;

The use of potentially hazardous material will be away from high risk areas;

Enclosing the process or handling system as far as reasonably practicable; and

Emergency procedures will be put in place in case of spills.

Fixed tanks

Any fixed tank used for storing oil shall satisfy the following requirements:

263 | 278

Any sight gauge will be properly supported and fitted with a valve which must be closed automatically when

not in use;

Any fill pipe, draw off pipe or overflow pipe will be positioned, or other steps must be taken, so as to

minimise any risk of damage by impact so far as is reasonably practicable;

Fixed tanks will be adequately protected from physical damage;

Fixed tanks will have adequate facilities for detecting any leaks;

If fitted with a leakage detection device which is used continuously to monitor for leaks, the detection device

will be maintained in working order and tested at appropriate intervals to ensure that it works properly;

If not fitted with such a device, Fixed tank must be tested for leaks before it is first used and further tests for

leaks must be performed, in the case of pipes which have mechanical joints, at least once in every 5 years

and, in other cases, at least once in every 10 years;

Fixed tanks will be adequately protected against corrosion;

Fixed tanks will be fitted with an automatic overfill prevention device if the filling operation is controlled from

a place where it is not reasonable practicable to observe the tank and any vent pipe;

Where Hazmat is delivered through a flexible pipe which is permanently attached to the container;

The pipe must be fitted with a tap of valve at the delivery end which closes automatically when not in

use;

The tap or valve must not be capable of being fixed in the open position unless the pipe is fitted with an

automatic shut off device;

The pipe must be enclosed in a secure cabinet which is locked shut when not in use and is equipped

with a drip tray or the pipe must have a lockable valve where it leaves the container which is locked shut

when not in use; and

Be kept within the secondary containment system when not in use.

Any pump will be:

Fitted with a non-return valve in its feed line;

Positioned, or other steps must be taken, so as to minimise any risk of damage by impact so far as is

reasonable practicable; and

Protected from unauthorised use.

Mobile Bowsers

Any mobile bowser used for storage must satisfy the following requirements:

Any tap or valve permanently fixed to the unit through which oil can be discharged to the open will be fitted

with a lock and locked shut when not in use;


Where oil is delivered through a flexible pipe which is permanently attached to the unit:

The pipe must be fitted with a manually operated pump or with a valve at the delivery end which closes

automatically when not in use;

The pump or valve will be provided with a lock and locked shut when not in use; and

The pipe must be fitted with a lockable valve at the end where it leaves the container and must be

locked shut when not in use.

Transportation

Contractors responsible for transporting hazardous materials to the site will be suitably qualified and

possess a license from the PME to perform such work;

The vehicle will be in a good condition and will be suitable for the material being conveyed. Compartments

must also be cleaned prior to being filled;

A transportation document will be created to establish a chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies in

order to demonstrate that hazardous materials have been transported and received by the disposal facility

in the correct manner (such as intact, non-leaking labelled containers, licensed transporter, correct

handling);

The volume, nature, integrity and protection of packaging and containers used for transport will be

appropriate for the type and quantity of hazardous material and modes of transport involved;

Employees involved in the transportation of hazardous materials will be trained regarding proper transport

procedures and emergency procedures;

All hazardous materials to be transported will be labelled and external signs on transport vehicles will be

appended;

Competent individual(s) will be available for emergency response on call 24 hours/day;

The transportation of hazardous materials outside of peak traffic hours will be forbidden; and

Any spillages during transport will be removed and disposed of in a manner decided by the PME and the

Civil Defence.

Emergency Preparedness and Response

Procedures for the handling of hazardous materials will be established in order to ensure quick and efficient

responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental damage;

An detailed Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan supporting will be developed as soon as possible

to cover:

Informing the public and emergency response agencies;

265 | 278

Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment;

Taking emergency response actions;

Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan to reflect changes and ensuring that the

employees are informed of such changes;

Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures for using, inspecting, testing, and

maintaining emergency response equipment; and

Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant procedures.

Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials, the construction contractor will prepare a

spill control, prevention, and countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency Prepared-

ness and Response Plan. The plan will be tailored to the hazards associated with the Project, and includes:

Training of operators on release prevention, including drills specific to hazardous materials as part of

emergency preparedness response training;

Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the mechanical integrity and operability of pressure

vessels, tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems, containment infrastructure, emergency

shutdown systems, controls and pumps, and associated process equipment;

Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) for filling containers or equipment as well

as for transfer operations by personnel trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous material,

and in spill prevention and response;

SOPs for the management of secondary containment structures, specifically the removal of any

accumulated fluid, to ensure that the system remains structurally intact;

Identification of locations of hazardous materials and associated activities on an emergency plan site

map;

Documentation of availability of specific personal protective equipment (PPE) and training needed to

respond to an emergency;

Documentation of availability of spill response equipment sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a

spill and a list of external resources for equipment and personnel, if necessary, to supplement internal

resources; and

Description of response activities in the event of a spill, release, or other chemical emergency including:

Internal and external notification procedures;

Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups;

Decision process for assessing severity of the release, and determining appropriate actions;

Facility evacuation routes; and


Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal, incident investigation, employee re-entry, and

restoration of spill response equipment.

Contaminated Soil Handling

Contaminated soil will be stored separately on hard standing area to prevent soil and groundwater

/seawater contamination; and

Contaminated soil will not be stored along with uncontaminated material and will be bunded and covered to

prevent any run off.

Construction Equipment

Vehicles and equipment will be regularly inspected and maintained to confirm they are not leaking or drip-

ping;

All stationary diesel and petrol operated construction equipment will have impervious drip trays placed be-

neath them during operation;

Operators will also be instructed to notify their supervisors if there are any problems with their vehicles and

equipment;

Refuelling of construction equipment will only be carried out in designated areas not at machinery work loca-

tions, in order to avoid potential spills of fuel to the ground;

Refuelling areas will be sealed to contain any spills or leaks that may occur and will be communicated to all

site personnel by signs and notice boards; and

Washing of vehicles to be undertaken in specific locations and wastewaters to be routed to separate holding

tanks.

Fuel and Chemical Handling and Storage

Fuels and chemicals must be stored on non-permeable surfaces with sufficient bund wall with a 110% ca-

pacity of the fuel tank or chemical;

Diesel dispensing tanker to be used for refuelling construction equipment to the maximum extent possible;

Fuel tanks and chemical storage area to be provided with covered roof;

Reduce the quantities of hazardous materials (fuel) stored on site to minimum practical levels. Infrequently

used chemicals will be ordered just before they are needed;

Different types of chemicals will be stored separately according to their Material Safety Data Sheets

(MSDS), in order to avoid adverse chemical reactions;

Hazardous materials will be handled only by operators trained in spill response procedures; and

All vehicle/plant re-fuelling will be closely supervised.

267 | 278

Piling

Piling accompanied with hazardous drilling fluids will not be used; and

Soil contaminated during piling activities to be removed and disposed of as hazardous waste through con-

tractors authorised by the PME.

Sand Blasting

Sand blasting areas will be concreted or provided with non-permeable membrane.

Painting areas

Paint drums will be stored on non-permeable membrane / concrete flooring to prevent seepage into soil in

case of accidental spillage; and

Painting area will be concreted to ensure no contamination of soil in the area.

Concrete Batching

Concrete agitator bowls and chutes must not be washed out to any stormwater system or roadways;

All process waste water will be drained to a collection pit for recycling or disposed;

Wastewater stored within the recycling system will be used at the earliest possible opportunity; and

No discharges of used process water will be allowed to the stormwater drainage system or the marine envi-

ronment.

General

Water will not be extracted from any borehole installations for construction purposes;

Domestic wastewater tanks will be regularly checked for leakages and emptied at periodic intervals;

Maintenance workshops for construction equipment will to be concreted and placed with spill control sys-

tems;


introduced to the site to provide adequate containment facilities for the construction workforce; and

Work methods will be updated in order to prevent the production or release of potentially contaminative ma-

terials.


Water Resources and Waste Water 16.4.10


To protect the environment from flooding during heavy downpours, a localised run-off management system will

be employed by the Contractor. This will include temporary surface water run-off facilities, which in addition to

containing contaminants will provide on-site attenuation for surface water flows, thereby reducing the flood risk.

Best practice recommendations for the prevention of impacts associated with storm water runoff during the

construction phase include the following controls:

Areas where erosion may occur will be identified in order to ensure that they are appropriately protected by

installing the necessary temporary and/or permanent drainage works as soon as possible;

Any erosion channels which develop during the construction period will be suitably backfilled, compacted

and restored to a proper condition;

Where excavation takes place, the affected area will be properly stabilised to minimise erosion risk;

Appropriate storm water management measures will be established in order to ensure that contaminants are

not mobilised into the wider environment;

Stormwater control measures to control sediment will include:

Use of silt screens;

In the case of high volumes of stormwater flows, retention must be provided;

All erosion protection measures have to be maintained on a continual basis.

Limit disturbance when excavating;

Install sediment fences prior to rain events;

Wash equipment in designated area, where wastewater will be diverted to a sump or holding tanks;

Place sands and soils stockpile behind a sediment fence;

Store all hard waste and litter in designated area(s); and

Restrict vehicle movement to stabilised road access.

Generation of Sanitary Wastewater


introduced to the site to provide adequate containment facilities for the construction workforce;

Sanitary wastes generated during the construction phase will be collected and disposed of by a licensed

contractor;

269 | 278

Wastewater storage tanks will be introduced to the site to provide adequate containment facilities for the

construction workforce.

Functional and well maintained sanitary facilities will be available on site at all times;

Where there are temporary toilet facilities located on site, these will be placed on concrete bunds;

Adequate removal of sanitary liquid wastes from temporary toilet facilities, in conjunction with periodic in-

spections will avoid any overflow and create a zero leakage site; and

Removal of liquid sanitary waste from the septic system will be undertaken by a licensed waste manage-

ment sub-contractor.

Potentially Contaminated Wastewater

Any potentially contaminated water generated by construction activities including concrete washout and

plant washdown water will be diverted to a sump or a holding tank;

Any potentially contaminated wastewater will be removed by an appropriately licensed waste management

sub-contractor; and

A Chain of Consent System will be implemented to ensure that disposal of potentially contaminated liquid

waste is correctly undertaken and delivered to the correct, allocated treatment and disposal facilities.

Monitoring Programmes 16.5

An environmental monitoring programme will be developed and implemented by the construction contractor as

part of the Project EHS plan or CEMP.

The monitoring programme will include the ongoing review of emissions which will be reported to PME on an

annual basis and more frequently if there are abnormal conditions (e.g. uncontrolled emissions or spillages) or

changes which may affect the environmental quality of the emissions.

Marine Survey 16.5.1The condition of the marine environment at the site should be surveyed regularly at defined intervals during the

construction phase. This should include water quality and sedimentation measurements as well as assessing

the ‘health’ of coral reef areas adjacent to the works and at suitable control sites. The minimum recommended

interval for marine surveys is every six months.

Third Part Audits 16.5.2Third party audits should be undertaken by a suitably qualified professional to assess the implementation of the

CEMP on site during the construction phase. This should include a site inspection as well as review of

paperwork and records relating to environmental management on site. Third party audits should be undertaken

a minimum of once every six months.


Waste Management 16.5.3As part of the Project EHS or CEMP, all paperwork and records of waste management activities on-site will

need to be maintained including records of off-site disposal to landfill as follows:

SEC will maintain the following records and reports:


facility designated in the document. It shall also keep the signed copy for at least 5 years as of the date

of receipt of the waste by that facility;

Retain copies of the results of all tests and analysis performed on the hazardous waste as well as

copies of all pertinent reports, correspondence and documents for at least five years from the last date

of handling of such waste;

Submit to the PME an annual report on all hazardous waste generated during the year. Copies of such

reports shall be retained for at least five years from the date of completion; and

Submit on demand to the PME or the agencies designated by it, all documents, records and reports

related to the waste.

Hazardous Waste Transporters and Hazardous Waste Management Facilities are required have both a

valid identification code and a work permit from the PME. The management of the Project should maintain

an up to date list of local contractors who can satisfy their requirements for the responsible handling and

disposal of hazardous waste.

271 | 278

17 Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan

Introduction 17.1

This chapter presents a Framework Operational Environmental Management Plan (OEMP), which aims to

manage environmental impacts and, to a lesser degree, the health and safety risks that may arise during the

operational phase of the Project.

It is highly recommended that SEC prepare a full OEMP on the basis of this framework to ensure that all

environmental controls, identified within this ESIA, are implemented. In this regard, an overall OEMP aims to

bridge the gap between the completion of the ESIA and the full implementation of the operational phase of the

project, with a key focus for implementing the mitigation measures as described within the ESIA in order to

minimise disturbance to the surrounding environment and sensitive receptors.

The proposed OEMP approach is based on the management philosophy of the ISO 14001 Environmental

Management System and OHSAS Occupational Health and Safety Assessment 18001 series; ensuring,

therefore, that the environmental and health and safety requirements of the Project during its operational phase

are not only planned, but that a robust mechanism for implementation is also ensured.

It is intended that this document provides a framework for the development of the full OEMP by SEC, which

would be fully established in consultation with all stakeholders, and adequately implemented by the operator.

Aims and Objectives 17.2

An OEMP is a management tool used to ensure that undue or reasonably avoidable adverse risks of the

operation of a project are prevented and that any positive effects are enhanced. The primary aim of the OEMP

is to provide clear direction on the requirements of the operational management team in the conduct of the

activities, where every requirement is measurable and enforceable, whilst any deviation can be identified and

addressed swiftly.

The main purpose of the OEMP is:

To ensure compliance with the General Environmental Regulations and Rules for Implementation in the

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (2006); IFC Performance Standards (2006); and IFC General Environmental, and

Health, and Safety Guidelines (2007);

To ensure that all mitigation measures detailed within the ESIA are adequately implemented;

To verify environmental performance through information on impacts as they occur;


To ensure that there is sufficient allocation of resources within the project budget so that the scale of the

OEMP related activities are consistent with the significance of project impacts;

To respond to changes in project implementation not considered in the ESIA; and

To provide feedback for continual improvement in environmental and social performance.

Operational Environmental Management System 17.3

ISO 14001 provides a logical framework within which to prepare an OEMP, even for organisations not intending

to obtain certification. If effectively implemented, the methodology detailed below would lead to:

Compliance with legislative and other requirements;

Pollution Prevention; and

Continual Improvement.

An appropriate environmental management structure should be planned and agreed between all operating

parties and the relevant regulatory authorities. The structure should allow for the effective implementation of the

Environmental Management System (EMS) and the appropriate interaction with regulatory authorities.

Due regard should be paid to the building of relationships with regulators including the establishment of points

of contact for planned monitoring and environmental assessment. These contacts will be useful to assist in

developing a trusting and productive partnership that generates tangible benefits for environmental

management.

In this regard SEC should seek to involve relevant stakeholders in the development and implementation of an

environmental management system. These stakeholders may involve all parties from the client, PME and the

local community.

Operational Environmental Management System Components 17.4

Planning Phase 17.4.1Planning involves identifying and defining the various environmental aspects and associated environmental

impacts that can result from the operational phase of the project. In the case of the Project, the major potential

environmental and social impacts are as defined through the ESIA. The planning phase would typically include

the following requirements:

Environmental Policy

The development of an Environmental Policy would be aligned with other existing policies so that it can be

adopted as part of ‘business as usual’, provided this policy meets the expectations of all stakeholders, including

users and communities affected by the operational phase of the project.

273 | 278

The environmental policy will:

Include a commitment from top management to continual Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS)

improvement;

Commit to setting objectives and targets for key operational areas;

Be appropriate to the nature, scale and potential EHS impacts of its activities, products or services;

Include a commitment to continual improvement of the management system, enhance health and safety

controls and the prevention of pollution;

Include a commitment to comply with relevant EHS legislation and regulations, and with other requirements

to which the organisation subscribes;

Provide the framework for setting and reviewing EHS objectives and targets;

Be documented, implemented and maintained and communicated to all employees; and

Be available to the public.

Environmental Aspects

The EMS will set out the detailed process for the identification of significant EHS aspects and assess the level

of risk associated with each of those aspects, where a quantitative method would be used to determine the

significance of aspects. Those which are significant must be included in the setting of objectives and targets.

All EHS aspects (significant or not) shall be documented in a register along with method statements regarding

the assessment of significance; and aspects that are identified should be appropriate to the scale and nature of

the activities that are relevant to the project. They will include any impacts that the organisation can be

expected to have influence over.

Legal and Other Requirements

A site register will be compiled which details the relevant legislation that applies to EHS issues on site. This

register will include an assessment of the key requirements of the legislation and set out the specific actions

that must be undertaken to meet these requirements.

Where possible, further information sources should be specified or provided to staff should they need further

guidance. Other obligations refer to the formal and informal obligations regarding the local community and

society at large, including voluntary agreements.

Objectives, Targets and Programmes

A series of EHS objectives and targets should be developed which draw from the commitments of the EHS

policy, the legal requirements placed upon the organisation and the significant aspects identified.

The objectives and targets will however be set in the context of technological scenarios that are available, the

financial implications and the requirements of other stakeholders;


The organisation shall establish and maintain a programme for achieving its objectives and targets which shall

include:

Designation of responsibility for achieving objectives and targets at each relevant function and level of the

organisation; and

The means and time frame by which they are to be achieved.

If a project relates to new developments and new or modified activities, products or services, programme(s)

shall be amended where relevant to ensure that sound environmental management practices are applied to

such projects.

Implementation Phase 17.4.2Implementation and operation is the heart of the environmental management function, because it is in

implementation that the true efficacy of environmental management lies. Even the best planned environmental

management approach will fail to achieve its desired outcome if the implementation of that planning is weak.

Implementation and operation consists of two key components, namely: Management Structure, Roles and

Responsibility; and Operational Control.

Management Structure, Roles and Responsibilities 17.4.3Roles, responsibilities and authorities shall be defined, documented and communicated in order to facilitate

effective environmental management. Management shall provide resources essential to the implementation

and control of the EHS management system. Resources include human resources and specialised skills,

technology and financial resources.

The organisation’s top management shall appoint specific management representative(s) who, irrespective of

other responsibilities, shall have defined roles, responsibilities and authority for:

Ensuring the EHS management system requirements are established, implemented and maintained; and

Reporting on the performance of the EHS management system to top management, for review and as a

basis for improvement of the system.

Competence, Training and Awareness 17.4.4There must be processes for the assessment of competence within the workforce and a documented system

for managing competence and training records. Activities and competencies should be mapped to identify any

shortfalls or areas of potential risk. This will comprise details of all training programmes pertinent to the core

training processes, and schedules will be central to the success of the programme and should include:

Document controls for training;

Induction and toolbox talks;

Training plans for management and specialist skills;

275 | 278

Internal communication methods; and

Management of external communication on environmental issues.

As a minimum, all staff are required to be aware of the Environmental Policy and the responsibilities they have

with regards to contributing to this. In addition, staff with more specific roles may require more detailed

environmental awareness training as set out in the training programme. Training records must be maintained

appropriately including attendances and competency identification assessments.

Communication 17.4.5The organisation shall establish and maintain procedures for internal communication between the various

levels and functions of the organisation; receiving, documenting and responding to relevant communication

from interested parties. Internal communication is important to:

Raise staff awareness of the EHS management system;

Inform staff of progress towards objectives and targets;

Promote proactive participation in EHS activities, including feedback and ideas from staff on environmental

management; and

To allow effective action to be taken by qualified personnel if incidents occur.

The organisation shall establish and maintain information, in paper or electronic form, to:

Describe the core elements of the management system and their interaction; and

Provide direction to related documentation aspects.

Control of Documents 17.4.6The operator would set out a detailed procedure in order to:

Approve documents for adequacy prior to issue;

Review and update as necessary and re-approve documents;

Ensure that changes and the current revision status of document are identified;

Ensure that relevant versions of applicable documents are available at point of use; and

Ensure that document remain legible and readily identifiable.

Environmental Operational Control Plans 17.4.7Operational controls are an essential part of the operational environmental management system as it is at the

operational level at which many impacts can occur. It is therefore very important that the correct working

procedures and protocols are developed and followed.


The operational controls should be documented where they address any significant environmental aspects

identified at an earlier stage. This will include the discussion of mitigation procedures that should be addressed

within these protocols. Each effect will be considered in terms of relevant legislation and guidance, potential

impacts, sensitive receptors, baseline conditions and procedures and, where necessary, recommendations for

further monitoring will be provided.

When considering the requirement for procedures to be documented and communicated, the following should

be taken into account:

Extent of environmental risk represented by activity(ies) under consideration;

Potential for legal non-compliance and/or reputational impact to result;

The number and turnover of people responsible for implementation of the procedure;

The importance of ensuring a consistent approach to managing activities;

The complexity and technical detail to be taken into account when managing an activity; and

Value of documentation to communicate procedural requirements.

Emergency Preparedness and Response 17.4.8The nature of the project requires that strong emergency procedures are put in place. The operational EHS will

include an emergency management plan which will detail and maintain plans to identify the potential for, and

the responses to major site incidents including equipment failures, natural phenomenon and major pollution

incidents.

The organisation shall establish and maintain procedures to identify the potential for, and response to,

accidents and emergency situations and for preventing and mitigating the environmental impacts that may be

associated with them. Evacuation procedures will also be included.

Plans for all foreseeable eventualities that pose significant risks to staff or the local community or environment

must be drafted, communicated and made available. The appropriate training for such events should be

included within the training programme.

Planned simulated training exercises should be deployed at reasonable intervals to test the plans that have

been developed. The results should be recorded and fed into action plans for improvement.

Specific plans must be developed for major hazardous materials stores, fire and electrical safety as a minimum.

The organisation shall review and revise, where necessary, its emergency preparedness and response

procedures, in particular, after the occurrence of accidents or emergency situations. The organisation shall also

periodically test such procedures where practicable.

277 | 278

Checking Phase 17.4.9Checking and corrective action forms the fourth component of the environmental management function and is

aimed at ensuring that both the necessary environmental management activities are being implemented and

that the desired outcomes are being achieved. This component consists of a series of key activities including

monitoring selected environmental quality variables and continued inspections of the various operational

activities. This would also be supplemented by inspections and audits.

Monitoring and Measurement 17.4.10The organisation shall establish and maintain documented procedures to monitor and measure, on a regular

basis, the key characteristics of its operations and activities that can have a significant impact on the

environment or pose risk to health and safety. This shall include the recording of information to track

performance, relevant operational controls and conformance with the organisation’s environmental objectives

and targets.

Monitoring equipment shall be calibrated and maintained and records of this process shall be retained

according to the organisation's procedures.

Operational controls will detail the required monitoring for individual aspects and the results should be reported

in line with an appropriate programmed schedule. The organisation shall also establish and maintain a

documented procedure for periodically evaluating compliance with relevant environmental legislation and

regulations.

The operation controls for monitoring should consider the suggested monitoring scope as detailed below and at

a minimum to the level as required by pertinent environmental regulations and guidelines.

Evaluation of Compliance 17.4.11Comprehensive procedures will be deployed for the management of complaints, accidents and pollution

incidents. These procedures will include:

A process for handling the investigation of accidents, incidents, near misses and non-conformances;

Response activity coordination as a result of any of the above including preventative actions, mitigation and

corrective actions; and

The development and documentation of logging, reporting and progress tracking processes including a

change log of core EHS documentation.

Nonconformity, Corrective Action and Preventive Action 17.4.12Any deviations from the OEMP identified by site personnel or other interested parties through formal site

inspection, audit, visual observation (or other means) should be documented, and associated corrective action

and preventative action implemented by competent individuals in order to mitigate the environmental impacts

and to prevent re-occurrence.


Control of Records 17.4.13The organisation shall establish and maintain procedures for the identification and maintenance of EHS

records. These records shall include training records and the results of audits and reviews.

EHS records shall be legible, identifiable and traceable to the activity, product or service involved. EHS records

shall be stored and maintained in such a way that they are readily retrievable and protected against damage,

deterioration or loss. Their retention times shall be established and recorded.

Internal Audits 17.4.14The organisation shall establish and maintain programme(s) and procedures for periodic environmental

management system audits to be carried out, in order to:

Determine whether or not the EHS management system conforms to planned arrangements for EHS man-

agement and that is has been properly implemented and maintained; and

To provide information on the results of audits to management.

The organisation’s audit programme, including any schedule, shall be based on the environmental importance

of the activity concerned and the results of previous audits. In order to be comprehensive, the audit procedures

shall cover the audit scope, frequency, and methodologies, as well as responsibilities and requirements for

conducting audits and reporting results.

The audit programme will provide opportunities to ensure that the contents of the Environmental Policy and

other commitments are being duly satisfied.

The audit programme should be developed on the basis of the risk posed by various activities i.e. high risk

activities will receive more regular checking.

In addition the programme will:

Check on the performance of the EHS management plan;

Ensure document compliance;

Contribute to education and awareness of employees;

Share best EHS practice; and

Report findings, non-conformances, corrective actions and preventative measures.

Management Review Phase 17.4.15The project team’s top management shall, at intervals that are predetermined, review the EHS management

system to ensure its continuing suitability, adequacy and effectiveness. The management review process shall

ensure that the necessary information is collected to allow management to carry out this evaluation. This review

shall be fully documented.

279 | 278

The management review shall address the possible need for changes to policy, objectives and other elements

of the system in the light of the audit results, changing circumstances, and the commitment to continual

improvement.

Framework Operational Environmental Control Plans 17.5

Marine Environment 17.5.1The key impact during the operational phase will be the potential for adverse environmental impacts upon the marine

and coastal environment resulting from the operation of the cooling water intake and outfall.

It is recommended that the following key mitigation measures are implemented:

Provision of on-line process monitoring for the cooling water system and associated auxiliary processes,

particularly those requiring application of chlorine or chemical additives;

Chemical monitoring of individual effluent lines prior to mixing with the cooling water and a continuous

flow/quality monitor on the final effluent channel;

The provision of balancing/evaporation ponds to receive storm water drainage or flows associated with ab-

normal or emergency conditions;

Prevent planned or accidental discharge of chlorinated product water with effluent due to potential impact on

the benthic communities (i.e. coral reef) – discharge to an evaporation pond if not required;

Chemical stores to be within an enclosed structure on hard standing and with an impermeable bund equiva-

lent to 110% of the largest tank;

All oil storage tanks to have an impermeable bund capable of holding 110% of the largest tank;

Slow, phased, start-up of facility and discharge of effluent to facilitate a gradual acclimation of local biota

(i.e. minimise ‘shock effect’); and

Ensure that site staff are aware of the environmental management system and that there is an Environmen-

tal Co-ordinator for the site to record training, incidents etc.

A marine ecology marine monitoring programme will be implemented during the operational phase of the

Project to ensure that the impacts of the project are fully understood and offset where possible.

The monitoring programme should cover the affected area as well any areas considered part of the Habitat

Loss Compensation Strategy.

Air Quality 17.5.2 All plant on-site will be regularly maintained to ensure optimal efficiency and ensure, as far as practicable,

all equipment will be in good working order at all times.


The proposed facility will incorporate a Continuous Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS) for NOx, SO2 and

PM10. This would accurately determine pollutant concentrations in the emissions and provide an indication

of any exceedences in emissions from the plant against the PME and IFC air pollution standards.

Ambient air quality monitoring of NOx, SO2 and PM10 will be undertaken using a continuous air quality

monitoring station to verify the current baseline and impact of the existing facilities upon the air shed.

Operating instructions to be provided to ensure that machines do not operate above the allowed limits; and

A periodic calibration and maintenance programme will be implemented to maintain the monitoring systems

in place.

Noise and Vibration Management 17.5.3It is recommended that as part of the Operational Management Plan regular noise monitoring is undertaken at

the site boundary to show compliance with PME noise standards. It is further recommended that a full

occupational noise survey is undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees.

Occupational noise standards need to be maintained as part of the Health and Safety of the employees at the

facility. It is therefore important that noise levels in working areas are limited to less than 85 dB(A) at 1m from

any noise generating equipment.

In addition, to ensure the above noise levels are adhered to, procedures will be implemented to ensure that,

where appropriate, staff requiring Personal Safety Equipment to prevent impacts from noise will be provided as

part of the Health, Safety and Environment Programme.

Waste Management 17.5.4It is anticipated that the operational phase will generate waste streams associated with the plant operation,

maintenance works and administration functions. Once the plant is in operation it is important that waste

management is considered as a priority within the OEMP. Furthermore, waste recording and monitoring

requirements are set out in Section 16.5.1.

Management of Hazardous Waste 17.5.5The hazardous waste generated from maintenance works and plant operations are likely to include waste oils,

fuels, chemicals, empty containers and filters and replaced parts which may have associated hazardous

properties. Sludge from the water evaporation ponds, where toxic or other contaminants are expected to leach

out, should be treated before disposal by, for example, a stabilisation process.

Hazardous waste streams will be collected by a locally registered waste contractor and transferred to an

appropriately licensed hazardous waste facility for disposal. As part of the OEMP, all paperwork and records of

hazardous waste management activities on-site will need to be maintained including records of off-site disposal

to landfill.

281 | 278

The GER Appendix 4 (2006) “Hazardous Waste Control Rules and Procedures” details the requirements for

managing hazardous waste. A few of the key requirements are included below, which will need to be complied

with during the operation of the Project:

Containerise and pack hazardous waste in a proper and environmentally sound manner placing warning

labels on each package in accordance with the specifications and standards applicable in the Kingdom;

Accurately fill up the product data on the appropriate section of the hazardous waste transportation

document in accordance with the instructions provided in the document;

Confirm with the PME, that the storage, treatment or disposal facility designated in the transportation

document is capable of managing the waste that will be sent to it;

Make the necessary arrangements with both the transporter who will carry the waste and the receiving

facility designated in the transportation documents as the destination for the waste (such as providing the

facility with full and detailed information on the waste and samples for analysis);

Provide the transporter with the transportation document and copy of the safety data sheets for each type

of hazardous waste being transported; and

Comply with the hazardous waste transportation instructions provided in the transportation document;

The hazardous waste generator shall comply with the following for keeping of records and reports:


facility designated in the document. It shall also keep the signed copy for at least 5 years as of the date of

receipt of the waste by that facility;

Retain copies of the results of all tests and analysis performed on the hazardous waste as well as copies of

all pertinent reports, correspondence and documents for at least five years from the last date of handling of

such waste;


reports shall be retained for at least five years from the date of completion;

Submit on demand to the PME or the agencies designated by it, all documents, records and reports related

to the waste; and





In addition, adherence to the guidance set out within the IFC General EHS Guidelines: Community Health and

Safety, relating to the on-site and off-site transportation of waste is recommended. These guidelines require

that transportation of waste should be undertaken so as to prevent or minimise spills, releases, and exposures

to employees and the public. All waste containers designated for off-site shipment should be secured and


labelled with the contents and associated hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles prior to leaving

the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper that describes the load and its associated hazards.

Non-Hazardous Solid Waste Management 17.5.6

Solid wastes, including sewage treatment plant sludge, that do not leach toxic substances or other

contaminants of concern to the environment, may be disposed by suitably licensed contractors in landfills or

other disposal sites provided they do not impact nearby water bodies.

The administration buildings and offices on-site are likely to generate quantities of non-hazardous waste

streams including waste paper, cardboard, plastic packaging that have the potential to be segregated for

recycling. Therefore suitable waste receptacles will need to be provided at central locations on-site for the

segregation of waste streams for recycling and residual general waste. The segregated waste will be

transferred to the central storage area on-site for non-hazardous waste which will consist of dedicated

containers for recyclable waste and general waste. The storage area for non-hazardous waste will be located

on an impermeable hardstanding surface and located under cover.

The waste streams segregated for recycling and the general waste will be collected by a suitably qualified and

licensed waste contractor. As part of the OEMP, all paperwork and records of non-hazardous waste

management activities on-site and off-site disposal will be maintained for monitoring purposes.

Socio Economic 17.5.7

The operation of the Project will create economic opportunities for the local area. This is likely to include

increased business for services with the additional SEC workers and contractors. There will also be

opportunities for various support service providers including guards, cleaners, catering and other site

management facilities, which will provide employment and a further source of income.

However, one of the key issues is ensuring that operational staff employed by SEC and contractors, are

protected from workplace incidents and illness through appropriate health and safety systems both during

normal operation and other tasks such as maintenance and repair. Appropriate safety systems such as fire

protection and emergency procedures will also be required.


It is recommended that the following measures are adopted during the operational phase of the Project:

Implementation of Saudi Arabian Labour Law;

To provide the employees with a safe and risk free environment, it is recommended that a comprehensive

EHS plan is developed and implemented. This framework, in line with Performance Standard 2, will

address measures for accident prevention, identification, mitigation and management of hazards (including

physical, chemical, and radiological hazards), training of workers and reporting of accidents and incidents;

283 | 278

In accordance with Performance Standard 2 SEC should develop and implement a human resource policy

outlining the management approach towards working conditions, entitlement to wages and any benefits and

terms of employment. This policy must be disseminated and accessible for all employees, clearly defining

the employees’ legal rights and the management’s statement on child labour, forced labour and on non-

discrimination and equal opportunities. This policy will also provide the mechanism through which

employees can express and register their concerns and the system through which these grievances will be

addressed;

Expatriate staff must be provided with an induction course (as part of their training), which will highlight

social and cultural trends in practice in Saudi Arabia. The objective of this course will be to familiarise the

expatriate staff with knowledge of their host country and provide an understanding and respect for other

cultures. The aim will be to reduce, prevent and mitigate against social and cultural tensions and potential

hostility between workers and the residents of surrounding communities;

Where feasible, staff will be of local origin where suitably qualified applicants are available. This will ensure

a degree of balance between the use of non-Saudi Arabian workers and locally employed personnel during

the operational phase, and limit the impact on the local economy;

In common with Performance Standard 4, all components of and infrastructure associated with the Project

will be operated in accordance with industry best practice by qualified staff; and

In line with Performance Standard 1 it is also recommended that a grievance mechanism is established for

local residents, giving them a platform to raise any concerns.

Noise Nuisance to Adjacent Land Uses

The assessment undertaken in Chapter 7: Noise and Vibration has determined that there will be no

exceedance of IFC or PME noise criteria at any noise sensitive locations. Therefore, there is no need for any

mitigation measures to be implemented. However, it is important to note that there are also occupational noise

standards that need to be maintained as part of the Health and Safety of the employees at the facility. It is

therefore important that noise levels in working areas are limited to less than 85 dB (A) at 1m from any noise

generating equipment.

It is recommended that as part of the OEMP, regular noise monitoring is undertaken at the site boundary to

show compliance with PME noise standards. It is further recommended that a full occupational noise survey is

undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of the site employees.


All plant on-site will be regularly maintained to ensure optimal efficiency and ensure, as far as practicable,

all equipment will be in good working order at all times.


The proposed facility will incorporate a Continuous Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS) for NOx, SO2 and





Operating instructions to be provided to ensure that machines do not operate above the allowed limits; and

A periodic calibration and maintenance programme will be implemented to maintain the monitoring systems

in place.

Impacts on Local Businesses

As the impacts are considered to be positive there is no need for any mitigation measures to be implemented.

Economic Impacts

As the impacts are considered to be positive there is no need for any mitigation measures to be implemented.

Soils, Geology and Contamination 17.5.8In order to avoid any contamination during the operational phase of the Project, the following mitigation

measures will be implemented:

The Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all chemicals used during operation will be retained on site;

Procedures will be implemented to ensure the safe storage and disposal of hazardous and waste

chemicals;

Hazardous chemicals and materials will be appropriately stored on-site in a secure, bunded compound and

located on an impervious surface. The storage areas will need to be clearly labelled with MSDS maintained

as part of the on-site record keeping;

Details and properties for each material will be clearly noted and will include the nature (poisonous,

corrosive, flammable), prohibitions on disposal (dumpster, drain, sewer) and the recommended disposal

method (recycle, sewer, storage, landfill). A signed checklist should be developed for users of hazardous

materials detailing amount taken, amount used, amount returned and disposal of spent material;

Good practice measures in terms of health and safety to comply, as a minimum, with KSA law and policy

requirements would be proactively promoted;

Appropriate security measures will be provided in order to ensure that any potential issues that may result

in contamination are avoided;

Appropriate safety zoning to the hazards will be provided in order to ensure that any spillages or incidents

are avoided;

285 | 278

Written standard operating procedures (SOPs) for all processes and appropriate document control will be

provided;

Awareness training will be provided for all employees including management, office staff and technical staff

on pollution prevention and control techniques and best practices;

Daily checklists for plant and office areas will be established in order to confirm cleanliness and adherence

to proper storage and security. Specific employees will be assigned specific inspection responsibilities and

given the authority to remedy any problems found;

Emergency response procedures will be provided in order to avoid any potential incidents to ensure that

contamination incidents are controlled if they occur;

Regular reviews of emergency response procedures will be undertaken, including a contingency plan for

spills, leaks, weather extremes etc.;

Continuous monitoring and reporting of the plants’ performance should be undertaken in order to establish

baseline conditions and whether conditions are improving or deteriorating; and

To reduce the risk of wind-blown residue contaminating the site or adjacent areas, the evaporation ponds

should either have all residue removed on a regular basis or have a continuous supply of water to keep the

tanks damp. The residue left in the evaporation ponds will be collected and disposed of as a hazardous

waste by a PME licensed hazardous waste contractor.

Terrestrial Ecology 17.5.9Chapter 11: Terrestrial Ecology outlines that as there is limited terrestrial ecology in the area this has not been

considered within the ESIA as the impact of the operation of the project is likely to be of negligible significance,

however the following key mitigation measures will be implemented:

Any additional landscape planting should be proposed and designed to provide some ecological benefit in

attracting bird and insect species. Native species should be favoured over exotic species;

Where practicable, naturally growing vegetation within the site boundary should be protected and/or

encouraged, e.g. ensuring that vehicles and members of staff keep to maintained roads and pathways

would protect the onsite vegetation from trampling. This will encourage native species which will be free

from grazing pressure of livestock animals which would in turn attract fauna species such as birds and

insects, increasing the biodiversity of the site;

The land within the site boundary should be kept clear of any municipal or industrial waste arising from

facility processes (other than designated areas where appropriate controls should be applied), staff and

staff housing and offsite sources. This would improve the general “environmental quality” and amenity

value of the site and reduce potential attraction of pest species such as rats and flies to the site; and

Vehicles carrying potentially toxic, friable materials should be covered at all times so that these materials

are not accidentally deposited into the natural environment, causing harm to flora and fauna.


Wastewater and Water Resources 17.5.10The Project will not result in any direct discharges to the environment.

Wastewater Process 17.5.11The process wastewater will be discharged to an evaporation pond following onsite treatment e.g.

demineralisation, and therefore no further mitigation is required. The removal of oils and hydrocarbons from

waste waters will be undertaken, which will generate waste materials. Furthermore, when the waste process

water evaporates it will leave behind a residue. These wastes will need to be collected and disposed of as a

hazardous waste by a PME licensed hazardous waste contractor (see Section 17.5.4 for appropriate controls).

Sanitary Wastewater Effluent 17.5.12It is understood that treated sewage effluent is proposed for re-use for irrigation and it will therefore be

necessary to implement adequate quality control measures to ensure that no impacts upon the environment or

health and safety are realised. The United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) Guidelines for

Water Reuse (2004) provide guidance on the safe reuse of wastewater for irrigation. It is recommended that

these guidelines, or a suitable recognised alternative, are adhered to when implementing this element of the

project.

Local Water Resources 17.5.13The source of potable water for the site will be via deep wells from aquifers with limited recharge. It is therefore

recommended that potable water reduction measures are implemented such as water efficient faucets, urinals,

showerheads and toilets.

Storm Water Generation and Management 17.5.14 Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination should be minimised by the development of

appropriate storm-water and run-off control measures within the design of the Project which could include,

for example, reduction in peak discharge rates by using swales and retention ponds;

Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed and maintained as appropriate at refuelling

facilities workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment areas; and

Sludge or other solid wastes arising from storm water catchments or collection and treatment systems may

contain elevated levels of pollutants and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory

requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health and

safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water and land resources.

Monitoring Programmes 17.6

An environmental monitoring programme will be developed and implemented as part of the OEMP. The

monitoring programme will include the ongoing review of emissions which will be reported to the PME on an

287 | 278

annual basis and more frequently if there are either abnormal operating conditions, or changes which may

affect the environmental quality of the emissions.

Air Quality 17.6.1 The proposed facility will incorporate a Continuous Emissions Monitoring System (CEMS) for NOx, SO2 and





Noise 17.6.2The following aspects relating to noise will be monitored during the operational phase of the Project by the

O&M Company:

Regular noise monitoring will be undertaken within close proximity of noise sensitive locations, if future

works include activities which are known to cause significant levels of noise;

A full occupational noise survey should be undertaken in the interests of the health and safety of Site

employees; and

Periodic monitoring of operational areas where workers are expose to noise to ensure appropriate working

practices and protection for O&M staff and contractors. Noise levels in working areas must be less than

85dB(A) at 1m from any noise generating equipment.

Waste Management 17.6.3As part of the OEMP, all paperwork and records of hazardous waste management activities on-site will need to

be maintained including records of off-site disposal to landfill as follows:

SEC will maintain the following records and reports:


facility designated in the document. It shall also keep the signed copy for at least 5 years as of the date

of receipt of the waste by that facility;

Retain copies of the results of all tests and analysis performed on the hazardous waste as well as

copies of all pertinent reports, correspondence and documents for at least five years from the last date

of handling of such waste;


reports shall be retained for at least five years from the date of completion; and

Submit on demand to the PME or the agencies designated by it, all documents, records and reports

related to the waste.






Groundwater 17.6.4 A monitoring programme should also be established by SEC to determine any detrimental impacts upon

water levels and water quality as a result of long-term abstraction for use within the Project.

If significant groundwater impacts are identified, alternative sources of water should be sourced where

possible.

Decommissioning Plan 17.7

A comprehensive plan for decommissioning the facility should be compiled at the end of its 30+ year design

life. All decommissioning and restoration activities must adhere to the requirements of appropriate governing

authorities and will be in accordance with all applicable local and international regulation and guidance. The

decommissioning and restoration process is likely to include:

The removal of above-ground structures;

The removal of below-ground structures (turbine foundations);

The restoration of topsoil; and

The implementation of a monitoring and remediation period.

Successful decommissioning will only be complete when all buildings, equipment, materials, wastes or any

other materials, which could result in environmental pollution, are removed from the site and recycled,

recovered or disposed of.

289 | 278

Appendices


Appendix A – Bibliography CIA. (2013). The World Factbook - Middle East: Saudi Arabia. . Retrieved 04 28, 2013, from

CIA: https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/geos/sa.html#top

IFC. (2007). Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines – General EHS Guidelines.

Jacobs. (2013). Umm Wu'al Phosphate Project Environmental and Social Impact

Assessment.

Nader, I. A. (1995). Harrat Al-Harra, First National Reserve in Saudi Arabia. Arabian Wildlife

Vol 2.

P.A., M., & Schuttenberg, H. (2006). A Reef Manager’s Guide to Coral Bleaching. Australia:

Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority.

Saudi Geological Society. (n.d.). Saudi Geological Survey: National Centre for Earthquakes

and Volcanoes - Earthquake Seismology . Retrieved 03 27, 2014, from

http://www.sgs.org.sa/English/NaturalHazards/Pages/Earthquakes.aspx

SEC. (2014). Construction of Duba Integrated Solar Combined Cycle Project Project

Schedule “B” Attachment III, Detailed Scope of Work.

UN-ESCWA and BGR . (2013). Inventory of Shared Water Resources in Western Asia.

Beirut.

United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs. (2010). Resource Abundance - A

curse or a Blessing .

US NOAA . (2003). Guidelines and Principles for Social Impact Assessment .

Vincent, P. (2008). Saudi Arabia: An Environmental Overview. London: Taylor & Francis.

WSP. (2014). Duba Solar Thermal Power Project, Preliminary Environmental Assessment

and Terms of Reference.

WWF. (2014). Desert and Xeric Shrublands. Retrieved 04 10, 2014, from World Wildlife Fund

Terrestrial Ecoregions: https://worldwildlife.org/ecoregions/pa1303

Zafar, S. (2013). Solid Waste Management in Saudi Arabia. . Retrieved 04 25, 2013, from

EcoMENA: Powering Sustainable Development in MENA: www.ecomena.org/solid-

waste-management-in-saudi-arabia/

291 | 278

Appendix B – Project Layout Drawings


Appendix C – Fuel Specifications

293 | 278

Natural gas specifications

Gas Specification

Component Unit Current (RFP Reference Gas) Low High

CH4 Methane mole-% 83.00 80.85 80.7

C2H6 Ethane mole-% 6.60 2.28 16

C3H8 Propane mole-% 0.07 0.47 2.8

C4H10 Butane mole-% 0.50 0.14 -

C5H12 Pentane mole-% 0.50 0.04 -

C6H14 Hexane mole-% 0.50 - -

N2 Nitrogen mole-% 6.40 13.77 0.5

CO2 Carbon dioxide mole-% 2.50 2.41 -

H2S -

Specific Gravity @ 600F, Air = 1

- 0.6098 0.55 0.65

Water Dew Point C0 - -75 -55

Hydro Carbon Dew Point @ 39.2 bar (a)

C0

- - -5

HHV Higher Heating Value

MJ/m³ 40.215 34.529 46.217

MJ/kg 46.445 40.841 53.843

BTU/SCF 1080 *) ~ 930**) 1240

LHV Lower Heating Value

MJ/m³ 36.367 31.154 41.865

MJ/kg 42.001 36.85 48.772

BTU/SCF 976 836 1124

P Gas Gas Pressure bar (g) 35 21 66

T Gas Gas Temperature C0 50 15 65


Arabian Super Light (ASL) Fuel Oil Specifications

Property Limit Heating Value, Gross, BTU/Lb. 19145

Kin. Viscosity, cSt, (20 0C)

Kin. Viscosity, cSt, (37.8 0C).

Kin. Viscosity, cSt, (40 0C).

Kin. Viscosity, cSt, (50 0C).

2.09

1.8

1.58

1.5 Gravity , API 49.1

Specific Gravity , 60 0F (15.6 0C) 0.7835

Flash Point, (0C) < 0 0C

Distillate Temp. 90% Point, 0F(0C) N/A

Pour Point, 0F(0C), -31 0F

Cold Filter Plugging Point 20 0F

Ash , ppm 3

Sodium plus Potassium ppm 2.1

Lead ppm 1

Vanadium ppm 0.5

Calcium, max 10

Nitrogen ppm 62

Carbon residue Wt. % 0.8

Nickel ppm 0.1

Reid Vapour pressure psi 7.8

Salt as NaCl, PPTB <1

Hydrogen, Wt. %, min 11 %

Carbon Residue, Wt. % (100% Sample) max

Air automixation, Low Pressure

1 Sulphur, Wt. % 0.1

Wax, (%), max 1.43

295 | 278

Distillate Fuel Oil Specifications.

ARAMCO SPECIFICATION AL – 18

DIESEL OIL FOR LOCAL USE

TEST GUARANTEE METHOD

Acid No.mg KOH/gm ASTM D 974 Strong Nil

Total 0.25 Max Ash ,Wt. ,% 0.005 Max ASTM D 482

Carbon Residue, 10% Bottoms ,wt. %

0.2 Max ASTM D 524

Cloud Point. 0F (-1.1 c)+30 Max ASTM D 2500 Colour 3 Max ASTM D 1500

Composition 100% Virgin Distillate

Corrosion, On Strip 3 hrs @212 0F

# 2 Strip or better

ASTM D 130

Diesel Index 55min IP - 21 ASTM D 86

Distillation (% Recovered) (357.2 0c) 675 Max

90% Point, 0F (385 0c) 725 Max

End Point, 0F Flash, P.M. Closed, 0F (60 0c) 140 Min ASTM D93

ASTM D287 Gravity

0 API 34.0 – 42.0 Specific, 60/60 0F 0.8155 – 0.8550

Pour Pont, 0F (-666 0c) + 20 Max

ASTM D97

Sulphur, wt. % 1.0 Max ASTM D2622/ ASTM D1522

Viscosity ,S.U.S @ 100 0F,Seconds

33 – 45 ASTM D88

Water: Sediment by Centrifuge %

Trace Max ASTM D1796

Water by Distillation, Vol % 0.05

ASTM D95

MHV (mj/KG 45.57


Appendix D – Wind Roses for Sharm El Sheikh (2009 to 2013)

297 | 278

Wind Rose for 2009

Wind Rose for 2010

299 | 278

Wind Rose for 2011

Wind Rose for 2012

301 | 278

Wind Rose for 2013


Appendix E – Dispersion Model Input Parameters used in the Assessment

303 | 278

Emission Data for E-Class Turbines

Parameter Units Siemens (SGT6-2000E)

OP1 OP2 OP1 OP2 OP1 (ASL) OP2 (ASL)

Ambient Temperature °C 40 0 40 0 40 0

Fuel Type NG (Simple Cycle) NG (Combined Cycle) ASL (Combined Cycle)

Internal stack diameter m 4.5 4 4

Stack Height m 40 60 60

Flue gas temperature °C 540.0 506.0 176.0 141.0 180.0 145.0

flue gas velocity m/s 30.5 34.5 21.3 23.2 22.1 26.0

Actual flue gas flow rate ( per stack) Am3/s 484.8 548.8 267.7 291.6 351.6 413.2

Normalised flue gas flow rate ( per stack) Nm3/s 209.7 222.7 209.7 222.7 151.0 203.9

Emissions NG (Simple Cycle) NG (Combined Cycle) ASL (Combined Cycle)

OP1 OP2 OP1 OP2 OP1 OP2

NOx ppmv 25 25 25 25 105 105

NOx mg/Nm3 51.4 51.4 51.4 51.4 214.9 214.9

SO2 mg/Nm3 NA NA NA NA 74.7 77.3

PM10 mg/Nm3 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 50.0 50.0

NOx g/s 10.8 11.4 10.8 11.4 32.5 43.8

SO2 g/s NA NA NA NA 11.3 15.8

PM10 g/s 2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2 7.5 10.2


Emission Data for F-Class Turbines

Parameter Simple Cycle Combined Cycle

OP1 OP1 OP1 OP1

Fuel Type NG NG NG ASL ASL

Fuel Consumption Rate (t/hr) 36.2 36.16 30.47 40.37 34.02

Oxygen content (% at actual stack condition) 11.98 11.02 12.60 10.64 10.00

Water content (% at actual stack condition) 10.29 11.11 7.68 12.91 12.50

Flue Gas exhaust Temperatures (°C) 615 183 171 201 190

Flue Gas exhaust Temperatures (K) 888 456 444 474 463

Flue Gas exhaust flow (t/h) 1417.00 1421.35 1221.20 1466.00 1259.56

Flue Gas specific volume (Am3/kg) 2.58 1.33 1.28 1.38 1.32

Flue Gas exhaust flow (Am3/s) 1016.23 524.40 433.63 562.37 461.84

Normalized Exhaust flow rate (Nm3/s)(*) 358.46 402.18 302.51 415.13 382.51

Exhaust efflux velocity (m/s); 39.13 22.07 18.25 23.67 19.44

Stack Height (m) 40 60

Internal stack diameter (m) 5.75 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50

Emissions

NOx concentration (mg/Nm3) 21.2 21.3 18.5 86.3 75.0

SO2 Concentration (mg/Nm3) NA NA NA 48.4 44.2

PM10 concentration (mg/Nm3) 3.9 3.5 4.6 50.0 54.2

NOx emission (g/s) 7.59 8.56 5.59 35.81 28.68

305 | 278

SO2 emission (g/s) NA NA NA 20.09 16.91

PM10 emission (g/s) 1.39 1.39 1.39 20.75 20.75


Stacks and Structures included in the model

Option A and Option B Stack Locations

Source Coordinates

Option A Easting Northing

Main Stacks

MS11 740615.0 3072878.1

MS21 740586.4 3072945.9

MS22 740565.0 3072981.6

By-pass Stacks

BS11 740654.2 3072894.1

BS21 740622.1 3072963.7

BS22 740604.3 3072999.4

Option B

Main Stacks

MS11 740615.0 3072878.1

MS12 740604.3 3072910.2

MS21 740586.4 3072945.9

MS22 740565.0 3072981.6

By-pass Stacks

BS11 740654.2 3072894.1

BS12 740640.0 3072928.0

BS21 740622.1 3072963.7

BS22 740604.3 3072999.4

On-site Building Locations and Dimensions

Structure Coordinates Height

(m) Width(m) Length (m)

Radius (m) Easting Northing

Turbine Hall (tall) 740668.5 3072881.7 20 36 155

Central Control Room 1 740600.7 3073020.8 12 25 43

Condensate Tank 1 740672.1 3073256.3 15

14

Condensate Tank 2 740714.9 3073277.8 15 14

ASL Tank 1 740850.5 3073277.8 15 14

ASL Tank 2 740914.7 3073306.3 15 14

ST Building 740522.2 3072849.5 18 28 126

307 | 278

Appendix F – Air Quality Monitoring Laboratory Analytical Reports

2187

(A division of Gradko International Ltd.)

St. Martins House, 77 Wales Street Winchester, Hampshire SO23 0RH

tel.: 01962 860331 fax: 01962 841339 e-mail:[email protected]

LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT

The Diffusion Tubes have been tested within the scope of Gradko International Ltd. Laboratory Quality Procedures calculations and assessments

involving the exposure procedures and periods provided by the client are not within the scope of our UKAS accreditation. Those results obtained

using exposure data shall be indicated by an asterisk. Any queries concerning the data in this report should be directed to the Laboratory Manager

Gradko International Ltd. This report is not to be reproduced, except in full, without the written permission of Gradko International Ltd.

Form LQF32b Issue 4 – September 2012 Report Number I02047R Page 1 of 1

DETERMINATION OF SULPHUR DIOXIDE IN DIFFUSION TUBES BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY

REPORT NUMBER I02047R

BOOKING IN REFERENCE No I02047

DESPATCH NOTE No SOR015778

CUSTOMER WSP Middle East Environmental Attn: Simon Pickup

P.O. Box 7497 Monarch Office Tower Buildin 1 Sheikh Sayed Road '20 Dubai United Arab Emirates

DATE SAMPLES RECEIVED 30/05/2014

Date Date Exposure µg S µg S - SO2 SO2

Location Sample Number

Exposed Finished Hours Total Blank µg/m3* ppb*

Waad Al Shamal 1A 343246 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 <0.03 <0.02 <1.98 <0.74

Waad Al Shamal 1B 343247 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 <0.03 <0.02 <1.98 <0.74

Waad Al Shamal 2 343248 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 430.72 <0.03 <0.02 <1.98 <0.74

Waad Al Shamal 3A 343249 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 <0.03 <0.02 <1.99 <0.75

Waad Al Shamal 3B 343250 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 0.06 0.06 5.24 1.97

Laboratory Blank 0.003

Comment: Results are blank subtracted

Results reported as <0.03µg S are below the reporting limit.

Overall M.U. ±6.0% Reporting Limit 0.03µg S

Analysed on Dionex ICS3000 ICU5

Analyst Name Katya Paldamova

Date of Analysis 09/06/2014 Date of Report 10/06/2014

Analysis has been carried out in accordance with in-house method GLM1

2187





The Diffusion Tubes have been tested within the scope of Gradko International Ltd. Laboratory Quality Procedures calculations and assessments

involving the exposure procedures and periods provided by the client are not within the scope of our UKAS accreditation. Those results obtained

using exposure data shall be indicated by an asterisk. Any queries concerning the data in this report should be directed to the Laboratory Manager

Gradko International Ltd. This report is not to be reproduced, except in full, without the written permission of Gradko International Ltd.

Form LQF32b Issue 4 – September 2012 Report Number X1257A Page 1 of 1

DETERMINATION OF OZONE IN DIFFUSION TUBES BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY

REPORT NUMBER X1257AR

BOOKING IN REFERENCE No X1257A


CUSTOMER WSP Middle East Environmental

P.O. Box 7497, Monarch Office Tower Building

1 Sheikh Sayed Road 20

DATE SAMPLES RECEIVED 30-May

GRADKO LAB REF GIO2497-2502

Location Bar Code Date On Date Off Exposure µg on Tube µg - Blank O3* O3*

(hrs) Total

µg/m

3 ppb

1A 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 0.82 0.80 107.06 53.53

1B 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 0.96 0.94 125.77 62.88

2A 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 430.72 1.02 1.00 134.52 67.26

2B 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 430.72 0.88 0.86 115.32 57.66

3A 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 0.77 0.75 101.76 50.88

3B 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 0.89 0.87 117.55 58.77

Lab Blank 0.02

(RESULTS ARE BLANK CORRECTED)

Overall M.O.U

±10.0% Reporting Limit 0.096µg O3

Analysed on ICS3000 ICU05

K. Paldamova

Date of Analysis

04/06/2014 Date of Report 10/06/2014

Analysis has been carried out in accordance with in-house method GLM 2

2187





The Diffusion Tubes have been tested within the scope of Gradko International Ltd. Laboratory Quality Procedures calculations and assessments involving the exposure procedures and periods provided by the

client are not within the scope of our UKAS accreditation. Those results obtained using exposure data shall be indicated by an asterisk. Any queries concerning the data in this report should be directed to the

Laboratory Manager Gradko International Ltd. This report is not to be reproduced, except in full, without the written permission of Gradko International Ltd.

Form LQF32c Issue 4 – September 2012 Report number X1257R Page 1 of 2

NITROGEN DIOXIDE IN DIFFUSION TUBES BY U.V.SPECTROPHOTOMETRY

REPORT NUMBER X1257R

BOOKING REFERENCE No X1257


CUSTOMER WSP Middle East Environmental

P.O. Box 7497, Monarch Office Tower Building

1 Sheikh Sayed Road 20

Dubai, UAE

DATE SAMPLES RECEIVED 30/05/2014

Exposure Data

NO2 NOX NO NO2 NOX NO TOTAL TOTAL

NO2 Tube Number NOx Date On Date Off Time (hr.) ppb * ppb * ppb * + µµµµg/m

3 µµµµg/m

3 µµµµg/m

3 + µµµµG NO2 µµµµG NOx

Waad Al Shamal 1A 295375 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 7.28 13.94 0.44 Waad Al Shamal 1B 295376 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 431.25 9.77 18.73 0.59 Waad Al Shamal 2A 295377 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 430.72 9.99 19.13 0.60 Waad Al Shamal 2B 295378 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 430.72 8.69 16.64 0.52 Waad Al Shamal 3A 295379 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 8.45 16.19 0.50 Waad Al Shamal 3B 295373 05/05/2014 23/05/2014 428.45 9.72 18.63 0.58

2187





The Diffusion Tubes have been tested within the scope of Gradko International Ltd. Laboratory Quality Procedures calculations and assessments involving the exposure procedures and periods provided by the

client are not within the scope of our UKAS accreditation. Those results obtained using exposure data shall be indicated by an asterisk. Any queries concerning the data in this report should be directed to the

Laboratory Manager Gradko International Ltd. This report is not to be reproduced, except in full, without the written permission of Gradko International Ltd.

Form LQF32c Issue 4 – September 2012 Report number X1257R Page 2 of 2

Lab Blanks 431.25 0.07 0.33 0.27 0.13 0.64 0.51 0.004 0.020

Comment: Results are not blank subtracted

+NO results are derived by subtracting NO2 from NOx.

Results have been corrected to a temperature of 293K (20C) Overall M.O.U. 5.2% +/- Limit of Detection 0.029ug NOx, 0.01ug NO2 on tube Tube Preparation: 20%TEA/Water Analysed on UVS05 Camspec M550

Analyst Name L. Digby

Date of Analysis 05/06/2014 Date of Report 10/06/2014

Analysis carried out in accordance with documented in-house Laboratory Method GLM7

Appendix G – Modelling Results – Combined Cycle


Modelling Results: Combined Cycle Mode

Fuel: Natural Gas

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option A (OP1)

Table A5-1: NO2 Concentrations

Averaging Period Air

Quality Standard

Concentration (µg/m3)

Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

Highest 1-hr Mean 660 12.83 2% NEGLIGIBLE 740550 3072350

Annual Mean 100 3.69 4% NEGLIGIBLE 740450 3072200

NB - 50% oxidation of NOx to NO2 assumed for 1-hour mean concentrations; 100% oxidation for annual means

Table A5-2 PM10 Concentrations




Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing





Averaging Period Air Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

90th Percentile of 24-hr Means 340 1.22 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 740450 3072200

Annual Mean 80 0.76 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 740450 3072200


Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 0.69 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 740450 3072200

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option B (OP1)




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 6.45 6% MINOR 740450 3072250





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

90th Percentile of 24-hr Means 340 2.03 1% NEGLIGIBLE 740500 3072250






Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 6.90 7% MINOR 740450 3072250





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing




Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option A (OP1) Table A5-9: NO2 Concentrations

Receptor

UTM Grid Ref NO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

Easting Northing Annual Mean Percentage of PME AQS

Impact Significance 1-hour Mean

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.05 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 7.11 1% NEGLIGIBLE

2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.11 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 5.57 1% NEGLIGIBLE

3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.11 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 5.33 1% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.11 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 5.02 1% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.12 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 4.95 1% NEGLIGIBLE

6 Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 0.11 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 5.12 1% NEGLIGIBLE

7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.11 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 4.66 1% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.12 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 5.01 1% NEGLIGIBLE

9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.10 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 3.14 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

10 Alsourah 732009 3083693 0.01 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.64 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.07 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 1.99 <1% NEGLIGIBLE



Receptor

UTM Grid Ref PM10 Concentrations (µg/m3)


Impact Significance

90th Percentile of 24-hour

Means Percentage of PME AQS

Impact Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.01 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

6 Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE





Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option A (OP2) Table A5-11 NO2 Concentrations

Receptor




Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance













Table A5-12: PM10 Concentrations

Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance













Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (OP1) Table A5-13: NO2 Concentrations

Receptor




Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance









9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.16 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 4.76 1% NEGLIGIBLE





Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance













Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (OP2) Table A5-15 NO2 Concentrations

Receptor




Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance














Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance













Appendix H – Modelling Results – Simple Cycle

Modelling Results: Simple Cycle Mode

Fuel: Natural Gas




Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

Highest 1-hr Mean 660 97.33 15% MINOR 740600 3072850

Annual Mean 100 25.76 26% NA 740600 3072850

NB:

1. 50% oxidation of NOx to NO2 assumed for 1-hour mean concentrations; 100% oxidation for annual means

2. NA - Annual mean concentrations are not relevant to Simple Cycle mode


NB:





Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 23.01 23% NA 740600 3072850

NB:





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

90th Percentile of 24-hr Means 340 11.78 3% MINOR 740600 3072850

Annual Mean 80 5.01 6% NA 740600 3072850




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

90th Percentile of 24-hr Means 340 10.79 3% NEGLIGIBL

E 740450 3072200

Annual Mean 80 4.44 6% 740600 3072850

NB:





Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 27.01 27% NA 740600 3072850

NB:






Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 5.25 7% NA 740600 3072850

NB:






Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 24.14 24% NA 740600 3072850

NB:






Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 4.66 6% NA 740600 3072850

NB:



Receptor


Easting Northing Annual Mean Percentage

of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.16 <1% NA 23.63 4% NEGLIGIBLE

2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.06 <1% NA 5.00 1% NEGLIGIBLE

3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.06 <1% NA 4.57 1% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.06 <1% NA 3.89 1% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.07 <1% NA 3.92 1% NEGLIGIBLE

6 Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 0.06 <1% NA 4.43 1% NEGLIGIBLE

7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.06 <1% NA 4.54 1% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.07 <1% NA 6.20 1% NEGLIGIBLE

9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.06 <1% NA 1.71 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

10 Alsourah 732009 3083693 0.01 <1% NA 0.42 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.04 <1% NA 1.19 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

NB:





Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance



3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

6 Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE




NB:



Receptor



Impact Significance 1-hour Mean Percentage

of PME AQS Impact

Significance












NB:





Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.03 <1% NA 0.03 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.01 <1% NA 0.02 <1% NEGLIGIBLE










NB:


Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (OP1) Table A6-13: NO2 Concentrations

Receptor




of PME AQS Impact

Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.30 <1% NA 56.97 9% MINOR











NB:





Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance












NB:


Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (OP2) Table A6-15 NO2 Concentrations

Receptor




of PME AQS Impact

Significance












NB:





Receptor



Impact Significance



Impact Significance












NB:


Appendix I – Modelling Results – Operation on Back-up Fuel (ASL)


Modelling Results: Operation on ASL – Combined and Simple Cycle (OP1) Notes: 1. Annual mean concentrations have been predicted and included in the tables below; how-

ever, this averaging period does not apply the operation of the power plant on ASL as op-erations under these conditions would only be short-term.

2. Only the OP1 operating conditions were predicted for ASL operation because earlier mod-elling indicated that impacts predicted for OP1 conditions were slightly higher than the re-sults for OP2.

Fuel: ASL

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option A (Combined Cycle) Table A7-1: SO2 Concentrations



Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

10-min mean 500 65.77 13% NA 740450 3072400


99.7th Percentile of 24-hr Means 365 11.71 3% NEGLIGIBLE 740600 3072000

Annual Mean 80 5.03 6% NA 740450 3072200




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 12.27 12% NA 740450 3072200





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 4.08 5% 740450 3072200

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option B (Combined Cycle)

Table A7-4: SO2 Concentrations



Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

10-min mean 500 74.85 15% NA 740675 3072975



Annual Mean 80 6.46 8% NA 740450 3072250




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 18.57 19% NA 740450 3072250





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 4.29 5% NA 740450 3072250


Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option A (Combined Cycle) Table A7-7: SO2 Concentrations

Receptor

UTM Grid Ref SO2 Concentrations (µg/m3)

Easting Northing Annual Mean

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance 1-hour Mean

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

99.7th Percentile

of 24-hour

Means

Percentage of PME AQS

Impact Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.08 <1% NA 18.86 3% NEGLIGIBLE 1.71 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.15 <1% NA 15.22 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.14 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.15 <1% NA 14.73 2% NEGLIGIBLE 0.97 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.15 <1% NA 14.25 2% NEGLIGIBLE 0.86 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.16 <1% NA 12.92 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.33 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

6 Company Housing Compound (NE) 741193.1 3073820.2 0.14 <1% NA 14.09 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.09 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.15 <1% NA 12.29 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.50 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.16 <1% NA 13.89 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.33 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.14 <1% NA 8.64 1% NEGLIGIBLE 1.32 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

10 Alsourah 732009 3083693 0.01 <1% NA 1.74 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.19 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.10 <1% NA 5.58 1% NEGLIGIBLE 1.24 <1% NEGLIGIBLE


Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance









9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.35 <1% NA 10.43 2% NEGLIGIBLE


11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.24 <1% NA 6.73 1% NEGLIGIBLE




Receptor



of PME AQS

Impact Significance


Means

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance


2 Main Administration Building 486450.0 3501827.7 0.12 <1% NA 0.23 <1% NEGLIGIBLE







9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 486345.0 3504020.0 0.12 <1% NA 0.42 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

10 Alsourah 486595.0 3504020.0 0.01 <1% NA 0.04 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

11 Almuwaylih 486595.0 3503820.0 0.08 <1% NA 0.26 <1% NEGLIGIBLE

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (Combined Cycle)


Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

99.7th Percentile

of 24-hour

Means

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.09 <1% NA 23.88 3% NEGLIGIBLE 2.15 1% NEGLIGIBLE






7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.18 <1% NA 14.47 2% NEGLIGIBLE 1.86 1% NEGLIGIBLE







Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance


2 Main Administration Building 741657 3072763.9 0.53 1% NA 25.92 4% NEGLIGIBLE

3 Canteen 741678.4 3072721.1 0.52 1% NA 25.00 4% NEGLIGIBLE

4 Mosque 741621.3 3072692.5 0.54 1% NA 24.32 4% NEGLIGIBLE

5 Company Housing Compound (NW) 741100.3 3073777.3 0.54 1% NA 21.59 3% NEGLIGIBLE


7 Company Housing Compound (SE) 741235.9 3073727.4 0.50 1% NA 20.80 3% NEGLIGIBLE

8 Company Housing Compound (SW) 741143.1 3073688.1 0.55 1% NA 23.82 4% NEGLIGIBLE

9 Fish Farm (on-shore) 739340 3074614 0.49 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 13.94 2% NEGLIGIBLE

10 Alsourah 732009 3083693 0.05 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 3.06 0% NEGLIGIBLE

11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.45 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 9.31 1% NEGLIGIBLE



Receptor



Impact Significance


Means

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance













Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option A (Simple Cycle) Table A7-13: SO2 Concentrations



Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

10-min mean 500 184.27 37% NA 740750 3072875


99.7th Percentile of 24-hr Means 365 25.32 7% MINOR 740600 3072850

Annual Mean 80 4.59 6% NA 740550 3072700




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 100 13.18 13% NA 740575 3072800





Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 3.05 4% NA 740575 3072800

Predicted Concentrations: Maximum point of Impact – Option B (Simple Cycle)




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

10-min mean 500 350.01 70% NA 740750 3072875



Annual Mean 80 5.72 7% NA 740550 3072450




Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing

Highest 1-hr Mean 660 186.91 28% MODERATE 740750 3072875

Annual Mean 100 16.45 16% 740550 3072450




Quality Standard


Percentage of AQS

Impact Significance

Location

Easting Northing


Annual Mean 80 5.72 7% NA 740550 3072450


Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option A (Simple Cycle) Table A7-19: SO2 Concentrations

Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS

Impact Significance

99.7th Percentile

of 24-hour

Means

Percentage of PME

AQS

Impact Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.12 <1% NA 43.65 6% MINOR 2.73 1% NEGLIGIBLE










11 Almuwaylih 744386 3067138 0.06 <1% NA 3.47 <1% NEGLIGIBLE 0.56 <1% NEGLIGIBLE


Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance















Receptor



of PME AQS

Impact Significance


Means

Percentage of PME AQS

Impact Significance












Predicted Concentrations: Maximum at Sensitive Receptors – Option B (Simple Cycle)


Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

99.7th Percentile of 24-hour

Means

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance

1 Central Control Building 740600.7 3073056.5 0.20 <1% NA 60.07 8% MINOR 11.55 3% NEGLIGIBLE













Receptor



of PME AQS


Percentage of PME

AQS Impact Significance














Receptor



of PME AQS

Impact Significance

90th Percentile of

24-hour Means

Percentage of PME

AQS Impact

Significance













Appendix J – Recirculation Study Report

Recirculation Study Report

Saudi Electricity Company

Recirculation Studies for Various Power Plant

Sites - Duba Power Plant October 2014

Revision 0


Recirculation Studies for Various Power Plant Sites - Duba Power Plant


SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 i

DOCUMENT INFORMATION

Project Recirculation Studies for Various Power Plant Sites - Duba Power Plant

Report Title Recirculation Study Report

Client Saudi Electricity Company

Location Saudi Arabia

Author Abdelhadi Mehdi Ghozali

Project Manager Avni Buyukozer

Project Director Jorge Trindade

Report No. SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00

Format Code SGF09-FMT-QMS-008-03-rev00

DOCUMENT HISTORY

Rev Date Description Issued Reviewed Approved

0 27/10/2014 AGI ABR JWR

SOGREAH GULF FZCO

P.O. Box 18271

Jebel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971 (0)4 886 56 90

Fax : +971 (0)4 886 56 91

Email: [email protected]

ح م ش الخليج سوجرية

17281ص.ب:

، دبي ، الامارات العربية المتحدة جبل علي

: 90 56 886 4(0) 971+تليفون

: 91 56 886 4(0) 971+فاكس

[email protected] ايميل




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 ii

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Sogreah Gulf - Artelia Group was appointed by Saudi Electricity Company (SEC)

to carry out data collection and numerical modelling of thermal effluent transport

(recirculation studies) for the Duba Thermal Power Plant project on the Red Sea

coast of Saudi Arabia.

This report deliverable documents the numerical modelling studies undertaken to

assess various intake / outfall configurations, for the environmental conditions at

the project site.

A detailed TELEMAC-3D model was developed, making use of available field

data, and used to assess thermal effluent transport at the project site.

Direct access to cooler water from deep areas outside the reef is necessary to

comply with plant operational criteria (maximum intake temperature of 31°C),

since water temperatures inside the reef are expected to reach 33°C in late

summer. A numerical simulation of a base case layout (Option 1) proposed by

SEC incorporating an intake basin and an outfall channel both extending to the

edge of the reef was carried out.

The base case layout was found to comply with the PME, plant intake and

temperature criteria. Two other configurations (Option 2 and Option 3) with

different length intake basins were also investigated. Option 2 and Option 3 also

comply with the PME criteria. It is anticipated that the construction costs for Option

2 and Option 3 layouts will be lower than the base case layout.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Executive Summary ........................................................................................ ii

1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 1

1.1 Project Location and Site Characteristics .......................................... 1

1.2 Study Objectives ........................................................................... 2

1.3 Report Structure ............................................................................ 3

2 Intake / Outfall Design Criteria and Layout Concepts ............................ 4

2.1 Design Criteria ............................................................................. 4

2.2 Environmental (Mixing Zone) Criteria .............................................. 4

2.3 Layout Concepts ........................................................................... 5

3 Field Data and Survey Campaign ....................................................... 9

3.1 Field Surveys ................................................................................ 9

3.2 Other Available Data .................................................................. 11

3.2.1 Seawater Temperature .................................................... 11

3.2.2 Air Temperature ............................................................. 12

3.2.3 Wind ............................................................................ 13

3.2.4 Tides ............................................................................. 15

4 Thermal Plume and Hydrodynamic Modelling ..................................... 16

4.1 Numerical Modelling Software ..................................................... 16

4.2 Overview of Modelling Approach ................................................. 17

4.3 Regional Hydrodynamic Model (Red Sea) ...................................... 17

4.3.1 Regional Model Set-Up ................................................... 17

4.3.2 Regional Model Calibration............................................. 18

4.3.3 Regional Model Validation .............................................. 21

4.4 Local Thermal Plume Model (Duba) ............................................... 24

4.4.1 Model Set-Up ................................................................. 24

4.4.2 Modelling Scenarios ....................................................... 26

5 Results ............................................................................................ 28

5.1 Option 1 Layout .......................................................................... 28




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 iv

5.1.1 Scenario 1A: SE Winds .................................................. 28

5.1.2 Scenario 1B: NW Winds ................................................ 36

5.2 Scenario 2 (Option 2 Layout) ....................................................... 44

5.3 Scenario 3 (Option 3 Layout) ....................................................... 52

6 Discussion And Summary ................................................................. 60

7 References ...................................................................................... 61

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1. Project site location plan. Image by Stamen Design, data by

OpenStreetMap (2014). ................................................................................ 1

Figure 2. Extract from Admiralty Chart 159 [1] showing bathymetry in areas

surrounding the project site. ........................................................................... 2

Figure 3. Duba Power Plant proposed layout ................................................... 6

Figure 4. Model Option 1 layout (Base Case). ................................................. 6

Figure 5. Model Option 2 layout. ................................................................... 7

Figure 6. Model Option 3 layout. ................................................................... 7

Figure 7. Regional extent of data collection components ................................... 9

Figure 8. Bed-mounted ADCP current speed time series ................................... 11

Figure 9: Climatic air temperature data for Hurghada Airport [8] ..................... 13

Figure 10: Wind roses for Hurghada Airport [8] ............................................ 13

Figure 11: Wind rose at Duba power Plant site for south-easterly winds (August

2000)........................................................................................................ 14

Figure 12: Wind rose at Duba Power Plant site for north-westerly winds (August

1995)........................................................................................................ 15

Figure 13. Red Sea Hydrodynamic Model computational mesh (left) and

bathymetry (right). ....................................................................................... 18

Figure 14. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Suez (top),

Um Qusur (middle) and Port Sudan (bottom). ................................................. 19

Figure 15. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Yanbu (top),

Jizan (middle) and Djibouti (bottom). ............................................................. 20




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 v

Figure 16. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Aqaba (top),

Jazirat Shakhir (middle) and Rabigh (bottom). ................................................ 22

Figure 17. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Jeddah (top)

and Al Hudaydah (bottom). ......................................................................... 23

Figure 18. Local Model computational mesh and bathymetry. .......................... 25

Figure 19. Schematic diagram of 3D local model, its boundary conditions and

heat transport processes. ............................................................................. 26

Figure 20. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 1A). 29

Figure 21. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the intake level (-14 mMSL)

(Scenario 1A). ............................................................................................ 30

Figure 22. Intake section showing 15-day average seawater temperatures

(Scenario 1A) ............................................................................................. 31

Figure 23. Plume section showing 15-day average seawater temperatures

(Scenario 1A) ............................................................................................. 32

Figure 24. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 1A)........................... 33

Figure 25. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake layer (Scenario1A) ..................... 34

Figure 26. Time series of 15-day average of seawater temperatures at the seaward

end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 1A. .................................................. 35


end of the outfall for Scenario 1A. ................................................................ 35

Figure 28. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 1B). 37

Figure 29. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the intake level (-14mMSL)

(Scenario 1B). ............................................................................................ 38


(Scenario 1B) ............................................................................................. 39


(Scenario 1B) ............................................................................................. 40

Figure 32. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 1B) ........................... 41

Figure 33. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake (Scenario 1B) ............................. 42


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 1B. .................................................. 43




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 vi


end of the outfall for Scenario 1B. ................................................................ 43

Figure 36. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 2). . 45


(Scenario 2). .............................................................................................. 46


(Scenario 2) ............................................................................................... 47


(Scenario 2) ............................................................................................... 48

Figure 40. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 2) ............................. 49

Figure 41. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake (Scenario 2) .............................. 50


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 2. .................................................... 51


end of the outfall for Scenario 2. .................................................................. 51

Figure 44. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 3). . 53


(Scenario 3). .............................................................................................. 54


(Scenario 3) ............................................................................................... 55


(Scenario 3) ............................................................................................... 56

Figure 48. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 3) ............................. 57

Figure 49. 15-day averaged ∆T of the intake layer (Scenario 3) ...................... 58


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 3. .................................................... 59


end of the outfall for Scenario 3. .................................................................. 59

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1. Intake / outfall design criteria. ........................................................... 4

Table 2: Typical summer ambient seawater temperature profile (deep water) ..... 12




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 vii

Table 3: Typical summer ambient seawater salinity profile (deep water) ............ 12

Table 4: Umm Qusur tidal planes ................................................................. 15

Table 5: Summary of modelling scenarios ...................................................... 27




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 1

1 INTRODUCTION

Sogreah Gulf - Artelia Group ("ARTELIA", or "the Consultant") was appointed by

Saudi Electricity Company ("SEC", or "the Client") to carry out data collection and

numerical modelling of thermal effluent transport (recirculation studies) for the Duba

Power Plant project on the Red Sea coast of Saudi Arabia.

The project ("the WORKS") involves the construction of a thermal power plant at a

location approximately 90km south east of the entrance of the Gulf of Aqaba.

This document describes the numerical modelling undertaken to evaluate thermal

recirculation at the project site.

1.1 Project Location and Site Characteristics

The Duba Power Plant site will be constructed on a 1.5km by 1.2km plot (with

marine works extending west of the plot), located approximately 90km south east

of the entrance to the Gulf of Aqaba on the Red Sea coast of Saudi Arabia (Figure

1).

Figure 1. Project site location plan. Image by Stamen Design, data by

OpenStreetMap (2014).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 2

The project site is situated between the Ra’s Wadi Tarim to the north and Al

Muwaylih to the south (Figure 2). The nearshore bathymetry features shallow and

exposed reefs together with very deep (>300m) water close to the shoreline [1].

Figure 2. Extract from Admiralty Chart 159 [1] showing bathymetry in areas

surrounding the project site.

1.2 Study Objectives

The objectives of the recirculation study are to:

– Determine the impact of the thermal discharge from the power plant (i.e. the

extent of temperature increases above ambient seawater temperature);

– Assess the potential of thermal recirculation which could impede the

efficiency the power plant operations; and to

– Recommend suitable layout concepts for the intake / outfall channels.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 3

1.3 Report Structure

The report is structured as follows:

– Section 1 - Introduction.

– Section 2 - Intake / Outfall Design Criteria and Layout Concepts. This section

sets the basis for the assessment of the intake / outfall configuration and

presents the layout concepts.

– Section 3 - Available Data. This section briefly describes the data collection

activities and identifies the various datasets and information used as input to

the study.

– Section 4 - Thermal Plume and Hydrodynamic Modelling. This section

describes the numerical modelling methodology.

– Section 5 - Results (Thermal Plume Modelling). This section presents the results

for the numerical modelling scenarios.

– Section 6 – Discussion and Summary. This section discusses the key findings

of the thermal plume modelling.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 4

2 INTAKE / OUTFALL DESIGN CRITERIA AND LAYOUT

CONCEPTS

2.1 Design Criteria

Basic (non-exhaustive) plant design criteria for the intake / outfall system were

provided by SEC and are reproduced in Table 1.

Table 1. Intake / outfall design criteria.

Intake discharge 80,000m3/hr (continuous)

Maximum permissible velocity of

seawater in intake / pipes

1.5m/s

Maximum permissible velocity of

seawater at entrance to pumping

station

0.3m/s

Maximum permissible seawater

temperature at intake pipes

31°C

Outfall discharge 80,000m3/hr (continuous)

Temperature of effluent (at outfall) 5°C above temperature of intake

Salinity of effluent (at outfall) Identical to salinity of ambient seawater

at intake (i.e. negligible brine content)

2.2 Environmental (Mixing Zone) Criteria

Environmental criteria for power plant discharges in Saudi Arabia are regulated

by the Presidency of Meteorology and Environment (PME), under the recently

published National Environmental Standard for Ambient Water Quality [2]. This

standard revises the General Standards for the Environment [3].

The new standard [2] specifies changes in ambient seawater temperatures (ΔT) not

to be exceeded outside the effluent mixing zone, which is defined based on the

local water depth and on whether the site is classified as “Marine” (the default),

“High Value”, or “Industrial”. As confirmed by SEC, the site will be classified as

"Industrial". The "Industrial" classification allows for a maximum ΔT = 4°C outside

the mixing zone.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 5

Based on typical water depths less than 5m and an "Industrial" site classification,

the horizontal extent of the mixing zone for an outfall located near the shore is

40m [2]. This increases to 100m (the maximum permissible) for an outfall located

in 13m water depths.

According to Article I 5 of the standard, the specified value of ΔT (4°C) may be

exceeded inside the mixing zone provided that other criteria are met, including:

– Acutely toxic conditions are not reached (based on testing for Whole Effluent

Toxicity);

– The mixing zone does not impinge on sensitive areas, such as coral reefs,

recreational areas or important spawning or nursery areas for aquatic

organisms; and

– The mixing zone does not impinge the mean low water spring (MLWS)

shoreline.

Assuming all other requirements for the effluent are met (e.g. with regard to

toxicity, etc.), the target for compliance with mixing zone criteria is to ensure

ambient seawater temperatures do not increase by more than 4°C at (i) distances

greater than 40m from end of the outfall, (ii) coral reef areas, or (iii) the MLWS

shoreline.

2.3 Layout Concepts

Three different layout concepts were investigated:

- Option 1 (Base Case) – 300m long Intake lagoon / enclosure with submerged

pipes at the natural seabed level of -14mMSL. An outfall channel guided by

breakwaters. This layout was based on SEC’s proposed layout [4] (Figure 3

and Figure 4).

- Option 2 – 200m long intake lagoon with a 100m long dredged channel

at -15mMSL. This layout was based on the results of Option 1 and was

proposed by the Consultant (Figure 5)

- Option 3 – 100m long intake lagoon with a 200m long dredged channel

at -15mMSL. This layout was based on the results of Option 1 and Option 2

and was proposed by the Consultant (Figure 6)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 6

Figure 3. Duba Power Plant proposed layout

Figure 4. Model Option 1 layout (Base Case).

Intake Lagoon

Breakwater

Outfall Channel

dredged to -1.5 mMSL




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 7

Figure 5. Model Option 2 layout.

Figure 6. Model Option 3 layout.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 8

The options above are listed in order of decreasing capital constructions cost.

Option 1 was developed to investigate the potential for a submerged array of

pipes set at approximately -14mMSL to convey cooler water from near the seabed

(-15mMSL) to an enclosed intake basin (Figure 4). The outfall channel located at

the southern end of the site and flanked by two 300m long breakwaters is to be

dredged to -1.5mMSL.

Option 2 is similar to Option 1 but with a 200m long intake basin (100m shorter

than Option 1) and a trapezoidal channel dredged to -15mMSL to convey cooler

water from the edge of the reef to the intake pipes set at approximately -14mMSL.

Option 3 is a variant of Option 2, with a 100m long intake basin (200m shorter

than Option 1) and a similar trapezoidal channel dredged to -15mMSL to convey

cooler water from the edge of the reef to the intake pipes set at

approximately -14mMSL.

Shortening of the outfall breakwaters was not considered as an option because of

the potential impact of the outflow on the coral reef area.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 9

3 FIELD DATA AND SURVEY CAMPAIGN

3.1 Field Surveys

The data collection programme was completed during a 3 week period that

encompasses a spring and neap tide cycle [5]. A weather station was

commissioned on the 25th June 2014 at the nearby Coast Guard base. On the

same date, a bed mounted ADCP (Fixed ADCP in approximately 19m water

depth) was deployed for a 3 week period (Figure 7). A non-vented tide gauge was

also deployed for the same time period.

ADCP transects were conducted on subsequent days along Transect 1 and

Transect 2 (Figure 7). Thermistor strings to measure conductivity and temperature

were deployed at strategic locations within the study area.

Figure 7. Regional extent of data collection components

Measured currents were typically less than 0.2m/s, as shown in Figure 8 for the

fixed (bed-mounted) ADCP.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 10




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 11

Figure 8. Bed-mounted ADCP current speed time series

3.2 Other Available Data

3.2.1 Seawater Temperature

No long-term measurements of ambient seawater temperature or salinity were

available for the project site. "Typical" summer ambient profiles were estimated

based on the Journal of Geophysical Research, 2007 [6]. The paper includes data

collected along a transect in the northern Red Sea during August 2001. The survey

indicates spatially uniform seawater temperatures and salinity. The temperature

profile is reasonably consistent with the sea surface temperature contours in the

Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot [4] and profiles available within the NOAA World

Oceanographic Database (WOD) [7]. The majority of the CTD casts were in deep

water and it is noted that temperatures may be higher in the reef areas. The

resulting simplified typical (deep water) summer temperature and salinity profiles

are shown in Table 2 and Table 3 respectively.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 12

Table 2: Typical summer ambient seawater temperature profile (deep water)

Approximate Water Depth (m) Temperature (°C)

Less than 30 31

30 to 40 26

40 to 50 25

50 to 60 24

60 to 80 23

Greater than or equal to 100 22

Table 3: Typical summer ambient seawater salinity profile (deep water)

Approximate Water Depth (m) Salinity (PSU)

Less than 50 40

50 to 60 40.1

60 to 80 40.2

Greater than or equal to 100 40.5

3.2.2 Air Temperature

A statistical summary of climatic air temperature data is provided in the Red Sea

and Gulf of Aden Pilot [8] for the nearby World Meteorological organization

station number 62463 (Hurghada Airport), which is approximately 170 km west

of the Duba Power Plant site. The climate information is based on data spanning

an 18 year period (1990-2007). The mean daily maximum and minimum air

temperature are approximately 37.5 °C and 27.5 °C, respectively (Figure 9).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 13

Figure 9: Climatic air temperature data for Hurghada Airport [8]

3.2.3 Wind

Wind roses are provided in the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot [8] for Hurghada

Airport (Figure 10). The roses indicate strong prevailing winds, predominantly from

the westerly to northerly sectors, with less frequent south-westerly winds. Wind

speeds are typically less than 10 m/s in summer months.

Figure 10: Wind roses for Hurghada Airport [8]




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 14

10m elevation 10-minute average wind speed data was obtained from the

European Centre for Medium-Range Weather Forecasts (ECMWF) [9]. ECMWF is

an intergovernmental organisation supported by 34 states, which provides

operational medium- and extended-range forecasts. The data, which includes

atmospheric parameters (e.g. wind speeds) on a global 2.5° grid at 6-hourly

intervals for the period 1992 to 2002, was analysed to identify "typical"

representative wind conditions for use in the recirculation study (Section 4). Two

relatively calm summer periods, one between 29th of July to 31st of August 2000

(hereafter referred to as south-easterly winds) and another between 29th of July to

31st of August 1995 (hereafter referred to as north-westerly winds) were selected

for further analysis.

The wind roses at the project site for south-easterly (SE) winds (August 2000) and

north-westerly (NW) winds (August 1995) are shown in Figure 11 and Figure 12.

Figure 11: Wind rose at Duba power Plant site for south-easterly winds (August

2000)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 15

Figure 12: Wind rose at Duba Power Plant site for north-westerly winds (August

1995)

3.2.4 Tides

The tidal range at the project site is small (MHWS – MLWS = 0.5m). Tides are

predominantly semi-diurnal. Characteristic tidal planes at Umm Qusur (an

admiralty station located at 30km north Duba Power Plant site) are listed in Table

4 [10].

Table 4: Umm Qusur tidal planes

Characteristic Tidal Plane Elevation (mCD) Elevation (mMSL)

Highest Astronomical Tide (HAT) +1.0 +0.5

Mean High Water Spring (MHWS) +0.8 +0.3

Mean High Water Neap (MHWN) +0.7 +0.2

Mean Sea Level (MSL) +0.5 +0.0

Mean Low Water Neap (MLWN) +0.4 -0.1

Mean Low Water Spring (MLWS) +0.3 -0.2

Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT) +0.13 -0.37




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 16

4 THERMAL PLUME AND HYDRODYNAMIC MODELLING

4.1 Numerical Modelling Software

A TELEMAC-3D flow model was developed to simulate the transport of thermal

effluent by tide-, wind- and density-driven currents in areas surrounding the

proposed Duba Power Plant site. TELEMAC-3D is part of TELEMAC (Hervouet,

2007) , a finite element-based hydrodynamic modelling system under development

since 1987 by Laboratoire National d’Hydraulique (LNHE) of Electricite de France

(EDF). The system is widely used (over 150 commercial licenses issued worldwide

prior to the open source distribution era, which commenced in 2010) and has

been extensively documented and validated in accordance with the

recommendations of the International Association of Hydraulic Research (IAHR).

TELEMAC-3D solves the Navier-Stokes equations of free surface flow in three

dimensions (with or without the hydrostatic pressure assumption) and the transport-

diffusion equations of intrinsic quantities (temperature, salinity, concentration). The

equations are solved using finite element (or alternatively, finite volume) methods,

which allow for discretization of the domain on flexible, multi-layered, unstructured

meshes (typically consisting of triangular prisms). The principle advantage of this

approach is that it enables accurate representation of complex coastlines and

detailed bathymetry with maximum computational efficiency.

TELEMAC-3D accounts for the following phenomena, many of which are important

in assessing flow and transport in rivers, lakes, coastal embayments and seas:

– Influence of temperature or salinity on density;

– Bottom friction;

– Coriolis force;

– Atmospheric pressure and wind effects;

– Heat exchange with atmosphere;

– Fluid and momentum sources and sinks within the domain;

– First order (constant diffusivity) or complex (k-epsilon) turbulence models

including effects of Archimedes’ force (buoyancy);

– Wetting and drying (e.g. tidal flats and floodplains); and

– Tracer (conservative or decaying) transport and diffusion by currents.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 17

4.2 Overview of Modelling Approach

The recirculation study was carried out in two stages:

– Stage 1 – Regional Hydrodynamic Model. A large scale 3-D hydrodynamic

model of the Red Sea (Section 4.3) was used to establish general regional

circulation patterns and provide boundary conditions for the Local Thermal

Plume Model.

– Stage 2 – Local Thermal Plume Model. A local scale 3-D model of the Duba

Power Plant site and surrounding areas (Section 4.4) was used to evaluate

thermal effluent transport (advection and diffusion) and recirculation, using

hydrodynamic boundary condition input supplied by the Regional Model.

4.3 Regional Hydrodynamic Model (Red Sea)

A TELEMAC-3D model of the Red Sea was developed, calibrated and validated

against tidal constituents at various locations throughout the region. The Regional

Model establishes general circulation patterns around the Red Sea due to tides and

wind, including along the Duba Power Plant site coast, and provides boundary

conditions to the nested Local Thermal Plume Model (Section 4.4).

4.3.1 Regional Model Set-Up

The computational domain of the TELEMAC-3D Regional Hydrodynamic Model

extends from Suez in the north of the Red Sea to the open sea boundary between

Aden and Berbera in the Gulf of Aden. The model bathymetry and computational

mesh are shown in Figure 13. The mesh consists of more than 590,000 triangular

prismatic elements and 12 layers, with increased resolution at areas of steep

bathymetry and the Bab-el-Mandeb Strait, which connects the Red Sea to the Gulf

of Aden.

The coastline and bathymetry of the model were generated from:

– Digitized Admiralty charts;

– The GEBCO_08 Grid [11], a global continuous terrain (land and sea) model

with a spatial resolution of 30 arc-seconds.

The open boundary between Aden and Berbera was forced using Admiralty tide

predictions [10]. Wind boundary conditions were applied as spatially varying

wind fields, based on 10m elevation (10-min average) wind speeds output at 6-

hourly intervals from the ECMWF database (Dee et al., 2011) and linearly

interpolated to the Red Sea model mesh.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 18

Figure 13. Red Sea Hydrodynamic Model computational mesh (left) and

bathymetry (right).

4.3.2 Regional Model Calibration

The Red Sea hydrodynamic model was calibrated against Admiralty tides at the

following locations / stations (Figure 13):

– Suez;

– Um Qusur;

– Port Sudan;

– Madinat Yanbu as Sinaiyah;

– Jizan; and

– Djibouti.

Based on the final calibrated model parameters, Admiralty tide predictions and

model-predicted free surface elevations are shown in Figure 14 and Figure 15 for

the calibration period (7th January to 4th February 2001). The model captures the

variation in tidal range throughout the Red Sea, with peak values (greater than

2m) occurring in the north and near the Bab el Mandeb strait in the south. Tidal

Jeddah

Aqaba Suez

Yanbu

Port Sudan

Jizan

Djibouti

Jeddah

Aqaba Suez

Yanbu

Port Sudan

Jizan

Djibouti

Um Qusur Um Qusur Jazirat Shakhir

Al Hudaydah

Rabigh




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 19

ranges decrease to less than 0.1m at mid-latitudes (i.e. in the region between

Jeddah and Port Sudan).

Figure 14. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Suez (top),

Um Qusur (middle) and Port Sudan (bottom).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 20

Figure 15. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Yanbu (top),

Jizan (middle) and Djibouti (bottom).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 21

4.3.3 Regional Model Validation

Once the final Red Sea model parameter values were established through

calibration, goodness-of-fit between the model-predicted values and field

measurements was reassessed (validated) at the following locations / stations

(Figure 13):

– Aqaba;

– Jazirat Shakhir;

– Rabigh;

– Jeddah; and

– Al Hudaydah.

The spatial variation in tidal range is captured by the model for the locations listed

above. In particular, and of relevance to the present study, the small modelled tidal

range at Umm Qusur station matches the harmonic predictions.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 22

Figure 16. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Aqaba (top),

Jazirat Shakhir (middle) and Rabigh (bottom).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 23

Figure 17. Admiralty tide predictions and modelled tidal elevations at Jeddah (top)

and Al Hudaydah (bottom).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 24

4.4 Local Thermal Plume Model (Duba)

For the purpose of investigating transport and mixing of thermal effluent at the

power plant site, a local scale TELEMAC-3D model was developed to cover the site

and surrounding areas. The Local Model was driven (forced) by boundary

conditions extracted from the Regional (Red Sea) Hydrodynamic Model (Section

4.3).

4.4.1 Model Set-Up

A three-dimensional hydrodynamic and temperature model (TELEMAC-3D) was

developed for the Duba Power Plant site. The model bathymetry was based on

digitized Admiralty charts, GEBCO data (described in Section 3.1) and the

bathymetry collected on site (which only covers the area near the plant). The model

mesh was refined in areas surrounding the Duba Power Plant site to provide better

resolution of coastal and bathymetric features affecting local hydrodynamics (such

as the shallow reef areas). The model computational mesh, layer structure and

bathymetry are shown for the future (post-development) scenario in Figure 18. The

number and position of the model layers were selected to provide a suitable

compromise in terms of resolving ambient temperature and salinity gradients,

intake / outfall flow structure and to ensure compliance with Courant numerical

stability criteria (Figure 19). The ambient seawater temperature in the model was

initialized to 31°C based on the discussion in Section 3.2.1. The mesh consists of

around 360,000 triangular prismatic elements and 10 layers, with increased

resolution at the project site (characteristic element edge lengths around 10m).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 25

Figure 18. Local Model computational mesh and bathymetry.

The open boundary conditions used to drive the hydrodynamic model consisted of:

– Temporally and spatially varying water levels and currents extracted directly

from the Regional Hydrodynamic Model (Section 4.3);

– Prescribed seawater temperature and salinity at the open sea boundary

(Section 3.2.1);

– Diurnally varying air temperature (Section 3.2.2)

– Temporally varying wind fields (Section3.2.2);

– Specified outfall flow rates, temperature and salinity for post-development

scenarios (Section 2.1); and

– Specified intake flow rates for post-development scenarios (Section 2.1).

These boundary conditions and the key processes affecting seawater temperatures

computed by the model are shown schematized in Figure 19.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 26

Figure 19. Schematic diagram of 3D local model, its boundary conditions and

heat transport processes.

4.4.2 Modelling Scenarios

For the purpose of investigating transport, dilution and recirculation of thermal

effluent at the power plant site, a continuous discharge at both the intake and

outfall was simulated

After an initial "spin-up" period of approximately 3 days, the flow at the intake

and outfall were initialised based on the criteria described in Section 2.1. An

increase in temperature of 5°C (above the ambient at the intake head) was applied

to the outfall discharge.

Two periods were investigated for Option 1 Layout:

– A calm weather period with south-easterly winds; and

– A calm weather period with north-westerly winds.

Simulation results indicated that the south-easterly wind period marginally

represents the most critical condition for plant operations. Therefore, Option 2 and

Option 3 layouts were simulated only for the south-easterly wind period.

Open boundary




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 27

A summary of the full set of modelling scenarios is provided in Table 5.

Table 5: Summary of modelling scenarios

Scenario Layout Predominant Wind

Conditions

Scenario 1A Option 1 south-east

Scenario 1B Option 1 north-west

Scenario 2 Option 2 south-east

Scenario 3 Option 3 south-east




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 28

5 RESULTS

Pre- and post-development cases were modelled to investigate the thermal plume

dispersion and recirculation characteristics of the project development. This section

provides the results of the three layout options that were modelled.

5.1 Option 1 Layout

5.1.1 Scenario 1A: SE Winds

Option 1 layout driven by a calm weather period with south-easterly winds was

simulated for Scenario 1A. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface

and intake level (intake pipes at -14mMSL) are shown in Figure 20 and Figure 21.

Sections through the thermal plume and at the intake showing 15-day averaged

seawater temperatures are provided in Figure 22 to Figure 23.

To indicate the extent of the actual mixing zone (based on an "Industrial" site

classification, which uses a temperature criterion of ∆T = 4°C), plots of ∆T (the

difference between the 15-day average temperature for the post-development and

the pre-development) are presented at the surface and intake layer (Figure 24 and

Figure 25). The extent of the mixing zone does not impinge beyond the maximum

regulatory length of 40m, within which this temperature criterion may be

exceeded.

Time series plots of seawater temperature at the seaward end of the intake

enclosure, at the elevation of the submerged pipe inlet (-14 mMSL), and at the

seaward end of the outfall at the surface are provided in Figure 26 and Figure 27.

The temperature at the intake is not influenced by the thermal plume released from

the outfall and the temperature remained below the plant intake temperature

criteria of 31°C.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 29

Figure 20. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 1A).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 30

Figure 21. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the intake level (-14 mMSL)

(Scenario 1A).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 31


(Scenario 1A)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 32


(Scenario 1A)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 33

Figure 24. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 1A)

T2




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 34

Figure 25. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake layer (Scenario1A)

T1




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 35


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 1A.


end of the outfall for Scenario 1A.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 36

5.1.2 Scenario 1B: NW Winds

Option 1 layout driven by a calm weather period with north-westerly winds was

simulated for Scenario 1B. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface

and intake level (intake pipes at -14mMSL) are shown in Figure 28 and Figure 29.

Sections through the thermal plume and at the intake showing 15-day averaged

seawater temperatures are provided in Figure 30 and Figure 31.

To indicate the extent of the actual mixing zone, where ∆T may exceed 4°C, plots

of ∆T are presented at the surface and intake layer (Figure 32 and Figure 33). The

extent of the mixing zone does not impinge beyond the maximum regulatory length

of 40m, within which this temperature criterion may be exceeded.






criteria of 31°C.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 37

Figure 28. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 1B).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 38


(Scenario 1B).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 39


(Scenario 1B)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 40


(Scenario 1B)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 41

Figure 32. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 1B)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 42

Figure 33. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake (Scenario 1B)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 43


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 1B.


end of the outfall for Scenario 1B.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 44

5.2 Scenario 2 (Option 2 Layout)


simulated for Scenario 2. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface

and intake depth (intake pipes at -14mMSL) are shown in Figure 36 and Figure

37.

Sections through the thermal plume and the dredged intake channel showing

15-day average seawater temperatures are provided in Figure 38 and Figure 39.










criteria of 31°C.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 45

Figure 36. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 2).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 46


(Scenario 2).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 47


(Scenario 2)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 48


(Scenario 2)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 49

Figure 40. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 2)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 50

Figure 41. 15-day averaged ∆T at the intake (Scenario 2)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 51


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 2.


end of the outfall for Scenario 2.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 52

5.3 Scenario 3 (Option 3 Layout)


simulated for Scenario 3. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface

and intake depth (intake pipes at -14mMSL) are shown in Figure 44 and Figure

45.

Sections through the thermal plume and the dredged intake channel showing 15-

day average seawater temperatures are provided in Figure 46 and Figure 47.










criteria of 31°C.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 53

Figure 44. 15-day average seawater temperatures at the surface (Scenario 3).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 54


(Scenario 3).




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 55


(Scenario 3)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 56


(Scenario 3)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 57

Figure 48. 15-day averaged ∆T at the surface (Scenario 3)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 58

Figure 49. 15-day averaged ∆T of the intake layer (Scenario 3)




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 59


end of the intake enclosure for Scenario 3.


end of the outfall for Scenario 3.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 60

6 DISCUSSION AND SUMMARY

A detailed TELEMAC-3D hydrodynamic model was developed and used to

quantitatively assess thermal effluent transport and dispersion for a number of

layouts, and environmental conditions at the Duba Power Plant site.

The numerical modelling results presented in Section 5 for various intake/outfall

configurations are discussed herein, in relation to compliance/non-compliance

with:

– Plant intake temperature criterion (i.e. T < 31°C) and

– PME environmental criterion (i.e. 15-day average ΔT < 4°C outside of the

mixing zone)

The layout of the base case (Option 1) comprises a 300m long intake enclosure

with submerged pipes at the natural seabed level of -14mMSL and an outfall

channel constrained by breakwaters. Option 1 complies with all of the criteria of

the project. An economical alternative (Option 2) was investigated by reducing the

intake lagoon length by 100m and providing a dredged channel at a bed level

of -15mMSL to convey cool water from offshore. Option 2 also complies with all

the criteria of the project. A third option (Option 3) investigated a further reduction

in the lagoon length by 200m and an increase in the length of the dredged

channel. Option 3 also complies with all of the criteria of the project. Shortening of

the outfall breakwaters was not considered as an option because of the potential

impact of the outflow on the coral reef area.

At the project site, the ambient tide- and wind-generated currents are weak

(typically less than 0.2m/s) both inside and outside the reef areas, confirming

initial field observations. The prevailing wind has little influence on the thermal

plume transport and mixing, with the predominant south-easterly wind condition

being only slightly more unfavourable for all layouts investigated.

The plant operational criteria (maximum intake temperature of 31°C), is satisfied

for all scenarios modelled and there is negligible recirculation observed during the

simulations.

PME mixing zone criteria are satisfied for all scenarios modelled (∆T < 4°C)

outside the 40m mixing zone – maximum allowable for industrial classification of

power plants. All three options presented comply with all the criteria discussed in

this report.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 61

7 REFERENCES

[1] U.K.H.O, "Admiralty Chart 159 – Suez (as Suways) to Berenice

(Barnis). Edition Number: 3," 2013.

[2] Presidency and Rules of Meteorology and Environment. National

Environmental Standard – Water Quality. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,

Presidency of Meteorology and Environment, 2012.

[3] PME. General Environmental Regulations and Rules for

Implementation. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Presidency of

Meteorology and Environment, 2001.

[4] Saudi Electricity Company, "Duba No. 1 Combined Cycle Power

Plant Preliminary Comceptual Layout - GESDRW-DP-G-01 Rev. 2

Dated 12-06-2014," 2014.

[5] Sogreah Gulf - Artelia Group, "Data Collection Report - SGF11129-

RPT-MRN-055-00," 2014.

[6] S. Sofianos and W. Johns, "Observation of the summer Red Sea

circulation, C06025," Journal Of Geophysical Research, vol. 112,

2007.

[7] "NOAA, World Ocean Database (WOD09). National

Oceangraphic Data Center, Uited States Department of Commerce,"

2009. [Online]. [Accessed June 2014].

[8] U.K.H.O. Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot. 16th Edition, 2009.

[9] D. Dee, S. Uppala, A. Simmons, P. Berrisford, P. Poli, S. Kobayashi,

U. Andrae, M. Balmaseda, G. Balsamo, P. Bauer, P. Bechtold, A.

Beljaars, L. Van de Berg, J. Bidlot, N. Bormann, C. Delsol, R.

Dragani, M. Fuentes, A. Geer, L. Haimberger, S. Healy, H.

Hersbach, E. Holm, L. Isaksen, P. Kallberg, M. Kohler, M.

Matricardi, A. McNally, B. Monge-Sanz, J. Morcrette, B. Park, C.

Peubey, P. de Rosnay, C. Tavolato, J. Thepaut and F. Vitart, "The

ERA-Interim reanalysis: configuration and performance of the data

assimilation system. Q. J. R. Meteorol. Soc. 137: 553-597.," 2011.




SGF11129-RPT-MRN-052-00 62

[Online]. [Accessed May 2014].

[10] U.K.H.O, Admiralty Chart 159. Volume 3 – Indian Ocean and South

China Sea, 2011.

[11] "General Bathymetric Chart of the Oceans web site : Gridded

bathymetry data," 2008. [Online]. [Accessed May 2014].

WSP Middle East Ltd P.O. Box 7497 Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel: +971 4 350 5000 Fax: +971 4 350 5001

NOTICE - EXIM

Documents

Transcript of NOTICE - EXIM